0 




00' 



0'^ 




X 



I 



A 



PEACTICAL INTR0DUCTI0:N 

TO 

GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION. 

PART II. 

(THE PARTICLES.) 

BY 

THOMAS KERCHEVEE ARNOLD, M.A, 

EECTOFv OF LYXDOX, 
A^'D LATE FELLOW OF TEES'ITY COLLEGE, CAiTBKIDGE. 

FIRST AMERICAN EDITION, REVISED AND IMPROVED. 



N E W Y 0 Pv K : 
D. AFPLETOX & CO., 443 & 445 BROADWAY. 

1866. 



Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1851, by 
D APPLETOJS^ k COMPANY^ 
in the Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Southern District 

of New-York. 



486656 



PREFACE. 



In preparing the present volume for use in Ame- 
rican schools and colleges, the Editor has judged, 
it most advisable to abridge somewhat the length 
of the Exercises, whilst retaining all the critical and 
grammatical apparatus for a thorough understanding 
of the use of the Greek Particles in Prose Composi- 
tion. He ventures to hope that the volume has in 
this way lost none of its utility for students in gen- 
eral, but rather the reverse. The Editor has also 
given some (but by no means full) directions with 
reference to the arrangement of words in sentences, 
as well as some hints as to the position of particles in 
a sentence. 

It has not been deemed expedient to attempt to 
supply an English-Greek Vocabulary, especially as 
the very excellent English-Greek Lexicon of Yonge, 
edited by Prof. Drisler, will shortly be accessible to 
students. 



iv 



PEEFACE. 



The Editor takes pleasure in acknowledging his 
indebtedness to his late coadjutor, Prof. Hyde, of 
Burlington College, for several suggestions tending to 
increase the value of the present volume. 

J . -A.. S. 

Kew- York, Sept 1 *t 1 5 1 1 



PREFACE TO THE ENGLISH EDITION. 



The following work is tlie completion of ray " Practical Intro- 
duction to Greek Prose ComjDosition," — a completion that liaa 
been long announced, but long suspended in consequence 

i ■ partly of ill-liealtli and partly of more pressing engagements. 
I am bappy in having tins opportunity of bearing testimony 
to the o'eneral excellence of Mr. Dale's recent Translation of 
ThucydideSj contaii:^d in Mr. Bobn's Classical Library. I have 
found it nearly always an extremely accurate, and veiy often an 
extremely bappy version of that difficult author. The volumes 
of Plato that have hitherto appeared in that collection, are also, - 

; as far as my acquaintance with them enables me to pronounce 
an opinion, very creditable to their respective Translators, Mr. 
Caiy (whose translation of the Gorgias has supphed me with 
many examples) and Mr. Davis. I need not say, that Mr. 

I Kennedy's Translation of the Speeches of Demosthenes against 
Aphobus and Onetor is both accurate and elegant. 



II 



VI PKEFACE. 

To the translatoi's of a past geneiation my principal obli- 
g'ations are due to Spelman, the translator of the Anabasis, and 
Sir W. Jones, whose vei*sion of the Orations of Isseiis is usually 
correct, and is accompanied with very instructive Introductions 
and Notes. 

T. K A. 

Lyndon, Aug. 19, 1850. 



f 



i 



CONTENTS OF PART 11. 



PAGE 

Introductory Remarks on the position of words in a sentence . 9 



CHAP. SECT. 

1. 1. AA.Xci . • • • • • .15 

2. yih—aXXd ..... 11 

3. Ov ix6vov — aWh. [/cat] . . • . .18 

4. *AAAa Koi without ixovov preceding . . .21 

5. *AAA* ov {aXXa, ixi)] , . . . .22 

6. 'AAA.a inceptive ..... 24 

7. *AA\a in repeated suppositions, made interrogatively and 

rejected . . . . . .25 

8. 'AAAa- dXX' ovv* dA\* oZv — y4 . . .27 

9. 'AXXa . . . . . . .29 

10. Oh /J.TJV aWd' ov (xivTOi aXXd . . . 31 

11. *AAAa . . . ydp* aXXa yap . • . • . 33 

12. *A\X* ij, &c, . . . . . . 36 

2. 1. *'AAAwy. ''AWus re Kai .... . 41 

2. ^'AAAws T€ . , . , . .43 

3. *'AAAws (continued) . . . , .45 

3. 1. *'A^a . . . , . . 46 
2. '^Afj.a (with participles) . . . . ,48 

4. l.f *'Az/. (Repetition of &v) . . . . 50 

2. De omisso &y propter aliud &v {Hermann) . . 54 

3. *'Aj/. {"Av omitted with eSe^, ^v, (fee.) . . 55 

4. JteSet &c. with itv expressed . . . .5*7 

5. On the omission or insertion of with ^(peXoVy EfxeWoy, 

i^ovKSjiTju, €(p7]v . . . . c 69 



2 



CONTENTS. 



CHAP. SECT. PAGE 



{>. 


1 J V A 1 

l.j- Apa ...... 


. ol 




ii. Apct ID inieiences, or, iis coiiciusive use . 






3. ^Apa in the recognition of a past mistake 


. 65 




^. iLl \^CLy) CLpOL • • • • • 


• DO 




0. lis apa 


/? o 
DO 




6. AAA apa . . • • 


69 


6. 


1. Arap , • • ■• • • 


71 


h 
i 


l.J Av . • • • • • 


'70 




22. Au ^TraAo' ai/, iSCj • • • 


to 


o 

O. 




77 


n 


AvtIku . . • • • • 


. i 0 


10. 


l.f Tap. Tap at the commencement of naiTatives, (fee. 


oO 




2. Tap anticipative ..... 


. 83 




o. 1 ap m (][uesiions • • 






4. Tt 7ap ; . . • . . • 


. 06 




0. 1 ap m replies . . • • 


• 0 < 




D. 0u 7ap aVy &c. . • • . . 


. 89 


1 km 


1 4. W 

X«T&C • • • • • • 


on 




1 e m repues . • • • • 






o. le witn pionounsj eTret, oTrwy, oic. • • 


O/l 




4. 1 e witn pronouns continued. . • • 


. 95 




5. Fe in exclamations . . • • 


Vo 




6. Fe with other particles. — y\ {j-Tiy . • • 


no 

. yo 




/. 16 fieVTOl . • • . • • • 






o. Fe Oi^. ye oijTTov • • • . 


. lUl 




. 9. Fc TOi. ye tol drj , , • • 


1 AO 

lOo 




10. ETret 76. el 7€ . 


. 105 




11. f Ae 7€ . . . • 


107 




iz. j\.ai — ye . • • • • 




12. 


1. Ae {jxev — oe) ...... 


1 1 A 

110 




2. Mej'— juev— Se— Se . • . • 






8. A€ = autem . ... 


115 




4. Ko2— Se ..... 


. 116 




6. Ae in apodosi . . . 


117 




6. Mei/ — Se resolved by whereas or whilst 


. 119 




7. Ae in rephes, questions, and personal addresses 


121 




8. Ae' as resumptive .... 


123 



* 2pa, the interrogative panicle, stands first in its sentence. 



CONTENTS. 



3 







PAGE 


13. 




• • • • • • 


124 






t* y WILU. dLlVclUo Ui llillo . , , > 








h\ with iniDerativpa 








c\ with rftfprpnCP to "mivinncipci nf "nvpvpn+irkn na- 










- 125 






(T\ in P5rnlanatio"n«s 








6^ with demonstrativpa - 
























/<- j siiXix uiaenniies ... , 


- 126 






«■ ^ 07/ Tti 07/ TTOU \ OT]TvOVj. 07] TTOTC I OT/TTOTC 1 * ^ 


> 






X"! flTtpv PYT^TPQtnn'nQ n'f TmrnTiPT* nnrl rJprrvpp 


127 




9 


1 ap 07/, OiU . . • . , 


. 130 




Q 
o. 


i*P'l"vr»aT^P<^'f 1 VP on/^ TPonTviT^'fixTP 
JlXT] 1 cLl UBUtJCLlV tJ dliU. rcoULLl Ull Vc • . • 


132 




4. 


Kai — B-f] as annective . . 


. 134 




5. 


Kal St? 


137 




6. 


At} in lively suppositions 


. 139 




7. 




140 


14. 


t 




142 


15. 


f Arira ... ... 


144 


16. 




Ai(^, SiSirep . , , , , 


. 146 


17. 




Jrt . , . ... 


147 


18. 


1. 


Et, if — whether . . . . . 


. 148 




2. 


Et 5e fi^ {iay Se fir}) • • • . 


150 




3. 


"El fM-f] . . . . . , 


. 162 




4. 


El fxrj €1 . . 


153 




5. 


Ei KaL Koi €£ . • • • . 


. 155 




6. 


Ou5' €i. elf Tis, (fee. . . , . . 


157 


19. 




EiTTep (aAA* e^Treo) . • , , 


. 159 


20. 




Elra, eireira , . . . . * 


160 


21. 




Elfre . . . . 


. 163 


22. 




'ETTCi, iirci^'fj ...... 


165 


23. 




''Ert . , . . . 


. 167 


24. 




H . • . . • • 


168 


25. 




H . • . • . 


. 171 


26. 




"U^rj (jam) . . . 


174 



* It is only in Homer and Pindar that St] stands at the beginning of a propositioo 
or clause. (M.) 



4 



CONTENTS. 



CHAP. SECT. 

27. ^Ij/a 

28. 1. Kat . . . 

(/cat) — Kai — Kai . . • , , 

6 awrJs (i(Tos, &C.) — Kai , , , 

ou (p^dvca {ajuOi i)B7]) — Kai • • 

2. Kat (continued) .... 

/cat vup. Kal t6t€ , , . , 

Kai = and also .... 
Kal — re: limited use of this combination in At- 
tic writers .... 

8. Kat (continued) .... 

Kai "with reference to implied notions : Kal av 

t6s. Kal ovTos. Kal ravra . 
Kat usually in both members of a comparison 
^ Kal, &c. .... 
€^ (ws) Tts Kal iiAAos . • 
6 (ot) Kat . . • • 

4. Kat (continued) .... 
Kat after interrogatives 
heel (eTTttS^, *iva) Kai . • 

6. Kat (continued) . 
Kai = even, very 

Kai (or ou5e, /JiTjdf) used adversatively "with par 
ticiples .... 

Kal /ioAa (Kai \iav) with frajection 
6. Koi (continued) . 

Ka^ = if only, though but, merely (the mere), <fea 

rh Kal \4yeiv, Kal iraAat, <fec. 

Kat strengthening an indefinite notion 

Kat Tts Kat. Kal ert Kal vvv» Kal Kai 

Kai = and so , . . 

'7. Kal yap ..... 

Kal (ou5e) yap et. Kal 7ap Kat. Kat (ou5e) 7a/) ouSe 

29. KatTrep, Kairoi . . • • • 

30. M<£ . . . . . 
81. f Mey . . • • 

fjihv ovv . • . . . 

ov filv oZv • • . • • 



PAGE 



COOTENTS. 



SECT. 

fX€U ovv — (ifjLcos (jueWoi) . . . 

dAA^ jjLcv 5ri. Koi fxhu Si}, ou /X€U ^eV 76 

fjL€V yap, jxiv 76, distinguished 

jxev — Se*. ixhv — {xivroi (or roivvv, ardpf oAAo, 
firji/y ov /x^v a\Aa) .... 
f MeVrot . . . . . 

fxiuToi (1) sane, (2) tanieny (3) in questions, (4) 
scilicet • • • • • 

fieyToiye. ul4vtoi 76 • 

C^//tC<JS fxivTOL ... • • • 

I Ml]. Tl 76. (/AirJ Tt 7€ 597) . . 

f Miriv ...... 

^^1/ in appeals, asseverations, cfec. . 

annective and adversative (vero) . 
/cai (ou5e) . . . . 



ov fXTlV 

oh fi^u ouSe 



{koI) fjL-fju in dialogue . 
ou /Lt^v — 7e {not ov ix'{]v ye) 

yCj/ 5if} . . • 



dxV c^^cvs . • . • . 

5* t^ftwy. ofJiws 76 ixivToi (jUirJj/). £^/ioos 5e. c^/a«s 
S' ouv • • • • 

o/*ajs with partcp. or 2;er6 in adversative relation 
to another notion . 

1. ^'OiVQis . . . 

2. Oux ^^ct'y — dA.Aa or aWh. Kal (dA.\* ou5e) . 

1. "Ore. ""On. On firj {=msi) . 

2. Mt; ^t£ — aWa KaL ovx — dAAd /cat 

1. Ou. yiaWov ov. Ov ydp ; . 

2. {ov fjLrj) redundant ; firi c. participio 

Mr/ ov (:^nisi) .... 
Ou5e. Cf. Chap. 45, on ot^rc 



6 



CONTENTS, 



CHAP. SECT. 



43. 
44. 



46. 
47. 
48. 



OvKovy. ovKOVv. ovK oZv 
f OZv "with relatives and indefinites = cunque 
dAA' ovyy arap ovy, Bh oZv (S' oZv) 



ctr odvs ovT* ovify /htjt* oZv 



At. 1. 



yovv, yap ouy, ovkovv, fiwu and ^ev o5i/ 

Koi yap ovu = eteni^n sane 

Consecutive use of ovv . 

oZv as a resumptive particle 

ovv 5^, 5^ o5y {=igitur jarriy jam igitur) 

rl oZv By) \= quid ergo ^ irws oZv 5^; 

Ol/T€ ..... 

01/T6 and ou5e distinguished 
ovBi after a negative clause 
(/cal oy after an affirmative clause) 



0l»T6- 



re ov-—n. 



ouoe— OKOe . 
ovT€-*-oVc ov — otrc. 
rare forms 
2. OvT€ — ovBh (continued) . 
OUT* &pa, ovB* &pa 

out' oZv 0UT6 . 

ou5* oZp 
jf lie/), ttt), TrXijV. 

t Te— /cat ... 
a) T€ — /cat . 



ouTe— re ou 



/cat 



'€ (e^ — gi^e) mostly poetical 
T6 as a particle of continuation in Thucyd. 
often = and so ; and thus ; thus for instance 
Kai — /cat — /cat, (fee. Te — Te — re, <fec. t 
/cat, 

Te-— Te, (fee, /cat (Epic) . 
Te — Te /cat, <fec. (seldom) 
Te — /cal 5?) /cat, gwwm — -i^wm- vero etiam 
Te followed by 5e .... 
(cTretTa oe, a^ua oe, afta oe /cat, eTt oe /cat, oxrau- 

roos 5e, ttoA-u (xaXKov 5e) 
Te /ca(: on the limitation of their use (533—535) 



PAGE 

. 219 

^ 221 



V 



189 



192 

. 193 

195 

196 



197 



V 198 



i 
i 



CONTENTS. . 7 



200 



CHAP. SECT. PAGE 

49. Teojs . . . . . .199 

60. t Toi . . . . . . 1 

roi, derivation (540) 

Toi (a) ^vith. personal, demonstrative, and relative 

pronouns . .... J 

h) In maxims, proverbs, (fee. 

c) With verbs expressing emotion 

d) With an apparently adversative force . . 202 

e) With an asseverative force in answers {kuI- 
roi jJL^VToi, ardp roi, <tc. 

51 f Toiyvu (Toiyap, Totydp roi, loiyapovv) . . 203 

62. 'as . . . . . . . 204 

5S. "ClcTe . . . . . . 207 



4 



imODUCTORY REMARKS. 

♦ - 

ON THE ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS IN A SENTENCE. 



I. In Simple Sentences^ ustially : 

1. The subject stands first, the predicate (verb, or 

adjective with elvai) last. The object is placed before 

the predicate, the attribute after its substantive ; as, 

KupoSj 6 ^aaCkev^y koKo}^ airi^avev. KvirpLOL irdvv 

7rpd^vfiQ)<; avT(p crvvecrrpdrevcrav, dvrjp dya^6^» 6 

7rat9 6 ^eya?. 6 iral^ 6 tov 'Bevo(l>o)VTQS* o TroXe/JLO^ 

6 TT/Qo? Tovs Uepaa^, 

But the subject is often placed la^t; as, aKovcras ravra eXeJev d 
Kvpos. (See 10.) 

2. When several objects belong to the same predi- 
cate, the most important one is generally placed next 
before the predicate, and the rest placed before it in 
the order in which each is supposed to have been 
added to the first object, those that entered the mind 
first being placed nearest to it ; as, ol '^EXKTjves tou? 
Uepaa'^ iviK7]aav, ol ^'EWtjvb^ iv Mapa^covc tov9 
Tlepcra^ evUrjcrav, ol ^^EWrjveg ravrrj rfj rjjJ^pct iv 
Mapa^(ovc Tou? Uepo-a? ivlfCTja-av, 

3. Adverbs of place and time generally precede the 

1^ 



10 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS. 

> 

direct object; as, rore or ravrr) rf) rjixepa iv Mapa 
^covL Tou? TLepaa<^ ivi/crjo-av. 

4. The object of a person, in the dative or accusa- 
tive, precedes the object of a thing ; as, rov iralha rrjv 
fypaixfJLaTLicrjv huhdcrfcco, rw iraihl to ^t/SXiov SlSco/jlc, 

5. The adverb of time precedes the adverb of 
place ; as, rore iv Mapa^covc tov^ Tl6paa<^ ivUrjcrav. 

6. The adverb of manner is generally placed next 
the predicate; as, ol ''EXkrjve^ TavTy Tjj rjpbepa iv 
Mapa^covL tou9 Uepaa'^ KaXw ivl/crjaav, Ka\S)<; Xeyet^, 
ft) Sot)KpaT€^, 

II. Compound Sentences. 

7. The position of a dependent sentence corres- 
ponds to that of the word of which it is the resolution ; 
as, o Se (jyoLVL^y o^ev i^atpe^ecr] 6 ijfce(f>aXo<;, oXo^ avaU 
V€TO. 6 Se Kvpo^j iv m cruveXiyovTO, i^v€TO • iirel Se 
KcCXa rjv to, lepa avTM, crvveKaXecre tov^ re tS)v Ueparcov 
rjyefiova^ Kal tov<; tcov M'^Scov. 

8. But a substantive sentence stands after the verb ; 
as, Xeyovori Ttv6<^, otl TroXXa v7no")(yfi vvv^ Sea to iv 

T0L0VT(p elvat TOV KCvSvVOV TrpOCTLOVTO^, ktX. 

9. Inverted position, — The position of words in a 
sentence is said to be inverted, when the predicate is 
put before the subject, the attributive before its sub- 
stantive, or the objective words, especially the adverb, 
after the verb ; as, ovic aya^iaov iroXvKOLpavir) • el? kol- 
pavo^ ecTTco, Kal yap, ecfyaaav^ iroXv^pvcro^ 6 avrjp, 
TO Trj^ ap€T7]<; fcaXKo<;^ or more strongly, t?}? dpeTf]<^ to 
KaXXo^, 

10. If particular emphasis is to be laid on the sub- 



INTEODUCTORY EEMARKS. 



11 



ject, it is placed last in tlie sentence ; as, ovrco Srj 
rjyovvTO /juev ol 'A pfiepLot * rcov Se XdXSaicov gI ira- 

11. If two words are to be distingmshed as em- 
phatic, one is placed first, tlie other last; as, Traaoop 
aperdiv iqye/jLcov eariv rj evcri/Seta, 

12. The established rule is, that no sentence 
is placed out of its proper position, either first or last, 
but for the sake of emphasis. 

13. If a thought is first to be expressed generally, 
and then applied to some particular object or case, go 
that emphasis is to be laid thereon, the end of the sen- 
tence is the proper place ; as^ dXXa koI fxiaet ri^ €K6l- 
vov, w dvSpe^ ^A^rjvatoL^ fcal SeSiev kol (f^'^ovel, fcai 
Twv irdvv vvv So kovvtcov olk6lq}<; ^x^lv avTM. 

14. In dependent sentences, the inverted position 
is more usual than in the words which they represent, 
and is used as the sense and rhythm of the sentence 
may require. 

15. A substantive sentence introduced by otl, co?, 
iJiatj is placed before the principal verb, when that 
which it expresses is to be brought more directly for- 
ward; as, OTL fjbev hrj iMeym e/c jJUKpov 6 ^LXtiriros 
Tjv^rjTaL irapakei'y^a), 

16. Sometimes the position of the adjectival sen- 
tence is inverted to bring it prominently forward, 
while the substantive is little more than an adjective 
expressing some attribute of the adjectival sentence, 
and is in the case thereof; as, ov elSes dvSpa, ovto^ 
iarcv, oIS' rjv e^peyfrev '^Ep/jLtovrjv fJ^rjrrip elfMi, 



12 



INTRODUCTORY REMARKS. 



17. Inverted position applies also to local adverbial 
sentences, introduced by relative adverbs of place, ov, 
rj, Xva, &.G. In temporal and conditional adverbial 
sentences, no change of tbis sort takes place, as their 
proper place is before the verb. 

18. If; in a dependent sentence (especially an adjec- 
tival sentence), any word is to be especially brought 
forward, it is placed sometimes before the conjunction ; 
as, TOcavT iarl koI raXXa, mpl ifiov a oi ttoXXoI Xe- 
yovcrtv, 

19. K, in a number of clauses, the attention is to 
be particularly called to any one word, as the leading 
notion of the whole sentence, it is placed either at the 
beginning or end of the whole sentence ; as^ tovtcov 
iyo) aot, €v lla^t, e&>9 av avrjp SUatos Wj ovttot eTTL- 
\rj(Tt)iJiai, 

20. Very frequently, a subject common to both the 
principal and subordinate clause is placed first ; as, 
01 he ^AaavpLOL^ co? rjfcovaav ravra, irdvra eiroiovv, 

21. In a sentence which stands with others in a 
paragraph, that word is most properly placed first 
which is most connected with the preceding sen- 
tence ; as, Kal 6 Xoytcpdrr]^ /SXiyjra^ eh tov Kpircova • 
0) KpircoVj e<^77, aTrayayerco Tt<; ravrrjv olicahe • Koi rav- 
rrjv fjbev aTrrjyov rive^ tcjv tov Kplrcovo^ /3ooo(Tdv re /cal 

/COTTTOflivrjV. 

22. An especial method of bringing a word or 
words more prominently forward, is by separating 
those which, as making up one notion, would natu- 
rally be joined together. Hereby, generally only one 
is marked as important, but sometimes two, especially 



i 

! 

i 



INTRODUCTORY REMARKS. 



13 



wlieii they stand at the beginning and enc7 of the sen- 
tence; as, d^coo fiTjSe fiiav fxoc Sea tovto irap v/jlcov 
opyrjv jevia^ac. So the comparative is often separated 
from the words used to strengthen it. 

23. When a negative is prefixed to an article or a 
relative, a conjunction, or a preposition, it may not 
be separated therefrom. 

24. The relation between the same or cognate no- 
tions especially if they are contraries, is signified by 
their being put beside one another ; as, irap* ov/c e^e- 
\(0P i^eXovafj. Thus, avro? avTov, rj fiev ttoXl^ avrrj 
Trap' avTT]^ hitcrfv X^yjrerat. Hence, aWo? aWo — aXXos 
aXXd^c — aWo9 aXXoSez^ — d\X7]v dXXrj^ ttoXcv tto- 
\e(»9, &c. 

25. When in a sentence, or two co-ordinate sen- 
tences, there are two words joined together, which are 
opposed to two other words likewise joined together, 
the words which correspond to each other, correspond 
to each other in their position ; the arrangement of 
the words of the one pair being exactly the opposite of 
the other pair of words. So : substantive, adjective ; 
adjective, substantive. This figure is called cliiasma^ 
from its analogy with a Greek X ; as, ttoXXukl^^ rjSovrj 
^pa')(ela fJUKpav tUt6C Xvirrjv. 

The Latins were very fond of this figure. 

26. Sometimes the predicates of two co-ordinate 
sentences are placed contrary to their natural order, 
the one whose sense requires that it should follow the 
other, being placed before it {varepov irporepov). This 
latter takes place when the notion which should stand 
Becond is to be brought forward as the more important 



14 IKTRODUCTORY REMARKS. 

of the two ; as, ra^ fiev apa {NvfKpas;) ^pe'y^aaa^ TeKov- 
ad re, iroTVta iMrjTrjp^ OpLvaKLrjv €9 injcrov dirMKLae tt]- 
Xo^t vaietv, 

27. Another method of calling attention strongly 
to a word, or the notion on which emphasis is to be 
laid, is by placing immediately after it some particle ; 
as, irepy hrj^ ye, or av] or a parenthetical word, such a*s 
olaatj &c. ; and in a speech, w dv8pe<; ^A^Tjvaloc. 



19^^ Two simple sentences are connected with 
each other either by the way of co-ordination^ or by the 
way of subordination. Co-ordinate sentences = inde- 
pendent of each other, but united by a conjunction 
either copulative^ disjunctive^ or adversative ; as, Kai, re ; 
r/, elre, ovre ; aXXa, fjiiv, Se, &c. Subordinate sen- 
tences = dependent one on the other, so that the one . 
is incomplete without the other ; expressed by the sub- 
ordinate conjunctions, ore, ort^ co?, yap, eVet, &c. 

On the " Position of Words and Sentences," c£ Kiihner's Greek Gram^ 
maVi § 348. 



PEACTICAL INTEODUCTION 

TO 

GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION. 

PAET II. 



Chap. 1. "AXXd. § 1. 

1. a) ^AWd (from dWo^, other) is an adversative par- 
ticle denoting principally difference and separation : = 
but (in di7^ect opposition : e. g. ' not A, but B'), or but^ yet, 
however (in limitations and qualifying restrictions : in 
such, sentences, for instance, as, * a good man, but rather 
weak'). 

ObseiTe that aWd is distinguished from olKKo. {alia) by a change of 
accent. 

2. b) In direct opposition oKkd nsually follows a 
negative ; which, however, may be implied by a ques- 
tion. 

[Direct opposition.] Ovic dvSpo<; opKOi itIg-ti^, a XX' 
opKCDP dvTjp {^jEsch^, Tl Set Xiyetv irepl tcov TraXaccov, 
a XX a Tou? icj) rj/jbcop avrcov dvaXoyicracrde [Deni.), 

[Qualifying opposition.] Ala')(^pdv yvvaitc eyy/na^;, 
aXXa ifXovaLav* On, 

3. c) When a universal negative is meant to be fol- 
lowed by a universal affirmative^ the affirmative notion 
is usually omitted, being understood by implication. 

Thus, when dXXd [or Se] follows or /ct?;Set9, it 

is necessary to supply efcaorro^ as the subject 



16 



Mrjhel^ (\>^6v(p TO fJbeSXov aKOvar}^ aXJC av akrf^es y 
a tco7reLT(o [= aW' eKaaro'^ o-KOTreirco] (Dem,). ^E/nol 
ovSel^ So/€€L elvai^ irivr]^ cop, avoao'^ dX\' aei voaelv 
{Soph). 

4. d) This idiom is found also in Latin : 

Qui fit^ McBcenas, ut nemo quam sibi sortem 
Sen ratio dederity sen for s ohjecerit^ ilia 

Contentus vivat? laudet[=*sed qui s que laudet] diver sa sequentesf 

(Hor. 1 Sat. 1, 1.) 

5. e) The same kind of omission occurs in statements that we ought not 
to do thiSj but that : which would be, if fully expressed, * we ouglit not 
^0 do this, but we ought to do that^ See the first sentence of the follow 
ing Exercise. 

Exercise 1. 

6. (1) It is not right, 0 Council, either to like or to 
dislike any man from outward appearance, but to try 
him by his actions : for many a man who converses 
but little and dresses with propriety, has been the 
cause of great evils ; and others, though disregarding 
such (^proprieties of conduct), have done you many 
good services. , 

(2) From all^ that has been said then, Socrates, by 
what possible means can we contrive to bring a man ^ 
who has any power of mind, or wealth, or body, or 
birth, to honor justice, f and not rather laugh at hear- 
ing it praised? f Although therefore^ a man may be 
able even to show what we have said to be false, and 
knows well enough that justice is best, he is, I imagine,® 
very indulgent, and feels no resentment against the un- 
just ; so that unless any man abstains from injustice, 
either from disliking it through an admirable nature, 
or from acquired experience,^ — of all the rest not one 
is willingly just, but either through cowardice, old age, 
or some other weakness, condemns injustice, because 
unable to do it. f And that (**it is so),^ is plain: for 
the first of these persons who arrives at power, is the 
first to commit injustice, as far as he is able. 



7—10.] 



'-4 XXa . 



17 



• Strengthen this ' all ' by St}. ^ So.y : ' ^vhat device {jj-vx^-vri) is there 
that a man should be willing to honor,' etc. *^ aAAa fxri = ac non potius. 
See below, 19. ^ us Bri tol ei. ® ttou (enclit). ^ /Say; 'having re- 
ceived experimental knowledge/ iin(rTrip.riv Xa^dov. ^ 5e. 



Chap. 1. § 2. (^ctez^ — aXXa.) 

7. a) '-4XXa sometimes foUo^vs fxev (= quideni\ in 
both cZiVec^ and qualifying oppositions. 

8. V) When aXXa occurs in a opposition, 
the first or conceded notion being accompanied by [xev 
{indeed)^ the second notion is negatived by aXX' ou. 

TovTO TO irpayiia od cj) iX l /jl o v fiiv icrrtVy a XX' ov 
icakov. 

9c c) When aXXa follows fxev in cZ^^Vec^ oppositions, 
it must not be supposed equivalent to 8e: for it always 
marks a far stronger opposition^ such as that between 
two opposite notions^ a denial and an affirmation^ and 
the like. 

AvTo<; fiev yap iyco fieveco mjoov ev ayodVL^ 

a X X' erapov irepurco^ iroXiaLV piera MuppLiSovecraLV, 

pLapvaa^ac {11, 16, 239). 

Exercise 2. 

10. Having f then (tolvvv) conveyed so much pro- 
perty from the house, having received the money aris- 
ing from the sale of so large an estate, and having more- 
over laid hands ^ on the rents which became due in 
all that interval, they imagine that they shall obtain 
possession of the remainder also : and to such a height 
of assurance have they advanced, that ° though they 
did not indeed venture f to meet us in a direct form of 
action,^ 3^et they entered a protestation of legitimacy 
in behalf of our opponents, that was at once false and 
inconsistent Avith their own previous conduct. 



18 'AXXd. [11—13. 

* Here Biacpopeiv == to plunder; with reference to the dispersion of 
the plundered property, by its being divided amongst the parties con- 
cerned. 

Or, * to bring the cause to a fair issue:' ev^vdiKia ucrUvai, <fec. opp. 
^iajj.apTvpe7Uf diafxaprvpiai {exceptions). 



Chap. 1. § 3. {ov fiovov — dWa [/caf],) 

11. a) ^ Not only — but alsd is usually ov fiovov — 
dWa KaL The second member is now and then 
strengthened by tt/oo? to^Jtw or tovtol<;. NavcrtKvSrj'; 
ov fMovov eavTov re fcal rovs olKera^ rpicpet^ dWd tt po^ 
TovTOL^ Kal v<; 7roXXou9 fcal /Sou? (-Zen.). 

12. b) If the /jLovov relates principally to a particular 
notion^ which is to be excluded from being the sole 
thing, it is usually placed after that notion, instead of 
immediately after the ov. 

''I<Tco<; dvaXidKOvaiv ovk eh a Sec fiovov, dWd Kal 
ek a ^Xd^rjv ^epet {Xen, CEc, 3, 6). 

c) Ov fiovov dXkd (without KaL) is used when the 
second notion is so much the stronger that the first is 
virtually put aside as being unnecessary to be dwelt 
upon. (See Arnold^ s Oh. Gram. 1444, g.) 

Exercise 3. 

13. (1) A tyranny aims at three objects : the first 
being that the subjects of it should be mean-spirited, 
for a mean-spirited person will not plot against any 
man ; the second that they should distrust each other, 
for a tyranny is not put down, tUl there are some per- 
sons who have confidence in one another ; for which 
reason also it is that tyrants are °ever at war with men 
of high character,^ as being ill-suited^ to their govern- 
ment, not only from their not choosing to be governed 
despotically, but also because they can be trusted both 
by their own associates*^ and by others, and do not 



19 



betray either their own friends or other persons. The 
third object is incapacity for public business, for no 
man attempts what is impossible. 

(2) If any amongst you are angry with those who 
aspire to the conduct of state-affairs, but run away from 
danger, they cannot justly entertain this opinion of 
me ; for I not only performed with alacrity what I 
was ordered to do^ but also dared to expose myself 
voluntarily to danger ; and this I did, not as think- 
ing it a trifling matter to fight against the Lacedaemo- 
nians, but in order that, if I should ever be brought 
into trouble without fault of mine, f I might find favor 
with you on account of such conduct, and receive full 
justice at your hands. 

^ Here i-meLK-ns, which is used of persons, not only in the sense of 
fair, kind, good, gentle, making allowances ; but also of those who keep 
within the bounds of order and moderation, (fee. Cf. Pape. This mean- 
ing is omitted by Liddell and Scott. ^ ^Xa^^pos. (irpos n). 

c For ' eacli other' and ' their own associates,' use kavrCov : ' others! a'SXoi. 
On kavrcav = a\\7]\(cu, cf. Gr. 1010 (791), § 654, 2. d Sag : 

* that being looked upon by you as a better ° person on account of this 
conduct (dia ravra), I might receive,' &c. 

Exercise 4. 

14. (1) The Lacedaemonians were f in those days * 
so far from acting as our ancestors did — f from warring, 
that is,^ aD:ainst the barbarians and benefitins: the 
Greeks — that they would not even remain quiet ; but 
though they had, not only a sufficient territory, but 
one so large as no other Grecian city possessed, they 
neglected agriculture, trades, and all other things, 
and never ceased to beset the Peloponnesian cities, and 
attack them unjustly one by one, till they had subdued 
them all except Argos.^ 

(2) Perceiving that the Thebans^ f and I may almost 
add that you as well as they,"^ ° influenced by® those of 
your respective citizens who managed the interests of 
Phihp, and had been corrupted by his bribes), re- 
garded with indifference and adopted not one single 



20 



[15. 



measure of precaution against what was tlie most for- 
midable danger of all, and needed extreme watchful- 
ness — the suffering the power of Philip to increase — 
but were ®ever prone to hostile feelings and angry col- 
lision, I labored with incessant vigilance to prevent 
this, not only from conceiving it, upon my own judg- 
ment, to be for your advantage, but because I knew 
that Aristophon and again Eubulus had all along de- 
sired to effect this friendship, and though (p) they often 
opposed each other on ^ other subjects, were invariably 
agreed upon this. 

* ircpl rhv avrhu xp^^^^^ ^ ^' * about the time we are speaking.' 

^ Say: 'and from warring a clause that is really explanatory , 
being added co-ordinately by Rai ° Say : * except that of the 

Argives.' ^ Say : * and almost you also/ « vir6 (gen.). irepL 



Exercise 5. 



15. (1) ° Statements of this kind must not only be 
provided (° as so many) names for^ the previous exami- 
nation,^ but must be shown to have really taken place, 
and be confirmed by the testimony of relations. Now 
(tolvvv) when we challenged them to produce any of 
Euctemon's friends who knew that any female lived 
with him, or that Callippe was his ward, and to decide 
this by submitting to torture such domestics as were 
still alive, or, if any one of their own slaves asserted 
that he was aware of these facts, to deliver them up to 
us, they would neither receive °ours nor give up 
(^theirs to us). 

(2) These things are not for your glory, 0 Lace- 
daemonians — neither your offending against the com- 
mon rights of Greece and against your forefathers, nor 
your destroying us your benefactors,, f to gratify the 
enmity of others,*' without having been wronged your- 
selves: but (°it will be for your glory) to spare, to 
relent*^ f from the influence of a prudent compassion,® 
considering not merely the f fearful character ^ of what 



16, 17.] 



21 



we shall suffer, but what manner of men we who are 
to suffer are. 

» Say : * for' {els). ^ The auaKpia-is, or previous examination 

before the Archon, who determined whether an action should be granted. 

« Say : ' on account of the enmity of others.' ^ iTriKXacr^uai (=« 
frangi) ry yvcafir}. ® oT/ct<^ craxppovi Xa^ovras : the (understood) acc. 
to Xa^omas being probably the whole state of the case, matters, 
Others connect oKktc^ ado^povi with iniKXacr^T^vaiy as if it were iiriKXa- 
ff^vai ci(KT(p (T(i)<ppovL Xa^ovras {oIktov (Tct)(ppopa), as in ^77eAA€ 5p/cy 
trp^cri^cU &c, — Soph. Elect 47. ' ^etv^Tr^s, ?]tos, t]. 



Chap. 1. §4. {aX\a KaL without iiovov preceding.) 

16. a) Even mthout a preceding fiovov, we some- 
times find dWa KaL in the sense of hut even^ nay even^ 
after negative words and notions, ouSe, ovheL<^^ &c. Thus : 
ovhe irepi rrj^ twv Trdvrcov cjivaecos y^rep Tthv aWoov ol 
TrKeicrTOi hieke^ero .... dWa Kal tou? (j)povTL^ovTa^ 
rd Toiavra ficopaLVovra^ direSeUvve {J^en, Mem, 1, 1, 11). 

h) Frequently, however, the Kai in dWd KaL belongs, 
in the sense of ^ even^ to the single notion that it pre- 
cedes. 

Exercise 6. 

17. (1) For you must consider, not only whether you 
are not losing money, but whether you are not also 
losing your reputation, about which you are more soli- 
citous than about money ; and not you alone, but also 
your ancestors (° were so before you) : a proof of which 
is, that when they formerly possessed great wealth, 
they parted with it all in the pursuit of honor ; where- 
as, for the sake of their reputation, they never once 
declined any danger (° however great), but did not 
cease to spend even their private fortunes in addition 
( ® to the pubhc revenues). 

(2) Have I not been deeply wronged from the be- 
ginnmg, and am I not ® even now persecuted by them, 



22 



[18—22 



because I seek to obtain redress ? Is there one of you 
who can help feeling an honest indignation against the 
defendant, and compassion for me; seeing that he, 
besides an estate of more than ten talents which he 
inherited, has got another of equal amount, belonging 
to me, while I have not only lost my patrimony, but 
am by the villany of these men deprived even of what 
they have returned me ? 



Chap. 1. § 5. {aXX ov [aWa fit]}.) 

18. a) 'AXX ov {dWa firj) is either ' hut not ' or ' and 
not^ These particles are very often used where we use 
' not'^ only, in sentences of the form: ^ A not B,'' A 
question with ov sometimes precedes : 

1 odv Kaico)v aXX arra oeu (^rjreLV ra aiTLa, aW ov 
Tov ^eov (= not the deity). PI. 

19. h) When the proposition introduced by akX ov 
{aXkd fjUT]) is the second clause of a question, or follows 
a clause of comparison introduced by o)?, (ocnrep, it is 
equivalent to ^ and not rather^ (ac non). 

20. c) The particles a)OC ov {dXka firj) may often be 
translated by ' instead off especially when they intro- 
duce the second clause of a question, where, in English, 
we should use the participial substantive (e. g. Sta tl 
7rat^et9 dW^ ov aTrovSd^ec^ ; why are you jesting instead 
of being in earnest?), 

21. d) ^AXX ovSe = nay — not even. 

Exercise 7. 

22. (1) If this ( our opponent) had not been thought 
to have perjured himself on that occasion, it is clear 
that his associate^ would have succeeded in his pro- 
testation; and the woman who had been sworn ^ by 
him to be the legitimate daughter of my uncle ["^she, I 



22.] 



23 



say], not my mother, would have been declared hia 
heiress. 

(2) "When* Philip had taken (p) Nicaea from the 
Thebans, and made it over to the Thessalians, then"^ 
did the Thebans, f now that (eVet) the danger was 
come to their own doors, apply at once to the Athe- 
nianS; and you marched out and entered Thebes, both 
infantry and cavalry, f in full military array,® before 
Demosthenes had written a single syllable about an 
alliance (°with them). And what introduced you into 
Thebes was the critical state of their affairs, their 
alarm, and their need of ° some alliance ; not De- 
mosthenes. 

(3) If you are talking about a strictly just propor- 
tion, in the first place you are ignorant that, as now, 
so in former times, ^ of those triremes that fought for 
Grreece, which were three hundred in all, this state 
farnished two hundred ; and, secondly, you gain little 
favor Avith this your audience by thus falsely accusing 
me : for why do you now tell us what we ought ^ to have 
done, and (°why did you) not rather propose the 
measures then [o'r, instead of proposing them then] ; 
for you were {p) in the city and f attended our delibe- 
rations ? ^ 

(4) If, 0 judges! Leochares or Dicseogenes were 
only going to defend themselves from this charge, I 
should be satisfied with what has been already said ; 
but, since they are prepared to enter into the whole 
question of (°my right to) the inheritance, I wish you 
to hear an account of the transaction from m^e as well 
as from them, that^ being apprised of the truth and 
not deluded ('^by our opponents), you may decide the 
cause as you think right. 

» €K€7vos, contrasted with the ovros that denotes the opposite party 
in court. ^ Here ^lajxaprvpri^vai, to have been declared in his pro" 

testation. ^ iircidr} { = postquain) c. aor. ^ ^vravb' -^Stj. ® eV 
JhrXofs '7rap€aK€vacr/x4uoL. ^ Kal TrpSrepov. ^ ^XP^^^ with wliich &if 
is usually omitted. ^ Use irap^vaL ( == interesse) only. » Wliat 
moods of the infin. follow ^eAAo? ? 



24 



[23, 24. 



Chap. 1. § 6. {aXkd inceptive?) 

23. ^AWd may also begin a speecli when it is opposea 
to that of another person. 

a) In this way it often introduces answers in a 
abrupt manner, when they are of an opposite cha- 
racter to what was just said, or to some previous thougld 
or wish of the speaker, or even to some general view, 
from which the speaker declares that, for his own part, 
he entertains a different opinion \_ = nay hut; well; 
why], 

h) In this way it often introduces objections [ = at] : 
but (c) often approbation and assent^ \oXka KaXco^ /xot 
SoK€2<i \iyetv. PL'] : and (d) is used in exclamations, ex- 
hortations, &c., especially when the discourse is sud- 
denly interrupted, and something new introduced. dX)C 
dhvvarov, ' nay, but it ^s impossible^ (or, ^ why, it ^s im- 
possible^): dWd fiovXofjiac, ^well, I will P (or, Svell 
then, I will/')' 

[A messenger had told the Greek generals that Ariseus would wait 
for them the rest of that day, and, if they did not join him, set out with- 
out them the next morning.] K\4apxos 5e raSe elirew aAV io<p€\€ juej/ 
Kvpos (ijv • €7rel Se TereAeuTTj/cej/, aTrayy4W€T€ 'Apialcp on kt\* (Xen?) 

It must be observed, that in very many instances 
where dXKd is used in this way, to introduce a remark 
in a spirited and abrupt manner, we should in English 
introduce it without any particle. 

Exercise 8. 

[The mark % will be used to indicate that it "vnll be best to use a 
pai'ticle in translating the clause into Greek.] 

24. (1) Clearchus said thus mu.ch, and Tissaphernes 
replied^ to this effect: — Well, I rejoice,^ 0 Clearchus, 
to hear sensible language from you; for as long as 



^ It often seems to denote little more than an alacritas qucedam 
respondentis, as Klotz remarks. 



25.] 



'AWa, 



25 



you entertain (p) these opinions, it seems "^^ to me, tliat 
if you were to devise any miscliief against me, you 
would also at the same time be your own enemy.° 
But that you may learn, f if it may be so,^ that you 
cannot justly distrust either the king^° or me, hsten in 
your turn to me." 

(2) PhalinuSj hearing this, smiled, and said: ^'Why, 
you seem to be a philosopher, young man^ and speak 
not inelegantly ; be assured, however,^ that you are a 
fo*olish person, if you imagine that your courage will 
prevail over the power of the king."^*^ 

(8) Clearchus said in reply :^ ^':j:This^^ is what you 
say : but take back from us this answer ; that it is our 
opinion, that if we should have to fact as^ the king's 
friends, we should be more valuable friends with our 
arms, than if we had parted with them ; and *^so if we 
should have to go to war with him, we should fight 
better with our arms than if we had parted with them." 

* air-r}fj.€i(p^u : this passive form of the aor. mid. from afx^^eabai 
occm-3 onlv in this passage. — Kr. ^ Use /xeV here ; to be answered 

by 5e, with hut that below. ^ Ei with opt. in a conditional 

clause may be followed by the presejit tense of ^oKeiv when an inf. 
with cLv {= opt. with ^v) is dependent on that verb. Just as ' if you 

were , you would / may become ' fyou were , I think you 

would! (fee. ^ According to Hermann, this is the force of m as 

oTToos oLu with subj., instead of the simple ws, ottoos ; but it is often used 
when no intimation of doubt appears appropriate. 

® fjLey . . . followed, not by 5e, but by fx^vroi (= however'), which is 
€tronger. ^ irpbs ravra, s Say : ' to be.' 



Chap. 1. § 7. {aWd in repeated sup]oositions^ made 
interrogatively and rejected.) 

25. The inceptive aXXd is used extensively in the 
introduction of suj^posed reasons^ which are only stated 
to be rejected. The dXXd is employed both in the inter- 
rogative suppositions, and in the rejecting clauses. 

Tcva Kol dva/St/SdacofjiaL Seyao/jLevov virep i/jLavrov] 

2 



26 



[26. 



Tov iraripa] dWa Ti^vrjKev] dWa tov<^ dSeXtpov^] 
a\X' ovK elcrLv* dWd tou? TralSa^] dXX ovttco yeyi- 
vrjVTai [And,), • ^ 

Passages of this kind are very common in tiie ora- 
tors. In English, we should use with the questions 
after the first either ^or' or ^well ihen^ Hlien^ For 
instance: ' Was it 'No.' ' Well then, was it BV 

— ^By no means.' ' C thefaV and so on. 

Exercise 9. 

26. (1) What then can induce you to admit his 
qualification ? The belief that^ he has not been guilty 
of any crime ? Nay but he has committed the very 
greatest offences against his country : — or (® the per- 
suasion) that he will come to be a better citizen? [K 
so] then ^ let him first f have become (^) so, and not 
claim to sit as a member of the Council, till he has done 
some manifest service (° to the state), as he then in« 
flicted upon it a manifest injury. For it is ever more 
prudent to show your gratitude to men for f actions 
(** really performed).® 

(2) Do not, on any account, O senators, pronounce 
a sentence like this. For why should' I meet with this 
treatment at your hands? Because^ any one has ever 
been put upon his trial and lost his property through 
me ? No man can prove this against me. Or because 
I am a busy-body and unruly and quarrelsome ? Nay, 
but f I do not employ the little that I have in the in- 
dulgence of such tempers and habits.® Because then 
I am an exceedingly insolent and violent person? 
Why he would not even himself assert this, unless he 
chose to affirm what is false upon this point as upon 
all the rest. Well then, because I was in power in*^ 
the days of the four-hundred and ill-treated many citi- 
zens? Nay, but I fled with the people to Chalcis on 
the Euripus, and when I might without any apprehen- 
sion have taken a part in their government, I chose 
\ a life of danger with the great mass of yourselves.^ 



27—80.] 



27 



* Simply irorepov ws, c. acc. participii ^ roL-ydproi, « ipyau 

^ TTorepov on. e ;Sa7/ : ' I do not employ such means (° as I have) 

for {irpos) such ° purposes.' ^ ^e^' vixccp KLubweveiv airdi^rccy. 



Chap. 1. § 8. (aXXa* aXX ovv dXX ovv — ye.) 

27. a) '-4 XXa sometimes follows co?2c?i^i6)naZ particles, 
€t &c., and may be construed by ^yet^'' ^yet at least^ 
^atleasV (= saltern; certe; at certe). El aco/jLa SovXov, 
dXX' 0 z/oC? eXeu^epo? {Soph.), El firj TravTUy dWd 
TToWd ye care (Dinarch.), — Just so 'a^' in: si raihi 
bond repuhlicdfrui non licuerit^ at carebo mold. 

28. 6) Also when dXKd stands in the middle of its 
clause, it has this meaning of ai least (tamen^ certe) : but 
the opposed notion may be readily supplied with an el 
fjurj^ ^ if not^ e. g. co? av dXKd ttolK ifjLrjv pvaco/jbe'^^ &C. 
(Eur. Or. 1561.) Hhat we may at least save my daugh- 
ter/ i. e. may at least save her [if we can do nothing 
more]. 

29. c) In this sense dXkd — ye,' dX>C ovv, aXX ovv 
— (ye), are also found (either with or without a preced- 
ing et, el fjLT]) ; the ye, of course, renders the preceding 
notion emphatic. The conclusive ovv here resembles 
our ^ however which refers, like it, to a preceding 
statement.^ 

30. d) The form dWa vvv (ye) = ^ now at length^ 
^now at last^^ ^even now^ is very common (i. e. if [or 
thougK\ not before^ yet at all events now: el fir] irporepov, 
dWd vvv ye. Sometimes dWd vvv y' ere, Dem,), 
AvTY} ye vovv a')(^e<; dWd roS^poi^o) Trore {Soph,), JBou- 

^ In Soph, (El. 411), S) ^eolirarpcfoi crvyyepca^i 7* aAA^ vvv, the first 
7€ belongs to (rvyy€V€(T^e (= si nihil adhuc faciatis, certe adeste) ; 
aWa vvv {— si non alio tempore, at nunc salte m). Kl. 

* In illo loco Isocratis : El de kol TrpoaireLTTov, a\\* odv rovs ys \6yovt 
&a"7r€p xpricTfxovs els rhv iinSvra xp(^vov av KareXnrov. oZv particula han^ 
vim habet praeter aXkd et 76, ut legentes jubeat respicere ad ea, quiB fa- 
cienda fuerunt ; quae si suscepta essent (hoc est. oZv), hoc quidem cert^ 
quod jam infert, iOi rehquissent {Kl.). 



28 



AWd 



[31. 



Xo/iac avTov ScSd^aij dv tto)? dWa vvv iraihev^y {Lys.^, 
^Epo/jll^ov tou? aXXoL"? aX\' ovv ireipda^aL j€ \av^d- 
veiv Katcovpyovvra^ {Isocr,), El Koi fjurj Ka^ ^EWdSa 
T€^pdfjbiJL€^\ aXV ovv ^vverd /lOL 8o/c€ls Xeyeiv (^Eur,). 
01 del Tol<i avToi^ einaTaTovvTe<;, rjv koI ttjv ^vctlv Kara- 
heearipav e^cocTLV, d\X ovv raU y i/ji7r€cpLaL<; ttoXv rciv 
aXKcdv TrpoE'^ovaiv {Isocr,). Kr. 

\^AX\d ye probably never occur together , if Wolf is 
riglit in reading dWd re koX /jLeroirLa^ev e^e^ kotov, 
in n. 1. KL] 

Exercise 10. 

31. (1) 0 soldiers, our present condition is indeed 
one of difficulty ; but nevertheless we must not be 
faint-hearted, but strive that, if we possibly can, we 
may save ourselves by a victory {p) ; f but, if not,^ 
may at all events die an honorable death. 

(2) The Chalcidians,^ though under such obliga- 
tions to you, did not make you a suitable return ; but 
(**on the contrary), as soon as you crossed over into 
Euboea to assist Plutarchus, f at the commencement^ 
(**of the affair), they did indeed pretend to be your 
friends ; but no sooner had we passed Tamynse, and 
were crossing the Cotylaean*^ mountain, as it is called, 
than Callias the Chalcidian, seeing our army inclosed 
in a difficult country from which we could not retreat 
without^* a victory (^), assembled an army from^^ 
every (**part of) Euboea, and his brother Taurosthenes 
brought over his Phocian mercenaries, and (**both of 
them) f came down upon us ® to destroy us. 

(3) It is my present opinion, that we ought to send 
{p) to Anaxibius, and tell him, that we have not 
entered the city to use any violent measures, but to 
obtain from you, if possible, some advantage to our- 
selves; and if not,^ yet at all events to make it evi- 
dent, that we do not qu.it (**the city) f from trusting 
false representations, but because we are persuaded to 
do so.^ 



82—35.] 'AWd. 29 

' €1 Se /j.'f}. ^ XaKKL^e7s. * rovs irpccrovs XP^^^^^' 

^ KorvXaios. ^i\^e7i/ iiri riva. ^ el fXT], 

* Say : ' being deceived, but being persuaded.' 



Chap. 1. § 9. {aWa ixrjv) 

32. a) ^AWct (XTjv = 1) at sane ; at profecto ; at vero 
(sed sane* sed vero^ &c.) ; — 2) aiqui (in tlie minor premiss 
of a syllogism). 

83. h) Tlie particles have an adversative force (that 
of aXka) combined witli a strong affirmation or asseve- 
ration {fjbrjv = vero). 

'O iTo\efjb6<^ iarcv t^St] virep rod /jltj Tra^elv /ca/cw? vtto 
Tov ^iXcTTTrov dWa /jLr]v{but assuredly) ore ye ov arT]- 
aerat Sr]Xov. (Dem.) 

34. c) The aWd in dWd firjvis often used as an^7^cg9- 
twe particle (as explained in 25). In this way aXXa 
fiTjv may occnr in ansicers of assent ; in animaied appeals ; 
and generally wherever a speaker bursts, as it were, 
into the conversation in a lively, abrupt manner. 

^EoLKa^y €(f)7]j S) ^Apiarap'x^e, jSapeco^ cj^epecv tl* ')(pfj 
Se TOV ^dpov^ /jLeraScSovaL toIs ct>L\oc<;* lctco^ yap dv tl ae 
Koi rj/iec^ Kov^icraiiiev, Kal 6 ^Apiarap'^^^o^* ^AWd 
IJt^rjv^ €cf)7]^ CO ScofcpaT€<;^ ev ttoW^ ye elfiL diropia &C. 
{Xen. Mem, 2, 7, 2.) 

Here the oCKKd denotes the ^ alacritas qiijcedam re- 
spondkntis^ [cf. note 23, 5] ; and \iriv adds an assevera- 
tion, = ' v:}iy^ indeed — or ^ v:ell^ I am indeed — 

35. d) The y^^-qv is often used to imply a confident 
assumpjtion (just as our ^ surely^ is). Hence the parti- 
cles oKkd iir}v frequently occur (a) in the minor premiss 
of a syllogism ; and (/3) whenever, in the progress of 
an argument^ a statement is assumed, ^AXKd fjLrjv here 
= {atqui^) ; but ; but noiv^ now. 



* The Romans here sometimes use autem. Si summo opere sapieyitia 
petenda est, summo opere stultitia vitanda est; summo autem opere 
sapientia petendo. est, simimo igitur opere stultitia vitanda est (Cic). 
Hartung compares sed vero : e. g. Non homines solum, sed vero anima- 
lia euncta (Lucr. 4,, 983). 



30 'A\\d. [36—41. 

El yap €L(TC ^cofiolj elcrl koX ^eoL' aWa fjL7]v elal 
ffcofioL, elalv dpa koX ^eol {Luc), 

86. e) The statement wliicli a speaker, or writer 
confidently assumes, is often a further development of his 
argument : hence the particles aWa fiTjv often mark a 
transition to a new (usually a stronger) argument (= 
but further ; but more than this ; but besides this ; nay 
more ; moreover), Tavra Be rk av oXkcp Tnarevaeiev rj 
Srew ; Tnarevcov he "^eols ttco^ ov/c elvav ^eou? ivofii^ev ; 
^AWa firjv eiroLei koX rdSe (nay more^ he did this also 
....). -Ze?2. ^EXiri^eLv €7roLeL rou? crvvSLaTpL/3ovTa<; 
eavT(p fJLL/jbovjjL6vov9 i/celvov TOLOvcrSe yevrjaea^ai, ^A\- 
\a fjLTjv Kal Tov (TcojUiaTo^ avTO^ re ovfc r/fMeXec 
Tov^ T a[jLe\ovvTa<^ ovk eirrjveL (here there is a transi- 
tion to quite a new branch of the subject. Xen. Mem, 
1,2,4). _ ^ 

37. /) Occasionally aXka fjbrjv are employed to 
terminate a digression^ the speaker assuming that he has 
doubtless said enough, and may return to his subject. 

^AWa firjv irepl tovtcov rocravrd fJuoL elprja^co* 
TToXiv S' eTrdvet/jLL o^ev dTreXLirov (Isceus), 

88. g) In dWd jjurjv — ye, the ye does not belong to 
dXkci fJLTjv^ but adds emphasis to the interposed word : 
oiXKd /JL7]V eK€tv6<; ye del rjv ev tc3 ^avepS {Xen, 
Mem, 1, 1, 10). 

39. h) 'AWa fXT)v — ye is also used when a speaker takes up the 
speech of another, and, approving of what he had said, adds another 
argument. ^E%ot5" , . . S3 v^avia, (Iweij/ 7]fXLv orov eueKa iirE^vfXTjcras 
Linrapx^^i^ ov yap drj rod Trpcoros toov Imrioov eKoLvveiv. *A\7]^7] AeyeiSj 
€(f)r]. *AWa ix)]V ouSe tov yucoa'^Tjual ye, iirel kt\. 

40. i) Various particles are found with aWa fjLTjv, but quite uncon- 
nected with them in sense. 

Exercise 11. 

41, (1) I am surprised, that if I have defended any 
(®of you) from the cold-of- winter or from an enemy, 
\iot one of you remembers this. Now surely it is right 
and just to remember good actions rather than evil 
ones. 



42.] 



'-4 XXa. 



31 



(2) jSTor assuredly {St]) will I assert tMs/ tliat you 
are a disgrace to your ancestors. On the contrary, 
within these few days, you stood in array before the 
descendants of those (^whom your fathers conquered), 
and defeated them, with the assistance of the gods, 
though many times as numerous as yourselves. And 
upon that occasion you quitted yourselves like brave 
men, f to gain a kingdom for Cyrus ; ^ but now that 
your own safety is at stake, you ought, I may surely 
assume, to exhibit even greater courage and alacrity. 
But, besides this [or, nay more], you ought also to feel 
greater confidence in yourselves, f as compared with** 
your enemies, now (° than then): for then, though you 
had never tried yourselves against them, and saw no 
limit to their numbers, you still dared to attack them 
with the spirit of your ancestors : when then you al- 
ready know by experience, that even when they out- 
number you many times over, they still do not like to 
await your attack, why should you any longer fear 
them? 

(8) ' Have you not observed, f with reference to the 
arts,"^ as for instance (®with respect to) the children of 
potters, how long a time they help and look on before 
they meddle with the ° actual making of pots ° them- 
selves?' — f'Yes, indeed.'^— 'Again [or, but further], 
every creature will fight' too fwith more than usual 
spirit® in the presence of its offspring.' — 'It is so.' 

* -TTepl T7)s Kvpov ^acnX^ias. ^ irpos, C. acc. 

• ra irepl ras Te^ms. ^ Koi fidXa. ® dia(t>eo6vT<i>s, 



Chap. 1. § 10. {ov /mrjv aXKd* ov fievroi dWd = ve- 

runtaraen^ 

42. a) In the combinations ov firjp aX\a, ov fiivroL 
aXXd (which is far less common) there is always an 



32 



[43—46. 



ellipse. Sometimes th.e verb of the preceding or fol- 
lowing sentence may be supplied with ov iJii]vy &c. to 
deny the previous assertion^ the dXKd introducing an op- 
posite statement: it often, however, happens that the no- 
tion of opposition is too general and vague to be thus 
supplied. Xttttos iriiTTeL eh ^ovara, koX fiLKpov kclk- 
€LVov i^€Tpa')(7]\La€v* ov /Jb7]V (sc, e^eTpa')(fj\ia6v^ dWa 
eireiJieLvev 6 Kvpo<; /xoXt? 7ra)9, fcal 6 ltttto^; i^avecrrr], the 
horse fell on his JcneeSj and very nearly threw Cyrus over 
his head: he did not however [throw Mm over his head], 
but Cyrus with great difficulty stuck on, and the horse got 
up again. 

43. b) In translating, we may, of course, proceed 
more simply, and translate ov fjurjv (or fievroC) dXkd^ 
^however J nevertheless^ {yeruntdmen^ attamen). '-4 el... 
ol y rj/jberepoL Trpoyovot Kal Aa/ceSai/jLovLOL (j)L\orLfia)<; 
7rpo9 dW7]\ov<; €l')(ov, ov jirfv dWd irepX KaWlcrTcov 
ev eiceivoL^ roh %/56z^ot9 ec^CkovLicriaav (Isocr.y Th aoi 
Sl7]J€Ito] ^Api(TT6hr]iJio<^ Tjv TtV, (T/JLLKpo^, dvv7r6Sr]T0<; del' 
ov fjbivTOL dWd ScoKpdrrj ye evca t^St] dprjpo/jbrjVj S)v 
eKeivov TjKovaa, KaL fjuot d)/jio\6y€L /ca^direp e/celvo^ SLTjyel- 
TO {PI, i. e. ov fievTOi ^ApLaroSrjfjLo^ SirjyeLTO, H.), 

44. c) Ov fjbrjv dXkd may refer to a preceding iiev. 
K.a\ TovTcop evey/cetp e)(co TrapaSeiy/JLara ifKela-ra fiev eK 
T(bv ISccoTLKcov TTpay/Jbdrcov' ov fJUTjv dWd jieL^ay ye Kal 
^avepcorara to?? aKovovcnv i/c rcov 'f]fuv Kal AaKeoaLpbo- 
VLOL<; av/jb/SdvTcov {Isocr!), 

45. d) The pbrjv may have a concessive force, the con- 
cession being qualified by the succeeding statement: 
TovTwv dXrj^Yj flip eart rd vroWa, ov fifjp aXV I'cro)? 
o^X ^Sea dKovecp (JDem. : = ov fjbrjp rjhea^ aXV law^ ov^ 

Exercise 12. 

46. (1) In our days those who fill the high places 
of the state are busied about petty objects, and have 
left it to us vv^ho have hitherto stood aloof from state- 
politics, to tender you advice on subjects of this im- 



47.] 



W a . 



3S • 



portance. however, your foremost men are thus 
narrow-minded, the more ought the rest of us to con- 
sider boldly, how we may escape from our present state 
of ° mutual hostility ; for, as things now stand, it is in 
vain that we draw up the articles of a peace : for we 
do not terminate our wars, but only postpone them; 
waiting (v) each of us for the time when we may inflict 
some incurable wound upon the others. 

(2) When the Lacedemonians, then, were at such* 
a state of variance with the Athenians, those at Athens 
"who wished to do away with the treaty were also, 
fon their part,^ immediately urgent (° against it). 
Amongst others who were so was Alcibiades the son 
of Clinias, a man who in age was still at that time a 
youth, f as he would have been considered in any other 
state, ^ but honored on account of the nobility of his 
ancestors. He did indeed really think it better to side 
with the Argives ; but he also took a violent part in 
opposition to the treaty) f from ^mortified pride, ^ as 
well (''as from conviction), because the Lacedaemonians 
had negotiated it through the agency of Mcias and 
Laches. 

■ ovTos 5^- ^ av, ° ws ev &Wr) TroAet, ^ Koi (ppovfjfJLaTU 



Chap. 1. § 11- (aXka . . . ydp • aXXd jdp.) 

47. 'AWa . . . yap • dXXa yap.] Here each of the 
particles retains its proper force. The dWd oioposes 
something to what preceded ; the yap introduces the 
reason which occasions or jmtifies that opposition. The 
particle ydp^ instead of being placed after a word or 
two of its own clause, was often placed immediately 
after the aKKd\ so that oKka ydp became a regular for- 
mula. 

The force of ydp may always be explained ; but it 
frequently refers to a statement that is only implied 
(see examples in the notes to Exercise 22). 
2* 



34 'AXXd. [48,49. 

48. The dWd has frequently not its directly adver- 
sative^ but its inceptive force (as already explained in 
25). In this way aXXa yap may be an abrupt form of 
assent^ accompanied by the reason of that assent. 

49. An objection that would in Grreek be introduced 
by dWd jdp, is often introduced in English by a single 
^butJ Hence the pupil should endeavor to obtain a 
clear notion of when the English ^ but ' should or may 
be translated by dWa ydp. 

a) ^But^ should be translated by dWd jdp when 
it combines an objection with the grounds upon which it 
is founded. 

Thus in a sentence like this : ^ She is perhaps one 
of the Furies' (^iaco^ ^EpLVv<; eariv ifc rpajaySia^i' says 
Blepsidemus in the play, ^eirec ye tol fxaviKov rt Kal 
TpajcphiKov) — ^ But she has no torches/ — ^is the objection 
of Chremylus: dXX ovk ep^^et yap SaSa? (Ar. Plut. 423) 
= dX)C OVK. ecTTLv ^Epivv^i ov yap e^ei 8aSa9 (Devar.). 

b) In a restriction or drawback that renders useless^ 
nullifies, &c. some preceding statement. 

Thus : 

aXV eariv e/moty vl6<; koXo^ t6 Kaya^o^, 
aW' ov/c i^iXeL yap ixav^dveiv (Aristoph,), 
'I have a good and promising son, but he will not study :^ 
i. e. but his good qualities are of little use, for he will 
not study (aXX' ovSev 6(peXo<; rod koXov Kaya^ov avrov 
elvat* ov yap e^eXec fiav^dveiv, Devar.). 

c) In passing on to another argument, because it is 
not necessary to dwell upon one that is either begun^ 
or merely mentioned to be waived. 

Thus : ^ but you all know {remember, &c.) these facts 
as well as I do; I will therefore proceed to ' &c. {dXXa 
yap ravra Trdvre^ Xare, fjbejJbV7]a^e^ &c. 

d) So, in resuming a line of argument that has been 
interrupted by a digression, with which it is not neces- 
sary to proceed. 

Thus: ^ But ii is unnecessary to dwell on this topic; 
I will therefore return ' &c. 



50.] 



35 



Exercise 13. 

50. (1) I am well aware, tliat tlie king would grant 
even to tlie Mysians many guides, and many hostages, 
as a pledge to conduct them out of his territories with- 
out fraud. And I am very sure, that for us he would 
do this with three times the pleasure, if he saw us pre- 
paring to settle in his country. But^ I am afraid, that 
if we once learn to live in idleness and plenty, we shall, 
like the lotus-eaters, forget the thoughts of a return 
home. 

(2) If you are wise, your treatment of this man will 
be the reverse of that bestowed on dogs ; for men tie 
up savage dogs in the day-time, and let them loose at 
night: whereas, if you act sensibly, you will tie this 
fellow up at night, and let him loose in the day. But ^ 
{^io pass on to another subject) I am surprised, that, if 
I have given offence to any of you, you bear it in mind 
and publish it ; whereas if I have defended any from 
the cold, or from the enemy, or have reheved any one 
who was sick or in want, these things are not remem- 
bered by any one of you. 

(3) f In which way ^ wou.ld the money spent amount 
to the larger sum, if these men were to receive the ar- 
rears due to them? or if, those arrears remaining un- 
paid, you should have to f engage and pay^ another, 
and more powerful (°body of) mercenaries? But 
Heraclides, as you informed me, thinks that this money 
amounts to a very large sum. f Most assuredly,^ both 
to obtain and to pay away f such a sum^ is a far less 

difficult matter) now, than (°it would have been to 
obtain and pay) the tenth part of it before our arrival 
{v). For it is not the ®mere numerical value that de- 
termines much and little, but the power both of the 
giver and of the receiver ; and your annual revenues 
will now amount to more, than all your possessions {v) 
together were worth formerly. 



36 



'A Wd, 



[51—53. 



» But / will not do (or advise) this, for &c ^ ==» sed transiho 

ad aliam rem (Zr.). ^ -jrorepccs. ^ Say: * to hire:' /iio-- 

^(jo(Ta(T^ai (mercede conducere). « ^ iii]v. ^ Say : ' this : ' tovto. 



Chap. 1. § 12. aXkd {akX rj). 

51. The particles dXh! r} {proeterquam^ nisi = eoccept^ 
butj ttXtjv) are used after a negative or a word that ex- 
presses separation. Thus ovSeU aXXo? aXX rj [nemo 
alius nisi ot prceter: fully ' nobody else hut than'\ Here 
properly the dXKd refers to the negative, the 77 to aXKo^, 

52. This combination appears to be a pleonastiG 
form^ that has arisen from the two simpler forms : ov- 
Set? aWo<i aXXd, and ovSel^ aWo9 

So Stallbaum : Orta est hssc locutio ex confusione duarum loquendi 
formarum, quarum altera oppositionem [aA.\a], altera comparationem 
[rj^ indicat. Itaque quum recte dici posset uxrre fJLrjdeu 6,X\o BoKe7p elvai 
a\r}^es aWa rh (rcojuLaroeides [sc. So/cet aXrj^es, etvaL], et quum recte etiam 
diceretur wcrre firjd. dW. doK. efy. aXrjxres, t) rh (rct;/j,aro€L54s, utraque lo- 
quendi forma in unum conjuncta dici sohtum, cicre jj,rideu 6.X\o 5o/c6?z/ 
eJuaL a\7}^h aAA* tj rh (TccfiaroeiSes. Quas quidem ratio quum ab initio in 
simplicibus enuntiatis usurparetur, postea etiam ad interrogantes senten- 
tias translata est. Eandem explicationem habet ttX^j/ prceterquam 
(Stallbaum). 

53. But very frequently the aX\o<; falls away after 
the negative, so that the form becomes ovSeU dXX! rj. 

Again the process of abridgment is carried on still 
further (by the omission of aXko^ from either of the 
two forms in 52), and we have the rare forms ovhel^ 
dXKd or ovSel^ rj. 

Hence the forms for nemo alius nisi, or prceteVj are : 

1) ouSel?, aXX' r/.^ 

2) ovSels aXXo9, dWd. 
8) ovS€l<^ aXXo9, aXV 77. 
4) ovSel^ a\Xo9, ?]. 

* Since the full form with ovBeu would be ouSei/ dWo, a\h* ^, and this 
might be abridged to ovdlv &\\o ^ (== ovdh ^) or ij, it is 



54—56.] 



37 



5) ovSel'^i aX\d» 

6) ovSeU, ij. 

54. Instead of ovdels ^Wos, the first clause may contain a negative 
particle with some adverbial form derived from 6.\\os (e. g. olWws, aWo- 
^i, (fee.) • or from erepos. 

55. The preceding sentence may also be a ^ rhetori- 
cal question ' or ' question of appeal/ wHch. (when it 
contains no negative) is virtually negative. 

56. Here, too, the dWd or the r; ma} disappear 
from the second clause ; or the aXXo? from the first. 

Thus the forms are : 

Tt9 aWo? (or aWo9 rt?) aXX' ^ . . ; 

Tt9 a\Xo9 (or a\Xo9 t^^) aX-Xa • • • ; (rare.) 

TtV aXXo? (or aXXo9 T69) ^ ; 

Tt9 . . . ^ ; 

055. rk a\Xo9 is, l/TAo eZ^e ? What other person ? 
aX\o<; T69 is, Does any one else ? Does any other 
person ? 

OvSev dWo cTKOiretv a)OC fj to dpLarov (PIX 
Mtyco yap oc ovoev^ aW rj oca aocpiav nva tovto to 
ovofia eo")(rjKa {PL). ^Ev Se tc3 jiecKp dWrj fiev iroXc^ 
ovSe/nia ovt€ (^Ckla ovt€ ^EXXtjvI^ dWd @pd/c€^ ol 
Bt^vvoL (^en,). O vSe/bLLav dWrjv rjyoviirjv dv elval 
fiOL crwTripiav rj ere irelaat (Lys,), OvSev oPTa^ dWd 

K(JL>cj)OV^ [Ar.). "E/CT6LV€ S' aVTOV 0VTL<^, d\X iyo) fjLOVT], 

Ei fjbev /JbTjSa/JLO)^ dWco<^ olov t rjv hrfKovv Ta^ avTd<; 
Trpd^eu^ a W' 7) Scd /uLid^ lS6a<;^ ^^X^^ '^^^ vTroXa^elv, 
&c. {Isocr,) S(p6Spa yap avTS TavTa So^ec, [Jbrjha i^ov 
dWo^t Ka^apw evTev^ea^au (ppopTjaec, a XX' ^ i/cel 
(PZ.). Aeov S* avTov KaTayopdaai (popTta ^A^rjvTj^ev 
fivcov €KaTov Se/ca7r6VT€j .... ov /caTTjyopaaev a XX' rj 
TrevTaKCCT'^iXicov fcal irevTafcocrLccv 8pa)(jjLcop {Devi,), T L 

obvious that it must be uncertain whether, in some passages, the correct 
reading should be ovdhu aAA' jj or ouSeu aX\' ij. 

Kiihner decides for ovdeu dW* i], where ttoicc is to be supplied : =* * / 
do nothing huV Ki'iiger says, that dAA' ^ appears to give prominence to 
iho excepted notion ; ^AA' ^ (^AAo ^, ^tAAo 7' ^) merely introduces an ex- 
ception. 



88 



'-4 Wd. 



[57. 



aWo reXo? e%6T6 Xeyecv aW' ^ '^Sovdg re koI \v7ra9] 
{PL). TovTo aWo TL Tj ^eoc^Ckh jiyverai ] TL ovv 

TOVTCOP eaTLV aiTLOV Tj OTL . . • ; T L TTOLCOV rj eVCO^OV' 

Exercise 14 (ouSek, &C.--aW' rj). 

57. (1) The bee feeds upon^ no °kind of food but 
wliat has {jS) a sweet juice. 

(2) For this reason all physicians forbid their pa- 
tients to take any but the very smallest (° quantity of) 
oil in what they are going ^ to eat. 

(3) It is manifest that the greater the number of 
those who were domiciled, and who visited a place, 
f the greater would be the increase of imports and ex- 
ports, of rents and taxes.^ Now,"^ f for the increase of 
revenue from such sources,® it is not even necessary to 
make any kind of outlay, but (°that of) a few f liberal 
and friendly ^ votes and attentions. 

(4) In Cnidus the oligarchical constitution was 
altered after the nobility quarrelled amongst them- 
selves, because *^so few were capable of holding office 
° together; and, as has been said, if the father was in 
office, the son was not, nor even, if there were) sev- 
eral brothers, any but the eldest. 

(5) Having done this, and summoned the Corcy- 
raeans to an assembly, they told them that this (® which 
they had done) was the best thing (for them), and that 
so fthey would be in the least danger of being en- 
slaved^ by the Athenians; and (° they directed) that 
for the future they should receive neither party except 
f coming in a quiet manner^ with a single ship, but 
should consider fa larger force ^ as hostile. 

* Say : 'uses:' X9^^^^'- ^ fxe^J^ei sc. /-is, or 6 aa-^cpuv. There 

is a transition from the plural j;o the singular, since it is only one patient 
who desires, at any given time, to eat. <^ Say : ' the more would 

be imported, exported,' (fee. ^g^^ e . < fQj. g^ch 

increases of ° your revenues.' (piXdu^pcoTroSf i. e. drawn up (or 

conceived) in a friendly spirit towards men generally (as opposed to citi- 
zens). ^ Say: 'they would least be enslaved.' ^o-y- 



58, 59.] 



39 



Exercise 15 (oySel? &c. — a\X' rj). 

58. (1) f A vast multitude of depositions* having 
been read at the triaJ, some of the deponents ^ stating 
that they delivered to the plaintiff certain of my effects, 
others that they 'were present when he received them, 
others again that they had made purchases from him 
and paid him the prices^ not one of them has he sued 
for false testimony; nor has he dared to proceed 
against any witness except this one individual, whose 
evidence he cannot show to have fixed him with the 
receipt of a single drachm. 

(2) The mountain that we see, reaches above sixty 
stadia in leng*th, yet we see no troops watching us f in 
any part of it,° except on the road itself It seems, 
therefore, far more advisable to endeavor to win some 
part of the unguarded^ mountain by stealth, and seize 
it before them,® if possible, than to fight against forti- 
fied posts and men prepared to resist). 

a Say : ' more than very many depositions in all.' ^ In the 

Greek say : * some of them,' i. e. t?ie depositions ; and so below. The 
verbs to sue, to proceed against, will have the thing (the deposition) for 
their object instead of the personal object (the witness or deponent), 

^ ouBa{j.ov, ^ €p7}iJLos. ® Use the participle (p^dcras. 

Exercise 16 (ovSeU aXXo? — dWd), 

59. (1) Many noble and important schemes did my 
country both form and happily effect by my means ; 
and that it was not unmindful of this, take the follow- 
ing proof, JEschines : When the people came to elect 
a person to make the funeral oration over the slain, im- 
mediately after the disaster, they did not elect you, 
though you were proposed (jo)^ f and possess so splen- 
did a voice ;^ nor Demades, though he had just con- 
cluded the peace; nor Hegemon; nor any of your 
party : but [they elected] me. 

(2) At the time that Aristarchus the son of Moschus 
was accused before the Council of having murdered 



* 



40 'AXXd. [60. 

Nicodemus,^ we know that Midias, whom Demosthenes 
is now prosecuting, went before the Council, and said 
that nobody but Aristarchus was the murderer of Ni- 
codemus, and that he had perpetrated this murder with 
his own hand ; and ("^ we know) that he advised the 
Council to proceed to the house of Aristarchus and 
f have him arrested.^ 

* Kanrep ev(p(aj/oj/ 6j/ra. ^ Say : ' that the accusation was brought 
before the Council (eSo3-7? els rrju ^ovXr\v) concerning (uTrep) Aristarchua 

, that he had murdered Nicodemus.' ^ Say : ' and arrest him ;* 

it being common to speak of a person's doing that, which he causes to ho 
done by others. 

Exercise 17 {ovSeU &c. aX\o<; — 

60. (1) Cleon my opponent was the first cousin to 
the deceased by the father's side, and *^so his son, whom 
he pretends that Astyphilus adopted, was his second 
cousin. But Cleon's father was removed by adoption 
into another family, and my opponents are still mem- 
bers of that family ; so that by law they are no rela- 
tions whatever to Astyphilus. Since then there could 
be no question on this head, they have forged a will, 
O judges (as I believe that I shall prove), and are now 
striving to rob me of my brother's property ; and so con- 
fident Cleon both was then and is now, that no man 
but himself will obtain the estate in dispute, that no 
sooner was the death of Astyphilus announced, my 
father being then confined by illness and I absent from 
the city on foreign service, than he entered upon the 
occupation of the land, and claimed all my brother's 
effects, in right of his son, before you had determined 
any thing on the subject. 

(2) It would be natural, I presume, to suppose, that 
whenever Astyphilus was in town, he would go to 
those sacrificial feasts which other Athenians usually 
attend,^ accompanied by (''Cleon and) none but Cleon; 
being in the first place a member of the borough, and 
secondly his cousin, f and still further** the man whose 



61.] 



41 



son lie was going to adopt. Now ^- the clerk shall read 
to you the deposition made by the members of his bor- 
ough, to the effect, that he never attended (^such sac- 
rificial feasts) in company with him. 

(3) Again, councillors, if I had' served in the cav- 
alry, I should not deny it, as if I had been guilty of 
some dreadful ^ fault, but should claim to be examined 
and passed, after proof given that no citizen had suf 
fered wrong at my hands. And I perceive that you 
are of this opinion as well (° as myself), and I see many 
of those who were then in the cavalry °now sitting as 
members of the Council, and manv °more of them who 
have been appointed (j)) trierarchs or generals. Do 
not therefore^ suppose that I make this defence from 
any other motive, than because the defendants have 
dared to state against me what is palpably false.® 

(4) ovSeU &c. — aXXd.'] Though there are many 
causes from which changes (°of |)olitical constitutions) 
arisC; he does not mention ^ any but one, that men, liv- 
ing prodigal lives, and overwhelming themselves in 
debt by taking up money at usury, thus become poor, 
as if at first all or the gTcat majority were rich. 

* Begin : ' To the sacrifices at (eV) Tvhich the other Athenians feast 
together (IcrTmtri^ai),' &c. ^ eri 5e. ^ roivvv. ^ Say : 

'so {uxTre) do not suppose' &c. ® irepKpavws Kara-if/evdea^al rivos. 



Chap. 2. § 1. MXXw? {piherwise), "AXkco9 re KaL 

61. "AWco^ re KaL (hoth otherwise and also =) '"especial- 
ly ' (prsesertim). The phrase relates to some condition or 
state of things the existence of which is assumed. Such 
condition is, however, not always fally expressed (by 
et, ore or orav, eirethrj, ko,.)^ but often imxdied by a j^ar- 
tidple or even an adjective or (rarely) substantive, Oiihe 
KaTokvea^aL en kolKov, aWco9 re kol el So^o/jLev ap^at 



42 



[62. 



fjLoXKop T?79 Sca(f)opd^ {Th), 01 he TIXaraLrj^ ricnj)(^a^ov 
dWco<; T€ Kal eireuhr] ov8eva ovSev ivecorepL^ou 
(Th.), ^Itt'ttlkov cTTpaTev/Jia ev vvktl Tapa')(0)hes earcVy 
dX\co<; re Kal j3dp^apov {^en,). ^E^opv^ovp, aW- 
0)9 re fcal olvov elXrji^ore^ (^O* noWd dv tl^ e^ot, 

dW(os re Kal prjrcdp, elirelv {PI*)* Also dWco<; re 

TrdvTco^ Kaly dW(o<; re el Kai^ dW(o<^ re Kav {WyUen- 
bach). 

Exercise 82. 

62. (1) It is manifest to the Olynthians, that they 
do not now fight for glory, nor for a part of their terri- 
tory, but to defend their state from rnin and slavery ; 
and they know both what he did to those Amphipoli- 
tans who betrayed their city to him, and to those in- 
habitants of Pydna who received him (^within their 
walls). And, as a general principle, an absolute mon- 
archy is, I presume, an object of suspicion to free 
states, and especially if they occupy a neighboring 
territory. 

(2) Even if you should succeed in passing the moun- 
tains imobserved, or in seizing them before the enemy, 
and should contrive to defeat in the plain both their 
cavalry and their foot, whose numbers amount to above 
twenty thousand mxcn, you will *^then arrive at the 
rivers ; first, the Thermodon, which is three hundred 
feet in breadth, which it will be a difficult matter, I 
imagine, to pass, especially with a numerous hostile 
army in front, and a numerous one following in your 
rear ; and secondly, the Iris, which is also three hun- 
dred feet broad : in the third place, the Halys, not less 
than two hundred stadia in breadth, which you will not 
be able to pass without boats ; and who will there be 
to supply you with boats ? And so again the Parthe- 
nius is impassable, which you would arrive at, if you 
were to cross the Halys. 



63, 64.] 



43 



Chap. 2. § 2. {a\\co<^ re.) 

63. a) ''^XXa)9 re differs, especially in its origin, 
from a\X(w? re KaL 

b) "AWco<; T€ = ' alioque onodoj^ id est ^majoreque 
mo do'' (Hermann): that is, it states tliat the thing oc- 
curs in another luay^ and iviplies that it is a grealer^ a 
more important loay {prcetereaque ; adde quod)^ ^ and he- 
sides thisj^ ^ and more than this,^ ^ moreover, Thus (Soph. 
(Ed. Tyr. 1110) (Edipns, having said that he thought 
he saw the shepherd they had so long been looking 
for, adds a reason for this opinion, and goes on thus : 

dWco^ re tou9 dyovra^ coairep olfcera^ ejvwfc ifiav- 
Tov — and moreover {and besides this)^ I recognize those 
who are conducting him as being like servants of mine. 

Kal irapeXi^cov avrol^ 'Ep/jLO/cpdrr)^ 6 "Epixoovo^^ 

i^dpcrvvi re, Kal ovfc eta rep ^eyevrfpLevcp ivStSovat* Tr]v 
fJLev yap jvco/jltjv avrcov ov^ rjcrarjaisaL, rrjv he dra^iav 
^Xd'y^at* ov fievroL roaovrov ye XeKp^rjvaLj oaov elfco<^ 
elvai, dWo)^ re tols Trpcorots tcov ^EWrjvcov epLTretpia 
lSLcoTa<;^ &)? eiirelv^ ')(eipoTe^vaL^ dvraycovcaa/jLevov^. — Th, 
6, 72 (the only passage in which the form occurs in 
that historian). 

c) When this dXXco^ re is followed by a clause with 
idv or eTTeihrj^ it is equivalent to ' the more ' (if, since 
&c.) ; or ' especially ' (if, since &c.) 

Here, though this ^A\cc9 re is construed ' especially^ like ^AAcos re 
Kai, yet it gets the meaning in a different %my (as explained in h\ The 
eav or 67rei5T*7 may be followed by a «ai, which, however, does not belong 
to these particles, but to the word or notion it precedes. 

AoKel Si pbOL Kal irepl tcov Trpo? tou? /3ap/3dpov<i rfj 
TToXec ireiTpayiievayv irpoarjKeLV elirelv^ dWo}<; r eTreiSr] 
Kal Tov \6yov Karearrjadpiriv irepl Tr]<^ fjyepiovia^ tt}? eV 
iK€LVov^^ the more so (or especicdly) since &c. (Isocr.) 

Exercise 18. 

64. (1) I have gone through these ° points in tli^e 



44 MX\«9. [64. 

belief that you, wlio are not one of the many but a king 
oyer numerous subjects, f should not think like or- 
dinary men,^ nor judge of th.e merit either of things or 
persons by the °mere pleasure (®that they produce), 
but should try them by the test of useful actions ; the 
more so, since all the professors of philosophy, though 
they differ with respect to the best means of training 
and educating the soul — some of them saying that their 
pupils will best attain to wisdom by controversial logi- 
cal disputes, others by political training, and others by 
some third method of their own — yet do all agree in 
this, that the man of liberal education ought, as the re- 
sult of all these methods, to prove himself able to give 
prudent counsel. 

(2) f But as to the forming^ your army for battle ; 
the marching them, either by day or by night, by nar- 
row or open ways, by mountainous paths or across 
plains ;^ how to encamp ; how to place your guards 
and watches both by night and day ; how to lead to- 
wards the enemy ; how to retreat from them ; how to 
march by a city belonging to the enemy ; how to march 
up to a rampart, and to retreat from it ; how to pass 
woods or rivers ; how to be on the guard, either against 
cavalry or against men armed with javelin or bow: 
and ifj when you are marching by way of either wing, 
tbe enemy should appear, how to form a front against 
them ; and if you are marching by your front, and the 
enemy appear in another part and not in front, how to 
lead against them; f how to get the best intelligence*^ 
of the enemy's affairs, and how best to conceal your 
own from them : fin all these matters,^ what can I say 
to you ? for you have often heard from me all that I 
knew of tkem; and, besides, whenever you have 
thought any one an adept in any of these affairs, you 
have not neglected to apply to him for information, 
nor are you unskilled in them. 

» Begin the clauses with Swcos ("Oirous xph rdrreip &c.). ^ Use 
tbe adjectives opcivos, Tr€5ii/6s, in agreement with the preceding ' iva^s* 



65, 66.] 



45 



and connect the subsequent clauses by ^ ottos (= or how). « Sa7/ : 
* or how a man may best get intelligence of ' &c. (alo-^dpea-^ai). 

^ Say : ' all these (° points) why should I tell you ? ' ravra irduTa 
&c. (the commencing the principal clause. See English-Greek Yo- 
cabulary). 



Chap. 2. § 3. dWw (continued). 

65. ''AX\co<; (properly ' otherwise ') sometimes stands 
before a substantive, and seems to nave the force of 
''useless^'' ^njorthless^ or ^ mere J It perhaps gets this 
meaning from that of ' otherwise than as it should he 
from which it obtained the meaning of temere {rashly^ 
recklessly)^ and fjidrrjv^ frustra. 

Ace^ocov Ta^ ^oLvicrcra^ vav<; fiivovre^, dWco<; ovo- 
fMa {= tantum nomen, non nisi nomen : a mere name) koI 
ov/c epjov^ KLvhvvevaetv SiaTpi^fjvaL {Th.), 

So Trjv aXKoy; (sc. ohov) = loithout purjpose or aim ; 
idly \Trjv dW(o<^ dSo\€a")/a). DemJ], 

Exercise 19. 

66. (1) I shall therefore acquaint yon with all that 
[ think proper for us to do during our stay. In the 
first place, we must supply ourselves with provisions 
out of the enemy's country ; for there is here no suffi- 
cient market to supply us : besides, except some few 
of us, we have no money to buy with, and the country 
is inhabited by the enemy. We shall therefore run 
the risk of losing many of our men, if we go in search 
of provisions in a careless and unguarded manner ; so 
that I am of opinion f that you should go out upon 
these expeditions in strong foraging parties,^ and not 
wander about the country rashly, f and that the care 
of attending to this should be left to us^ (i. e. the gen- 
erals). 

(2) fWith respect then to the preparations (^we 



46 



[67, 6& 



ouglit to make), the dangers we liave to guard against, 
and the measures wMch. are the most likely f in all 
human probability ^ to command success, f I have said, 
I believe, all that is necessary.® But to attend to the 
execution of them, day by day; to turn unexpected 
occurrences to the best account ; to know the proper 
time for every ("^step to be taken), and to judge cor- 
rectly what may be gained over by f amicable discus- 
sion,^ and what requires force : (^all this) is the task 
of the generals who command. And hence it is^ that 
the statesman who advises political measures has the 
most difficult and trying post ; for what has been wise- 
ly recommended, after being tested and approved with 
great zeal and labor, is oftentimes ruined by the per- 
verse management of those who are intrusted with its 
execution. 

* (Tvv IT pov 0 ixolI s \afjL^du€iv TO. iiriT'rjdeia. ^ Say: ' and tliat 

we should see to (iTTLfxeXe^a-^aL) this.' ^ Begin : ' The preparations 

then ' &c. : compare note c. ^ Say : * according to human calcula- 

tion.' e Say: 'have pretty-nearly {(rx€^6u) been said by me.' 

' SjiiXia, i. e. intercourse, discussion, &c. 



Chap. 3. § 1. ''Afxa. 

67. ^^A/jia= ^ together^' ''at the same time^ 'atonce.^] 
Its principal use is to mark the occurrence of two 
events at the same time either (1) actually or (2) virtually^ 
the first being no sooner over, than the second com- 
mences, 

68. a) In afia /juev . . . afia Si (simul . . . simuT) we 
have an instance of anaphora^ (that is, of the emphatic 
repetition of a word, which then, at least in the second 
and subsequent clauses, takes the first place). They 
are construed by ^ at once . . . and; hoth . . . and;'' and 
sometimes ^partly . . . partly,^ To ireL^eiv olov r ehac 
TOL^ \6yoc<; icrrlv aXnov afia fiev iXev^epia^; avrols toI^ 



69—71.] 



"A n a . 



47 



av^pot)7roi<^^ afjua Se rod aWwv ap')(eLV iv rfj avrov TroXet 
i/cdarw {Pl.)» 

69. b) "Alia . . . KaL connects either single notions, 
like ofJLOV (STravLcorarov evTraiSia^ TV')(elv a/ia Kal tto- 
XvTraiSia^ (Isocr,). ^E(f)6v€vov ai^Spa^ ofiov Kal lttttov^, 
Xen ~\^ or whole propositions : in the latter case, it is 
equivalent to our ' no sooner — than ; ' or ' as soon as 
"i'er;' ^when once^ Hlie moment^ followed by a princi- 
pal clause, &c. ; or by ^vjlien at once"^ &c., according to 
the view with which the speaker points out the coinci- 
dence in point of time. 

. 70. "A II a TrXovTovaL Kal v/ia^ /jLLcrovcn (Lys.), ^they 
no sooner groio rich, than they detest you ' (or), ^ the mo- 
ment (as soon as ever, &c.) they grovj rich^ they hate you^ 

Exercise 20. - 

71. (1) f Upon this occasion^ the Grreeks observed, 
that a square was not a proper disposition for an arm.y 
when pursued by the enemy ; for whenever the flank- 
columns are forced to close in either by the roads be- 
coming narrower, or by mountains, or by a bridge, the 
heavy-armed troops must necessarily be forced out of 
their ranks^ and march uneasily^ being at once pressed 
together and disordered ; so that of necessity they be- 
come useless for want of order. fOn the other hand,^ 
when the flanks come to be again extended, the men 
who before were forced out of their ranks, must spread 
themselves out, and consequently leave (^at first) an 
opening in the centre, which very much disheartens 
those who are thus exposed, when the enemy is behind 
them. Besides, when they had a bridge or any other 
defile to pass, every man was in a hurry, wanting to 
be first, upon which occasion the enemy had a fair op- 
portunity of attacking them. 

(2) They manage their invasion of the country of 
the Carduchi in the following manner,^ ^ (^and that for 
two reasons) both that their design might not be dis- 



48 



[72—74. 



covered, and that they miglit put it into execution, 
before the enemy had taken possession of the heights. 
When it was about the last watch, and **only so much 
of the night was left^ as to allow them to traverse the 
plain while it was yet dark, they struck their tents ; ' 
and, marching at the word of command, came to the 
mountains by break of day. Cheirisophus commanded 
the vanguard with his own people, and all the light- 
armed troops ; and Xenophon brought up the rear with 
the heavy-armed, having none of the light-armed, be- 
cause there seemed no danger of the enemy's attacking 
their rear, while they were marching up the mountain. 



Chap. 3. §2, {a[ia with participles!) 

72. a) With a participle afjua may be resolved into 
a sentence with ^wMlst^ ^as^ or (if it is a past partici- 
ple) by ^when^^ or ^ as soon as with the pluperfect. 
"Afjba ravr elircov dviarTj {Xen,^, 01 ^dp^apoi koX 
<^evy ovre^ afia iriTpcoaKov (Xen.), 

b) '^Afjba fjbev . . . aiMa he with participles introduce 
two reasons influencing the mind at the same time, ^ETrec- 
^ero 6 KaXdaLpLS afJua [xev r& KvrjfJLOovL ')(^ap l^o fie- 
V09 a/ia 8 6 Tov NavaiKKea tS)v fierd ravra eveKev 

VTr07rOCOV/JL6V09* 

73. '^AfMa is also = crvvy ^together withj^ ^withJ The 
substantive belonging to it often takes a participle when 
time is expressed : d/jLa tgS alro) d/c/jbd^ovrt. 

Exercise 21. 

74. (1) The Thracians who had escaped, °now came 
together ; and many of them had' escaped out of the 
very hands of their pursuers), they being targeteers, 
and the Greeks heavy-armed troops.^ After they were 



74.] 



49 



"tliiis assembled in a body, they first attacked tlie 
division commanded by SmicreS; one of the Arcadian 
generals, when he was already on his march to the 
place of rendezvous with a considerable sum of money. 
^ f For some time ^ the Grreeks fought as they marched 
on ; but, as they were crossing a water-course, the 
Thracians put them to flight, and killed both Smicres 
himself and all his men. Of another division, which 
was under the command of Hegesander, one of the 
eight generals, they leTt but eight men alive ; but He- 
gesander himself escaped. 

(2) The rest of the generals f arrived at the place 
of rendezvou.s ^ some with difficulty, and others without 
any at all. But the Thracians, after they had gained 
this advantage, gave notice to one another, and assem- 
bled, with great resolution, in the night ; and, at day- 
break, great numbers both of horsemen and targeteers 
were drawn up round the hill on which the Grreeks 
were encamped ; and, their numbers continually in- 
creasing {v), they attacked the heavy-armed troops with 
great security ; for the Greeks had neither archers, 
darters, nor horse ; whilst they, advancing with their 
light-armed men and horse, hurled their darts, and, 
whenever the Greeks offered to attack them, retreated 
with ease : and others assailed them from some other 
quarter. Thus, whilst many of the Greeks were 
wounded, not a man was hurt on the side of the Thra- 
cians : so that the former could not stir from the place, 
and were at last debarred from water by the Thracians. 
Being reduced to great extremity, terms of accommo- 
dation were proposed ; but^ after the other points were 
settled (?;), the Thracians f refused to give^ hostages, 
which the Greeks insisted on. This put a stop to the 
treaty. 

• When the ground of a statement depends in this way on the char- 
acter or quahty of the two persons (or each being what he is), it is usual 
to express this antithetically by making one the apposition to the subject, 
another the object. Thus : I am healthier tlian you because I am tern- 

3 



50 



[75—78. 



peratey you intemperate,^ would become, * I am healthier than you, a tem- 
perate • man than an intemperate.^ Use this turn here. ^ recoy. 
^ Say : * came together ' ((rvj/€px€(r^ai). ^ KaL ® ovk 
i^iSocrav = dare noluerunt. (The Pres. and Imperf. of Si5Jj/at have ofteD 
the meaning of {to give), to be ready to give.) 



Chap. 4. "Av. § 1. (Repetition ofav.) 

75. The general construction of av witli tlie differ- 
ent moods has been already given in the first Part, and 
more will occur below under the particular particles. 
We here consider only the cases of its repetition and 
omission : which we state in Hermann's very clear ex- 
planation of these points in Attic construction. 

76. a) Pervulgatum est, av indicativo et optativo 
junctum iterari, ut bis terve in eadem sententia positum 
inveniatur. Eadem ratio cadit etiam in infinitivum et 
participium, quia has verbi partes nihil nisi conversam 
ex indicativo vel optativo orationem continent. Sed 
id non temere fieri posse, sponte patet. 

77. h) Sunt autem duo modi^ quibus repeti av po- 
test, (1) imus^ quum pluribus verbis interpositis ab eo 
verbo, quicum conjungi debeat, longius avulsum est, 
quam ut non videatur concinnitas orationis repetitio- 
nem requirere, (2) alter, qui est longe frequentissimus, 
quum in parte ahqua sententiae iteratur. Plane enim 
eadem hujus particulae ratio est, quae est negationum. 
Etenim quemadmodum, quum ad totam sententiam 
pertinet negatio, iterari in partibus quibusdam solet, 
ut OVK ecTTcv ovSek, sic etiam, quum tota sententia condi- 
tionalis est, refertur ea conditio etiam ad partes eju? 
primarias. 

78. c) Sunt autem partes illae tales, ut addant ali 
quid, quod ilia principalis sententiae ratione afficiatur. 

1) Id modo est participium^ ut, 

ap OVK aiT cofJLOv ravra SaL/jLov6<; rt^ av 

tcpLVcop eV dvSpl Tft)S' av op^OLT] \6yov ; — (CEd. R. 828.) 



79—81.] "Av. 51 

2) modo conditio aliter expressa, nt 

C0C7T av €L a)devo^ 
\d^oi[iLi S7]\(oaaL/jL av oV avrol^ (ppovco, — (Electr. 333.) 

3) modo afftrmatio major^ ut 

oan^ yap rjv eicelvov 6 Kravayv, tol^ av 

"ifeXoL ;— (GEd. R 139.) 

4) modo negatio^ ut 

(j)covrjv av ovk av el')(ov* — (Lysistr. 361.) 

b) et in formula ovfc av (p^dvoi^ av. ^ 

Turn, quae par est negationij in inter rogatione^ ut 

1. Tft3 yap av fcal /jL€l^ovl 

\e^at/jL av rj aoi ; — (CEd. R. 772.) 

2. 77009 av TTor dcpLKoifirjv av ; — (Aristopli. Pac. 68.) 

6) Denique in divisione sententiag, ut 

, (ocTT ovyi fiavreias y av ovre rfjo eyco 
pXeyfaiiM av ovveK , ovre rrjo av varrepov ' — 

((Ed. E. 857.) 

. oL/JLat yap ovr av larpov ovre ^acLV av 
♦ VLyfrat Ko^ap/i^ rijvSe rrjv ariyrjv, — (1227.) 

Harum rationum ubi nuUi locus est, non potest 
iterari av, 

^ 9. Cseterum heec iteratio particulas in primis usitata est Atticis. Ra- 
rius invenitur apud Herodotum, raro apud Epicos. 

80. Geminatum Elmsleius'* jure negayit conjunctivo consociari. 
Cur vero ? Quia, ut jam ostendimus, hie modus yerbi non per se adsciscit 

sed au pertinet ad vocem, ex qua pendet conjunctivus. Hujus vocis 
ea particula significatum quum mutet, nihil est in tali sententia, quod re- 
peti possit. Neque enim ad picedicata pertinet av^ sed ad ipsam condi- 
tionem, ex qua pendet sententia, ut hs av, idu, ^v. Quare etiam quum 
hfec per optativum in obliquam orationem vertuntur, non potest iterari 6.v. 

81. To this we will only add, that the words to which a^/, when it oc; 
curs singl}^, frequently attaches itself by a kind of preference, are natm*- 
ally those which, when they stand early in their clause, take an ^y, which 
is afterwards repeated before its proper verb. 

^ De qua vide Elmsleium ad Heracl. 721. 
2 ^^Q^^ Vxom. 768. 



52 "Av. [82—84 

82, Such words are, besides negatives and inter rogatives (which Her 
mann raentions above) : 

a) Affirmative adverbs, denoting degree, intensity, and the hke — ixa\- 
Xov {iioKkxt) olv • (r(p6hp olu • et/corcos olv, (fee. 

b) Adverbs of place, time, manner, (fee. — irov, rore, ttote, rdxa, ^d- 
X^crra, wSe, eri, cos, ttoos, r^Beccs, rj^LO'Ta, ^iKaioos, (fee. 

83. The participle to which an dv, that is afterwards repeated before 
the verb, attaches itself, is often one that might itself take 6.u : or, in 
other words, when, instead of two verbs with du and the optative, a par- 
ticiple is used, and one verb, the participle naturally takes 6.u, as well as 
the verb. Very often, however, du is appended to a participle, which it 
does not modify. Thus, as Hermann observes in Soph. (Ed. R. 446 — (tv- 
^els T tLv ovK tiu a\y vvaLs irXeov — the participle (fv^ds is of itself equiv- 
alent to 6i (Tv^eiy]s, the du being added, not to give it this meaning, but 
on account of the following verb. 

Exercise 22. 

84. (1) They say that these mountains are full 
of woods, so that there are hopes you will not be dis- 
covered. However, if you send before the rest of your 
army some light men equipped for expedition, who, 
both by their number and habit, may look like plun- 
derers, these men, if they meet with any of the Arme- 
nians, will prevent those that they can take from giving 
an account of things ; and, by driving away those they 
cannot take, will hinder them from seeing the whole 
army, and will cause them to take their measures only 
as against a band of thieves. 

(2) Do you imagine that, if all of them had reasoned 
like Leocrates, and run away, any of these glorious ac- 
tions would have been performed, or that you would 
still be dwelling in this land (°of ours)? As then, gen- 
tlemen, you praise and honor the good, so ought you 
also to detest and punish the bad, and especially^ °this 
Leocrates, who neither feared nor stood in awe of you . 

(3) As, where fighting is necessary, he is accounted 
the strongest and bravest, who has subdued the great- 
est number of his foes), so when we have to persuade, 
that man should be held to be the most eloquent and 
efl&cient, who has brought over the greatest number to 
our own way of thinking.^ 



85.] 



"Av. 



53 



* This is an instance of ^A.Acoy re Kai standing before a single substan - 
tive. ^ TTOL^Iv TLva 6fjLoyuc*>iJ.oua e/xoi. 

Exercise 23. • 

85. (1) Wlien tliey had breakfasted, Cyrns called his 
captains together, and spoke to this effect : ' Friends ! 
how many valuable things are we, in my opinion, per- 
fectly throwing away, when the gods are offering them 
for our acceptance! for now you yourselves behold 
^that the enemy have fled for fear of us. And how 
can any body think that they ^who, though possessed 
of an intrenched post, have left it and fled, will stand 
and look us in the face on fair ground ? They who 
did not stand, before they had made trial of us, how 
should such men stand after they are beaten, and have 
been so ill treated by us ? :{: How should the worst of 
those men make up their minds to fight us, "^of whom ^ 
the best have been destroyed?' 

(2) ^ Is this then {ovvy said he, 'your meaning, that 
your father also, from being a foolish ^man, is become 
f sensible and right-minded^ in this one day's time?' 
'Exactly so,' he replied. 'It is your opinion there- 
fore (dpa) that f soundness of mind^ is an emotion of 
the soul, like grief, not f the resu.lt of mental*^ disci- 
pline ; for if he who is to be of sound mind, must ° first 
become f thoughtful and prudent,^ a man cannot, I pre- 
sume, after being of unsound mind, become right- 
minded all in a moment' 'How so (rtSe;), Cyrus?' 
said he : ' did you never observe an individual attempt- 
ing from folly to fight with a stronger than himself, 
who, upon being defeated, was immediately cured of 
his folly with reference to that ° adversary ? And did 
you never see a city putting itself in array against 
another city, which, after a defeat (?;), it is presently 
ready to obey instead of fighting with it ?' 

* (Tdo(ppo}v. ^ (To3(ppo(Tvv7i. « fj.d^7]ij,a, a thing learnt : con- 

trasted with TTo^f] fxa, (ppovifxos. 



Means that this clause is to precede the other in the Greek order. 



54 



[86—89 



Chap. 4. § 2. De omisso dv propter aliud dv {Hermanri), 

86. Quemadmodum iteratur dv in una sententia, ita 
in oratione membris quibnsdam distincta non raro in 
uno tantum membro ponitur, in altero autem omittitur. 
Quod si quaeris qua lege fiat, res ipsa monstrat, sic de- 
mum posse, si utrumque membrum ad commune quid- 
dam referri licet, ita ut, si prsemittas aV, ad utrumque 
verbum pertineat. 

87. Sit nobis pro fundamento liujus disputationis 
illud Xenophontis, tto)? jdp dv tL^ irore i^ap/ceaete rv- 
pavvo<^ Tj '^^p'^fiara €ktlv(ov oaov^ d^eiXero^ rj heafjbov^ 
dvTi7Td(7')(pi oaovs 8r) iSeor/jLevcreVj rj oaov^ KareKrave iro)^ 
dv LKavd<; yfrv)(^d(; dvTnTapdo")(OiTO d7ro^avovjuL€va<; ; ^ 
Prius TTw? dv ad duo refertur verba, ideoque recte et 
ordine factum, ut, sequente deinde divisione, neutri de 
duobus, quae proxima sunt, verbis, i^apKeaetev et dvn- 
Trdaxot, additum sit, etsi potuit addi utrique. Sed 
quod deinde sequitur, 7rw9, in versa orationis forma, no- 
vam incipit sententiam, neque est pars prsegressae ; ita- 
que etiam suum sibi dv adjici postulat. 

88. Nunc videamus alia. In eodem libro scriptum 
est : wcrre ov [jlovov (pcXoto dv, dWd koX ipSo vir dv'^pco- 
TTcov* Kol Tov<i KoXov^; OV TTecpdv, dWd Treipcofievov vtt 
avTcbv dve^ea^ai dv ere heot,^ Scilicet id est, (oar dv 
ov fjbovov (j)L\oLo dWd fcal ip&o. Altera nova sententia 
est, novum sibi dv vindicans, koX Siot dv ae. 

89. Paullo difficilius judicium est de proximis verbis : et Se rts Kivdu- 
vos eXr], ov <Tvix{xdxovs fx6pov aXKa kol irpofxaxovs kcll irpo^vfxovs opcprjs ^v, 
TToXXiav fxkv Bcopcoov a^iovfjieuos, ovk airopoov 5e *6to3 rovrcov eu/^eret /xeraddo' 
(Te/s, Trdvras fiev (Tvyxaipow^as ex^v iirl to7s (To7s aya^o7s, irduras irph 
rSov (Twv &cnr€p twv iStcov fiaxofJi€Vovs • ^rjo'avpovs yc jurju exois Trdvras 
rovs Trapa ro7s (piXoi^ TrXovruvs. Addendum post exoLs censuerunt av 
Sch£eferus, Bremius, Reisigius, alii, udc sine probabilitate. Non videtur 
tamen necessarium esse, quia hoc in. mente habebat scriptor, kiv^vvov 5' 
hv ovros jLidXicrra fjiev avrovs rrpo^v/jLovs opcpyjSj ^rjcavpovs ye fi^v e%ois to^'I 
»vrwv ttXovtovs, 

» Hieron. 7, 12. Ml, 11. 



90—92.] 



55 



Exercise 24. 

90. (1) But what is tlie greatest proof, that it is on 
account of my affliction, and not from insolent pride, as 
this man asserts, that I ride on horseback, (®this proof 
I say) it is easy to see the force of.^ For, if I possessed 
any property, f I should ride on a mule with a Span- 
ish^ saddle, and not ride other men's horses: whereas 
now, since I cannot procure myself a thing of this kind, 
I am often forced to make use of other men's horses. 

(2) I would give a great deal, gentlemen, if, as 
judges in this cause, you would feel for me as you 
would feel for yourselves if you had experienced a 
similar treatment. For I am very sure, that if you 
were to entertain the same feeling, in a case that is not 
your own, that you would entertain in one that was, 
there wo aid not be one amongst you, who would not 
be indignant at what has occurred, but you would all 
(® of you) deem that the penalties (enacted) are too light 
for"^ those who are guilty of such practices. 

* fxa^eli/. ^ eV a(TTpd^7j5 ox^'tcr^ciL (to be put in the right tense) ; 

this was a luxurious mode of conveyance with which Midias was re- 
proached. Buttmann, in an Excursus on Dem. in Midiam, shows that the 
word a(TTpd^7j, derived from d, arrpecpeiu, and therefore implying Jlm- 
ness, relates properly to the saddle, but he thinks that ve^ possibly this 
kind of easy saddle for invalids, &c. was usually placed upon a mule, as 
a quiet easy animal. Hence the grammari«,ns sometimes make it a kind 
of saddle, sometimes a rnule. ir^pi 



Chap. 4. "Av. § 3. {av omitted with eSet, rjv, &c.). 

91. In statements of loliat it would he (or have been) 
right or wrong, possible or impossible^ praiseworthy or 
blameable to do, the imperfect is usually found without 
av, although it is implied that the thing so character- 
ised has, in point of fact, not been done, 

92. Such imperfects are ixpW' 7rpoar]K€v, eBei^ 



56 



[93. 



7]p/jL0TT€v (/caXw9 6l;^6z/)j i^7]v (fjv, virrjpj^ev)^ and adjec* 
tives (often gerundives) witli rjv {jcdWiov^ hUaiov, Kpelr^' 
Tov, dhvvarov, &c. ^v). Cf. Gr. 790. Jelf.' § 858, 3 (Mad- 
yig. § 118).^ 

1) Ei a7ravT6<; (h/uLoXoyov/jiev ^IXiTTTrov rrjv elpTjvrjv 
7rapa/3aLV€ip ovSev dXXo eSet top rrrapiopra (an orator 
lolio came forward to speaK) Xeyeip kuI GVfi^ovkeveip rj 
OTTO)? da(f)a\ecrTaTa avrop djivpovfie^a, Dem. 9, 6. 

2) Ka\op rjp TOLcrSe, el /cal '^juLaprdpofjiep, el^at rfj 
W^ripa opyfj {Th. 1, 8). 

3) El al(T')(^pop TL ai yvpaiKe^ k/neWop ipydaea^at, 
^dparop dpT avrov tt po at pere op rjp {X^en, Mera. 2; 

7, 10). 

(So in Latin, dehebam, poteram, licebat, deccbat; par, cequum, &c. 
erat.) 

Exercise 25. 

93. (1) For the law enacted, that if a man gave 
true information, the offered pardon should be granted ; 
but, if false, that he should die. f Now undoubtedly ^ 
you are all aware of this fact, that both I and my 
father escaped with our lives; whereas this was not 
possible, if I really did' inform against my father, but 
either he or I must have died. 

(2) f Herein consists the specious shunning of con- 
federacies which they have put forward ;^ not that they 
may avoid committing injustice "wdth others, but that 
they may be able to commit it by themselves ; and 
that, wherever they have the power, they may act with 
violence; and where they escape observation, they 
may take unfair advantage ; and, if in any case they 
have seized on something, they may not be put to the 
blush. And yet if they were, as they say ("^they are), 
honest men, the more impregnable they were to their 
neighbors, the more manifestly might they have shown 
their virtue by f submitting the claims of either party 
lo a friendly arbitration.^- 



94—98.] "Av. 57 

• Kol fihu 5?]. ^ it/ TovTcp rh euwp^Tres aa"jrou^ov TrpojSejSAijJTOk 



Chap. 4. § 4. (eSet &c. dv). 

94. Thougli the omission of dv with eSet, ixPV^i 
TrpoarjKe (^avfiaarov &c.) Tyz^, and the other forms men- 
tioned in 92, is very common, yet these forms are also 
found, and that not uncommonly, with dv, 

95. According to Hermann, dv must be added to 
them, whenever the contrary is reaUi/ the case : for in- 
stance, 

We must use whenever we can add : 

iXPV^ (^S^^) &c. dv, vvv Se {or dX\!) ov yjpv (^^^ &C.), 

QVK. av ixPV^ (^'Se^ &C.)5 vvv Se (or dWd) xpV {^^'^ &c.). 

96. There are several passages, where a contrary 
statement of this kind is really added : e. g. oure yap 
dv, S) dvhpes hiKacjTai^ i^rjv vfuv Ttfiav 6 rt XPV 
^€LV rj dirorlaai (eV yap rS Tra^etv Kal 6 Secj/xo? evL • ov/c 

av ovv i^rjv Sea/JLOV r l /jurj a at) vvv Se raOy 

v/jblv T€/c/jL7]pta ear CO or t e^eo-rc Syjaat' iravrekoy^ yap 
r^hrf dicvp av rjv rd Ttiir^fiara {Dem, in Timocr, § 146). 

Here the ovk av i^rjv is followed by vvv Se . . . e^e- 
cTTt, But in the d/cvp' av r]v rd TLfjbtjfxara^ it is only im- 
plied that this could never be allowed (aXV ov/c icrrtv 
dfcvpa). 

El TOLVvv cLTrexpv tou? T0C9 AtovvaLQL^ Tt iTotovvra^ 
TovTcov /card tovtov^ tqv^ vo/iov^ Slfcrjv ScSovai^ ovSev 
av TT poa eSe t rovSe tov vo/jlov aXX ov/c direxpv {Dem, 
Mid, I 35). The conclusion therefore to be drawn is, 
Trpoahel ovv rovSe rod v6/jlov, 

97. (1) As a guide for ourselves in writing Greek, it mil be well to 
follow Hermann's rule, and to express the av with edei, <fcc., when the 
object is to express, or at all events convey clearly , the notion, that such 
would indeed have been the case, but is not, the contrary being in fact 
>nie. 

98. (2) As a guide, however, to account for its insertion or omission 

8* 



5& "Av. [99. 

in all passages of the Greek writers, the rule will not serve. Of this 
Baumlein gives, amongst several examples, this short one from Herodo- 
tus: et yap vir o^outos roi elire r€\€VT7](r€Li/ )U€— -XP^ v d'f} (re Troieeiu rci 
TToieeiSf vvv Se utt* alxP-V^ ' The conclusion to be drawn is this : 
ovK ovv xp^ TToiieLi/, ra iroieeLsi hence by Hermann's rule we ought to 
have had xpVJ^ Baumlein observes, that the young man wishes to 
justify his father's conduct on a certain supposition : he therefore uses tho 
mdicative without to state it as objectively true ; even though he goes 
on to point out that such conduct rested on a false interpretation of the 
dream. The fact is, that though the conditional meaning is usually, in the 
case of these verbs, expressed in Greek as objectively true (in the indica- 
tive), yet whenever the writer deems it advisable to point out, that tliis 
indicative is to be understood conditionally, he may add the ^y, which 
expresses this. So, on the Other hand, even in a case where the contrary 
is obviously true, he may, when he does not wish to imply this strongly, 
omit the ^v, so as merely to assert, ' if that were so, this certainly was so.' 

Exercise 26, 

99. (1) Since it happens that we are now to delib- 
erate about subjects upon which, these orators have 
frequently spoken before °now, I am of opinion that I 
may fairly lay claim to your indulgence, even though 
I am the first to rise. For, if they had given you 
proper advice upon former occasions, it would not now 
be necessary for you to deliberate at all). 

(2) Cephalus, the father of Polemarchus, was like- 
wise in the house ; and he seemed to me to be con- 
siderably aged, for I had not seen him for a long time. 
X He was sitting, with a crown on his head, f on a 
chair with a cushion upon it ;^ for it so happened, that 
he had been offering sacrifice in the court (""of his 
house). We sat down therefore by him, for some 
chairs were standing there in a circle. As soon, then, 
as Cephalus saw me (p) he saluted me, and said, — 'It 
is not often, Socrates, that you come down to us in the 
Piraeus: you ought however to do so, for, if I had 
strength enough left to walk to the city, there would 
be no need for you to come here, since I should go up 
to you ; but now you ought to come ^(^^ to us) here more 
frequently; for, be assured, that with me {dat) the 
more the pleasures of the body die away, the more 



100—102.] 



59 



f does my desire for conversation and tlie pleasure that 
] '. take in it increase.^ 

(3) But they maintain that he was cast into the 
sea. From ^ what vessel ? ^ plain that the vessel 
was one of those that were then in the port. How 
then (''was it, that the body) was not found? More- 
over, it would surely have been likely, that there 
'should be some trace in the vessel, if a man had been 
killed in it, and was thrown overboard in the night, 
f But, as the case really stands,*^ my accusers assert 
that they did find traces in the vessel in which he was 
drinking, and from which he went on shore, the ves- 
sel) in which they themselves allow that the man did 
not die ; but as to the vessel from which he was thrown 
overboard, they found neither the vessel itself nor any 
trace. I will call witnesses (°to prove the truth) of 
what I say. 

* Sai/ : ' on both a cushion and chair.' ^ Say : * the more do 

the desires and delights about conversation (irepl xSyovs) increase.'. 

SaT/ : 'in what vessel.' The action of thi'owing him overboard was 
performed in the vessel, though he was thrown out of it. When an ac- 
tion may be considered in two ways, the Greeks are fond of using the 
preposition that suits the assumed or implied act or state with the verb 
that denotes the act or state expressed. Cf. Grammar, 1433. ^ vvv 



Chap. 4. § 5. {On the omission or insertion of av with 
axpeXov, e/jieXkov, i^ovXo/jbrjv, €(j)7]v.) 

100. With co^eXov (= dehebam) the particle dv is 
probably nowhere found, whether the co^eKov intro- 
duces an unfulfilled wish^ or stands in a simple categori- 
cal proposition. 

101. The reason Hermann gives is, that since it signifies that the 
thing in question ought to be or have been, you can never oppose the 
contrary: 'hut now it ought not;'' but only, 'now it is not^ 

102. With efieXXov the dv is very rare : its inser- 
tion is however admissible, since to efjbeXXov av irouri' 



60 



[103—106, 



creiv (= facturus fulssem) you may oppose ahX ov /jieXXco 
(at lion facturus sum), H. 

(An iustance occurs in Example 2 of the following Exercise.) 

103. Both ej3ov\6(jLrjv av and (though very rarely) 
€/3ov\6/jLr]v only are found. The proper force of e/3ou- 
\6/jL7]v av (= vellem) is that the speaker would utter the 
wish, if the circumstances were such as to give him any 
hope of its fulfilment. Since, however, this is not the 
case, he does not utter it. 

Observe that i^ovXofxrju exactly agrees with our / woul^ that (as the 
imperfect or preterite of ' / will '). 

104. Hermann says e^ovX6^7]v is plainly coiTect, because you cannot 
oppose to cupiebam the contrary at non cupio. But to get rid of the dif- 
ficulty that neither to i^ovXo/nrjv au can you oppose aAA' ov fioifXofjLai, he 
says, rather jesuitically : ' e^ovX6[x7]v 6.1/ potestate idem est, quod bene es- 
set, cui recte opponitur at non bene est. Quare etiam Latini vellem 
dicuntl 

105. The truth would seem to be, that l^ovK6\xriv av is the natm*al ana 
usual form, but that the speaker may, Avhen he pleases, use the equally 
correct form ifiov\6/jL7]p, the statement being then, in form, the statement 
of an objective fact. 

^E/3ovX6/ji7]v fjbevy & dvSpe^;, rrjv Svva/jLCP rod Xeyeiv 
fcal Tr]v ejJiireLpiav tmv irpajixdrcDV ccrov /jlol tca^eard- 
vat rfi T6 avfjL(f)opa koL tol^ Kaicoi^ rol^ jeyevrjfjievoc^;' vvv 
he kt\* {Antiph, de Cced. Herod, Init,) 

Exercise 27. 

106. (1) Would, O Athenians, that the Senate of 
five hundred and the popular assemblies were properly 
conducted by those who preside over them, and that 
the laws which Solon drew up, with a view to the or- 
derly conduct of our orators, were ^ still in force ; that 
the oldest citizen first might, as the laws direct, ascend 
the tribune in a dignified manner, Avithout any u23roar 
or confusion, and give from his experience the wisest 
counsels to the State ; and that then any one of the other 
citizens who pleased should^ each according to seniority, 
separately and in turn, deliver his sentiments upon each 



107, 108.] 



"A pa. 



61 



(** question under discussion: — lYonld, I say, that these 
regulations were still observed) ; for so in my opinion 
the State would be better governed than in any other 
way, and the fewest public trials would occur ; where- 
as now, since every thing has been abolished, the value 
of which used formerly to be allowed, that best and 
wisest proclamation has ceased to be made^ ' who 
amongst those who are upwards of fifty years old 
wishes to address the assembly, and then of the other 
Athenians, each in his turn?' 

(2) But come now, even if my father wished to re- 
main, do you imagine that his friends would either 
have allowed him to stay in the city), or have given 
security for him, instead of turning him from his pur* 
pose, and praying him to go away to a place, where 
he would be in safety himself without destroying me ? 



Chap. 5. § 1. Mpa. 

107. ''Apa (a particle w^hose origin and primary 
meaning is still undetermined) = igitur : ut videtur ; 
forte (after conditional particles) ; scilicet 

108. The most probable derivation seems to be that from dp(t.\ to Jit, 
to he adapted or suitable : so that the particle properly denotes conform- 
ity to the nature or state of things. Hartung contends, that it comes 
from the sane root as ap-ird(o}, ra-pio, ?-e-pente, and the German rasch^ 
so that it originally denotes suddenness, and hence surprise, &q} Rost 



* The latest explanation of Hartung's view is contained in his Greek 
Grammar, p. 800. "*'Apa denotes unimpeded development. This may 
take place (<x) first in the object itself, {h) secondly in the mind of the 
person "who p)erceives ; i. e. it may be either subjective or objective. In 
the first case, it is the rapid development of an action or event {forth' 
with), which attracts oar attention and causes surprise: in the second, it 
is the unimpeded, insight into the true connection and relation of things, 
or a sudden recognition or perception and conclusion (' then, why then ') 
Between the two stands investigation and information, which is impart 
ed by the simple statement or representation of the thing to be es 
plained." 



62 



"A pa. 



[109—112. 



refers it (not, I think, with more probability) to aXpeiVf to raise, with re- 
ference to its power of raising or exciting the attention. So that the pai- 
ticle would primarily mean ' attend /' ' mark you /' He observes, how- 
ever, correctly, that though dpa may be used to introduce an imexpected 
or startling announcement, yet it may also stand just as well, where the 
announcement is of the directly opposite charaster, expressing XhQ fulfil- 
ment of an expectation. 

109. Kriiger makes the primary meaning of the particle, that of denot- 
ing that the statement is apparent or discernible in a fact that is placed 
before us. And there is no doubt, that the force of the particle may gen- 
erally be given by * it seems! ' it luoidd seeml ' we see^ ' see you^ and the 
Hke. If this were the original meaning, apa (dp, pa) might be related 
to the Hebrew ra-ah, videre. 

110. In qaesiions apa denotes, according to Har- 
tung, tlie perplexity or emharrassment of the person wlio 
asks the question, or incredulity^ doubt as to whether 
the question can be satisfactorily answered, the being 
prepared to expect a surprising answer, or the like. — 
But Klotz is, I think, right in saying, that such ques- 
tions always relate to a present state of things^ either one 
that has been described, or one that is (as is often the 
case in dramatic narration especially) easily understood. 

Ti<; a pa pvaerai ; t/9 a p iirapKeaet ^ecop rj ^edp ; 
{JEsch. Sept, 91.) 

JEur. Hhes, 135 : vecov KaroTrrrjv [xoXetv ireka^ o tl 
TTOT dpa SatoL^ irvpa Kar avriirpwpa vavara^/icov Sai- 
eratl {'froin ivhat mcom^rehensihle cause H.) 

SopK (Ed, Tyr. : r/? ae^ reKvov^ t/? ct eriKre rcov /jua- 
KpaLcovcov apa to our astonishment, since we deemed 
you the son of mortal parents.' H.) : to which Klotz 
replies : ^ Non miratur, qui hoc dicit, sed ratiocinatione 
quadam colligit^ yideri sibi QEdipum generatum a deo 
immortali aliquo, et, quod summa vis esset in voce rcov 
fiafcpaicovcovj ad hanc vocem adjecit istam particulam.' 

111. The formula rj ttov dpa ; nrov — dpa ; = 7iura 
forte igitur? is not uncommon. 

112. The particle may also stand in dependent in- 
terrogative clauses with pronouns, oTTorepo^;, ottoIo^, iro- 
repos^ olo<; &c. 

Plutns (on recovering his sight) says: Ala")(yvGiiaL 
he ra^ ifiavrov crvfi(f)opd^^ o7ot<^ dp^ av^pdoiroi^ ^vvcbi 



113.] 



63 



iXdv^avov == *^quum considero quales igitur homines 
isti faerint. "A pa dicit rebus ita comparatis^ quod yisu 
recuperato, jam agnoverat quales essent." KL But we 
shall see that this use of the particle in the after recog- 
nition of a past mistake is very common. ^ With what 
men (apa =), as I now see, I unwittingly kept company 
loithJ 

Exercise 28. 

118. (1) ^ Therefore,^ my father,' said he, ^Cyax- 
ares says that he will supply provisions to all that go 
from hence, however great the number may be.' ' Are 
you going then, my son, trusting entirely to this,^ the 
wealth that is) of Cyaxares?' 'I^am,' said Cyrus. 
' How !' said he, * do you know what the amou.nt of 
this wealth is ?' ^ No, by Zeus,' replied Cyrus, ^ I do 
not.'^ 'And are you,' said he, 'nevertheless, trusting 
to this, °this unknown amount? Don't you know, 
that you will require many things, and that you must 
now of necessity spend much more?' 'I do know 
°that,' said Cyrus. ' If then,' he replied, 'the (° means 
of supplying this) expense should fail him, or he should 
. even^ be deliberately stating what is false, how then^ 
("^tell me) will the affairs of the army stand ? ' ' Plainly, 
not well.' 

(2) On the one hand,^ f I produce all that I possess 
to form our joint stock ;^ and, on the other, you have 
added to that joint stock (°of ours) all the property 
you brought me. And we must not consider which 
of us (° under these circumstances) has contributed the 
greater numerical amount, but must be thoroughly 
convinced of this, that whichever of us proves the bet- 
ter partner, that (*^is the one who) contributes what is 
of most value. 

* ovKovv. ^ rovroLS ^rj. *^ ov fxev (sc. oT5a). ^ Kai. 

• = rebus ita comparatis ; how if it should turn out so ; if things should 
come to that pass. ^ eyco t e . . . t e . & ' To produce and 

put it to the common stock,' eh rh Koivhv a7ro(t>aiu€iu. 



9 



64 "Apa. [114, 115. 



Chap. 5. § 2. {dpa in inferences ; or its conclusive use.) 

114. In inferences, dpa (== ergo, ' then ') often, but 
by no means always, as Hartung would have it, relates 
to something important and unexpected, and is therefore 
connected with surprise. 

OvTco KOLVov TL dpa X^P?" ^^'^V Sa/{:pi;a eartv 
{Xen,y Tl Trepl 'y^v^rj^ iXeyojaep ; oparov elvat rj ou^ 
oparov ] Ov')(^ oparov. ^ Aether dpa. NaL 'O/jUOLorepov 
dpa '^vxh o-dofjbaro^i iarc rco deiSec, to Se rw oparw {PL). 
Ei elal ^(OfjLoL ^Icrl Kal ^eoi* dWd jjurjv (== atqui) elal 
^(OfjLoL elalv dpa /cal ^eoL [Luc). 

Exercise 29. 

115. (1) How is it possible for a man to be more 
impious (^than the accused), or more of a traitor to his 
country ? X what way can a man more shamefully 
disgrace his arms than fby not choosing^ to take up 
arms at all) and repel the enemy ? Must not he have 
deserted his comrade and his post, who did not present 
himself ("^at all) to have a post assigned him ? In what 
case would he' have fou.ght in defence of what is holy 
and sacred, who has shrunk from every danger ? To 
whom would he have left his country greater (^than 
he found it)?^ for, as far as he is concerned, it is aban- 
doned and brought into the power of its enemies. And 
will you not then° put this man to death, who is guilty 
of all these crimes? (''If not,) then whom will you 
punish ? those who have committed some one of ^ all 
these ° offences? Then will it appear a lighter matter 
to commit great crimes (''than small ones), if you are 
seen to exhibit more anger against small crimes than 
in the case of greater ones). 

a Say : ' than if he did not choose/ ^ These clauses allude to 

the duties of a good citizen, as defined in the laws. ^ elra « 

delude! ^ post tcdia! in indignant questions. See Gr. 1358. 



116, 117.] 



"^A pa. 



0 



65 



Chap. 5. § 3. (dpa in the recognition of a past mistake.) 

116. "A pa is often used, like onr then (or ' then after 
oll^ ' then it seems '), in the after recognition of a mistake. 
In this way it often stands with an imperfect (especially 
in rjv apa, ovfc rjv dpa), to denote that now, from know- 
ing better, one is undeceived with resjoect to an opinion 
hitherto entertained. This use is not. however, con- 
fined to the Imperfect (see the second Example in the 
Exercise). 

UcoXov alG")(yvr) oiov avyy^wpeiv^ aXTf^rj apa rjv (^ii 
was true J then^ after all^) to elvai to dSc/cetv tov aSifcet- 
a^ac ocrcp irep aL<jyiov ToaovTcp KaicLOV {P^-)- 

In this usage, apa (&)? = q^jxan) may be con- 
strued ^ ichy^ hovj — ^fl iralhes co? apa icj^Xvd- 

pov/i€V 6t€ tcl iv T&3 TTapaSelaci) ^rjpla i^rjpco/jLev * opiOLOv 
e/jLOLje So/cel elvat olovirep el tl<^ SeSecrpbeva ^coa ^rjpan] 
(Xen,). 

Exercise 80. 

117. (1) (*^ As to) gambling and bad company, it 
becomes evident, after a time, even to those who were 
deceived (^by these temptations), that, after all, they 
were only pains baited with pleasure, which, when they 
ensnare us, prevent us from (°the performance of) use- 
ful actions. 

(2) Xay, said I, how can I with propriety correct 
you, a man whose character for goodness and virtue is 
established, especially when I am one who is reported 
to be a babbler, and to measure the air; and who, 
which is the most senseless charge of all, am called a 
poor man ? f And yet I ^ should have been put quite 
out of heart by this appellation, if I had not seen a 
great crowd of spectators following a horse belonging 
to the foreigner Xicias, which I met lately, and heard 
some of them talking a great deal about him. And 
what did I do, but go up to the groom, and ask him 



66 



"A pa. 



[118, 119. 



' whether the horse had a large fortune.' But he stared 
at me, as if my question proved that I could not pos- 
sibly be of a sound mind, and said, ^ Why,^ how should 
a horse have 'any fortune?' f Then, indeed,^ I looked 
up again, when I heard that even a poor horse may, 
it seemS; be a good one, if it have naturally a good 
f spirit and temper."^ Do you therefore give me a de- 
tailed account of your employments, being persuaded 
that even I am not disqualified from becoming a good 
man. 



Chap. 5. § 4. el (iav) apa, 

118. The inference implied by apa is sometimes 
weakened down into a probable or merely possible conjec- 
ture ; so that apa = forte ; el apa,^ iav apa = ' if haply 

^ if perchance f si forte {el apa also = num forte) ; el (iav) 
/JLT] apa^ nisi forte (ironically). 

vopbo^erri^ StSdcr/ceL TLfiav to y7]pa<;, ek b iravTe^; 
a<pc^6fjLe^a, iav apa Stayiyvcofjue^a (^schin.). Ho}? 
av ovv TotovTO^ avrjp 8ca(j)^eipot rov^ veov^] el /xr] apa 
7} TTj^ aperris iTTijueXeLa Sia^^opd icTTLV {Xen^, 

Exercise 31. 

119. (1) I am obliged to call as witnesses neither 
my own friends, nor my opponents' enemies, nor per- 
sons who are not acquainted with either them or me, 
but friends of their own. And if perchance they should 
persuade even these to withhold their testimony (as I 
think they will not ; at all events, not all of them), j^t 
this they will never be able (^to accomplish), to do 
away with the truth, and the character which Timar- 



' In reason et apa may, of course, = 



if then. 



119.] 



"A pa. 



67 



chus bears in tlie city; °one wliicli I have not pro- 
cured for him, but he (^has gained it) for himself. For 
the life of a AYell-conducted man should be too pure 
for any charge of criminality to adhere to it.^ 

(2) This law, 0 judges, is a general one for us all ; 
that if a man has no legitimate male children, he may 
dispose of his property (°as he pleases), unless it be 
that, when he makes the disposition, he is either in- 
sane, or his faculties are impaired by old age, or some 
other ("^ infirmity specified) in the law. Kow that Phi- 
loctemon was not affected by any of these infirmities, 
I will prove to you in a few words. 

(3) If then the Thebans should be conquered, as 
they ought to be, the Lacedaemonians will not be too 
powerful, since they will have opponents in these Ar- 
cadians, who dwell upon their borders ; but if the The- 
bans should by chance recover (° their strength), and 
save themselves, yet at least they will be ^all the 
weaker, if these men have been taken into alliance and 
saved by us. So that, upon every view of the case, it 
is expedient that we should not abandon the Arcadi- 
ans, nor let them think, if perchance they should be 
preserved, that their escape is due to their own exer- 
tions or to any ^ nation but ourselves. 

(4) Already, in consequence of the trickery of De- 
mosthenes, you are admitting a shameful abuse into 
(**the practice of) our courts. :j: The prescribed rules 
of procedure^ are confounded and perverted f for it is 
the accuser who defends himself ; the person impeached 
•facts the part of accuser;^ and the jury at one time 
forget the points about which they are sitting as 
judges, and at another are compelled to give their 
votes upon questions that do not belong to their juris- 
diction. And the defendant, if by any chance he 
should touch upon the ^'real question at all, declares, 
not that the decree he proposed was a constitutional 
one, but that some other person who had formerly pro- 
posed a similar decree, had already been acquitted: 



68 



^'Apa, 



[120, 121. 



("a line of defence) on wliich. I am told tliat Ctesiphon 
relies witli the greatest confidence. 

a SaT/ : * so pure as not to admit of (iTridex^o'^aL) the belief of a 
criminal charge {airia iroj/rjpdy ^ ra rrjs irokews St/cata, L e. ' the 

just requii'ements of the state,' or ' the rules which the state has estab- 
Ushed, as being in her opinion just/ <^ * To confound and pervert/ 

fji€Ta(p€p€iv. ^ Say : ' accuses.' 



Chap. 5. § 5. (w? apa,) 

120. (a) 'fl^ apa == how that, that with reference to 
a state of things ^ either then existing or about to be ex- 
plained : (b) the apa sometimes appears to have an 
ironical force ; that forsooth. 

[On ft)? apa when w? = quam^ cf. 116.] 
' Ore apa is less common. 

a) Kal TTpoKa re Srj Kar ohov irvv^dvofiai top Travra 
\6yov ^epdirovTO^, 09 ip^e . . . eve^elpLae to /3pe(^09, ft) 9 
apa MavSdv7](; re €Lrj iral^ . . . fcal KapbjSvaew {Hdt). 

h) ^Akovw Tiva hta^dWeLv , . ijjie, ft) 9 apa e^a- 
irarrjaa^ vfid^ pLeXXco dyeiv el<; ^aaiv {Xen!). 

Exercise 82. 

121. (1) But nevertheless, 0 judges, Demosthenes 
is so ready with his falsehoods and reckless assertions ; 
so indifferent to shame, to conviction, to curses, that 
he will dare, I am told, even to affirm of me, that for- 
sooth I too was formerly condemned by the Council ; 
and that I am now, so he says, guilty of the most in- 
conceivable inconsistency, because, whereas I formerly 
had to defend my own cause against the decision of 
the Council, I now appear as the adviser of the Coun- 
cil, assisting it in the prosecution of this defendant, 
with respect to the **very decision that was **then 
made, — in AYhich he gets up a fictitious transaction^ 



122, 123.] 



69 



one that never really took place at all, and^ has the 
face to assert a falsehood in your presence. 

(2) I, 0 soldiers, offer^ as you see, what sacrifices I 
can, both for your interests and my own^ that I may 
both say, and plan^ and do what will be most for your 
credit and advantage, as well as for mine. And °even 
now I was consulting the gods by sacrifice, whether it 
would be more expedient to introduce this subject, and 
treat with you about it, or to have nothing at all to do 
^ith it. But Silanus the soothsayer, being aware {v) 
that I too, from being constantly present at the sacri- 
fices, ana not ° wholly unacquainted (° with their nature), 
assured me indeed, which is the point of most impor- 
tance, that the victims were favorable ; bu.t informed 
me at the same time), that they indicated some fraud 
and treachery (° about to be practised) against me, — as 
knowing, forsooth, that he was himself treacherously 
intending to accuse me before you. 

* aWa . . . ToKixSov. Tlie kwd is occasioned by the preceding ov 
yey^vf]}ihov. though the construction is different; the two participles 
being in agreement with different words and in different cases. 



Chap. 5. § 6. (aW' apa,) 

122. '^XX* apa, often (Klotz says more often than 
not) with a word or words interposed, exactly corres- 
pond to our ^hut tlien^ in objections, which are often 
(not necessarily) of dJi iinexpected kind, but are always 
founded on a statement previously made as a state of 
things described or assumed, and the like. 

123. The objection is often conveyed in the form 
of a qu.estion, which is founded upon ivhat has occurred^ 
the state of things hefore the speaker^ &c. It often insinu- 
ates an objection, with something of irony. 

Elire jJbOL, ecj^Tj. co ©eoSott], ecm crot ayp6<; ; — Ov/c 
€/jLOLy\ €(j)r}. — ^AXX^ apa OLKia irpoaohov^ e^ovaa] = 
hut then [if not any land, as you say], a house ? (Xe/i.). 

(For apa) {jium?) eee Part 1. 812.) 



70 



''A pa. 



[124. 



Exercise 83. 

124. (1) But absolute monarclis are not much, given 
to attend at public exhibitions. For, as it is not safe 
for them to go, where they would not be superior in 
power to the assembled spectators, so the affairs of their 
kingdoms are not so firmly established, that they can 
intrust them to others and go abroad ; for so they 
would be in danger of being at once deprived of their 
kingdoms, and of the power of avenging themselves 
on those who had injured them. But you may per- 
haps say: ^Well, but then^ spectacles of this kind 
come to them, even when they stay at home.' ' ^^7? 
by Zeus, 0 Simonides, but few out of many (°are thus 
brought to them) ; and these, such as they are, are sold 
so dear to monarchs, that the exhibitors of the most 
trifling spectacle expect, when they leave the presence 
of a king, to carry off more money, than they gain from 
all the rest of the world in their whole lives.' 

(2) ' Do not warlike contests appear to require art?' 
'Most assuredly,' said he. ' Ought we then to bestow 
more care upon the art of making shoes, than upon 
that of making war ?' ' By no means.' ' But then we 
forbade the shoemaker to think of being at the same 
time either a husbandman, or a weaver, or a builder, 
fin order that the work of shoemaking might be well 
done ; and in like manner we assigned to each of the 
other tradesmen one single business, — ^that for which 
each was naturally fitted, and which he would be likely 
to execute well, because he would abstain {p) from all 
other employments, and practise that one all his life 
without neglecting the proper seasons.' 

» * A sudden, unexpected objection ' {Ilartung). But Klotz explains* 
it : ' sed rebus ita comparatis, nempe ut non possint tyranni proficisci ad 
res spectandas, adferuntur illis falia et domi manentibus! 



125—128.] 



'Ardp, 



71 



Chap. 6. § 1. 'Ardp. 

125. a) 'Ardp [= avre dpa] retains the emphatic 
power of apa, and tlins gives additional weight to the 
word or notion introduced by it. Ovh' oUerag XPV 
Xd^€Lv6pj7]* drdp dvTLiTd\oL<^ to fxer opyi]^ dXkd firj 
yvcofij] irpoac^epea^aL okov d/idprrj/ia (Xen,). 

126. h) In Attic Grreek, drdp occurs principally 
when the speaker suddenly hreahs off\h.Q discourse, and 
passes on to something else. 'O /irj iiTLardiievo^ ovre 
aTpaT7]yb<i ovre larpo^ ecrrtv, ovSe idv viro Trdvrcov dv- 
^pdoTTCov alpe^fj, ^Ardp, ecf^rj . . . Xe^ov tj/jLlv^ iro^ev 
Tjp^aro ere iihdaKeLV ttjv aTparrjyiav, 

127. c) Hence drdp is very common in questions, 
when any thing is suddenly opposed to something be- 
fore said. 

OvKovv iifcaico<^ 7]tl^ ov o-rpareverac] 

^Ardp TL Tav^\ a irdvTes Lcr/iev, fiav^dvco ] 

{Ar. Nub. 688.) 

Exercise 34. 

128. (1) It is easier to climb a steep ascent, when 
there is no fighting, than to march upon level ground, 
when the enemy are posted on both sides of us ; and, 
when a man has not to fight, he can see what is before 
him better at night, than he can in the day-time whilst 
he is fighting ; and a rough road is easier to the feet 
of men who are not fighting, than a smooth one to men 
at whose heads an enemy is hurhng {]pass) his missiles. 
Nor does it seem to me impossible to steal (°such a 
march), since we can both choose the night for it, that 
we may not be seen ; and take so -large a circuit, that 
no sound will reach the enemy. I am also of opinion, 
that if we make a false attack f near where we now 
are, we shall find the rest of the mountain the more 
unguarded; for, in consequence of this, they will ^be 
more (''likely to) keep their forces collected here. But 



72 A5. [128. 

how is it that I' am bringing forward this question) 
about stealing ? for I hear that amongst you Lacedae- 
monians, CheirisophuSj fall who are of the highest 
rank^ practise stealing from your very childhood; and 
that it is no disgrace, but a credit, to steal whatever 
the law does not forbid. And, to the end you may 
learn to steal with the greatest dexterity and secrecy 
imaginable, why ^ your very laws order that you should 
be publicly flogged, if you are caught stealing. Now 
then is your time to give proof of your education, and 
to take good care ° that we are not caught stealing some 
of the mountain, for fear we should be well trimmed*^ 
(for our pains). 

(2) That Zeus is a sophist, and that this art is a 
very honorable one. Homer shows in various passages, 
but especially in this (^before us). He says that Minos 
converses with Zeus every ninth year, and goes to be 
instructed^ (p) by Zeus as if he were (^) a sophist. 

(3) 'You do not, I take it, desire the excellence 
by which men become statesmen and qualified to gov- 
ern?' 'I do indeed exceedingly wish for that excel- 
lence.' ' By Zeus, you desire an excellence of the no- 
blest Idnd, and a very great art : for it is the qualifi- 
cation of kings, and is called royal. But have you 
considered whether it is possible for one who is not 
just f to be skilled in these matters?'^ 

■ Say : * as many of you as are of the) SjulSti/jloi :' the term for those 
who in oligarchical and liighly aristocratical constitutions were admissible 
to the highest offices. Our term peers (= pares) had a similar meaning. 

^ The sort of ironical force given by the why and very is to be expressed 
by apa.. ^ koI — ixhroi. These particles, with an intermediate word, 
are emphatic. ^ iroXXas TrXrjyas Aa/Se?;/, with reference to the actual 

flogging at Sparta. ® iraid^vaSfieuos, a partcp. mid. with a passive 

meaning *" ayaJb^hy ravra yevia^ai. 



129—183.] Ad. ■ 73 

Chap. 7. § 1. Av. 

129. a) The original meaning of av is retro, retro- 
versus (back, bacJciuards). as in av ipvco, retro trahere 
(Horn.). 

130. h) Its more usual meaning is, rursus (again), 
and sometimes iterum, not only in the repetition of the 
same thing, but also in the mention of a neio action 
commencing after the completion of one with which it 
is connected as rursits is sometimes used,' Kl^ =jam 
(EUendt). ^ ^ 

TL TTOT av fJLOi TO KaT Tjfiap earai] (Sopli^. ^Errel 
Se rd'^^^LO'Ta Sle/Stj ra opia, ifcel av fcal Trjv ikdcnceTO 
'Xpal^y Kal ktX* (Xen.), 

131. c) A very common meaning is vicissim, ah al- 
tera parte (on the other hand), with reference to the 
similarity, not so much of an action, as of a person or 
thing, 

Tavra fiev Trap ifjLov Xe^ei * roc^ Se irap vfioiv vfjiet^ 

av iTnariWere 6 rt v/jLlv av/jb(f)opov Sokolt] elvau (Xen.)» 

Kal 6 [lev Kara yrjv 7r6\€/io<; ovtco^ eTToXefieiTO • ev S oe 

Ta TTCLvra Tavra eirpaTTeTO, tcl Kara ^dXaTTav av » . . 

^L7)yi]ao/jLai (X^en,), 

So rursum {rurms) : e. g. alidque ratione malevohts, alia amator, 
olid rursus (= again) anxius, olid timidus corrigendus (Cic). KL 

132. d) Hence arises the meaning contra, implying 
opposition between what follows and what precedes ; 
the opposition being not in the particle av, but in the 
notions brought together by av, 

^'flcTTe iraaa /c6vtov/jl6V7] kv/cXo) rj '^V'^rj olcrTpa Kal 
Q^vvaTau • iivrjiirjv 8' av e')(pvaa tov Ka\ov yeyrf^ev 
(PI-)' 

The most common combinations are 5* av and koX av : the4atter fre- 
quently in immediate combination in Plato ; but usually (in Thucyd. and 
Xon. always) with the opposed notion between the patticlea {Kr.). 

Exercise 35. 

133. (1) The whole of this sum he left in the house. 

4 



74 



[133 



He left also seventy minas which were lent to Xuthns 
on a maritime adventure; twenty -four minas in Pa- 
sion's bank, six in that of Pylades, and sixteen in the 
hands of Demomeles, the son of Demon ; besides friendly 
loans, to the amount of a talent, lent to different persons 
in sums of two and three minas. These last-mentioned 
sums amount to more than eight talents and thirty mi- 
nas, which, together with those first mentioned, you 
will find amount to fourteen talents. 

(2) The Medes and Hyrcanians spoke to this effect : 
* And how can we,' said they, ' distribute these things 
without you and your people ?' Cyrus, in return, made 
this answer : ' f Is this then, my friends,' said he, 'your 
opinion,^ that whatever is to be done, we must all of 
us upon every occasion attend? and shall not I be 
thought sufficient by you to transact any thing for you 
that may be necessary, nor you sufficient to transact 
any thing for us ? By what other means can we pos- 
sibly create ourselves more trouble, and do less busi- 
ness than by acting thus? But look,' said he, 'ifwe 
have kept these things for you ; and you have reposed 
a confidence in us that they have been well (**and faith- 
fully) guarded. Do you, on the other hand, distribute 
these things, and we will repose a confidence in you, 
that they have been properly distributed. And, again, 
we on our side will endeavor to accomplish another 
public service.' 

(3) Do not look upon it as a disadvantage, that the 
Barbarians belonging to Cyrus, who before fought on 
your side, have now forsaken you ; for these are even 
worse soldiers, than those we have already overcome. 
At all events, they ran away from us and fled to our 
foes ; and it is far better that those who are the first to 
fly, should be found in the enemy's ranks rather than 
in our own. If, again, any of you are disheartened, 
because we have no horse, in which the enemy abound, 
let them consider that ten thousand horsemen are no 
more than ten thousand men ; for no one was ever 



134, 135.] 



75 



killed in an action by the bite or kick of a korse. It 
is the men who do every thing that is done in battle. 

* Is this then jour opinion ? ^ yap ourus yLyi'doa-Kere, Sti , , » ; 

Exercise 36. 

134. 'If,' said Socrates, 'this path of life, as it 
leads neither through government nor slavery, so also 
did not lead through human society at all, there would 
perhaps be some meaning in what you say. If, how- 
ever, you remain {2^) amongst your fellow-men, and, 
proposing neither to govern nor to be governed, you 
also refuse voluntarily to pay court to those who rule 
(^'in the state), you perceive, I take it, how °well the 
stronger, both in public and private life, understand 
how to make the weaker sit down in tears, and to turn 
them into their slaves. Or do you ° really not observe 
the men, who, whilst others are sowing and planting, 
both reap the corn, and cut down the timber, and be- 
set those who being weaker will not pay them court, 
until they have brought them to choose rather to be- 
come the slaves of the more powerful, than to wage 
° perpetual war against them ? And, again, in private 
life, are you not aware that the bold and strong enslave 
and make a gain of the cowardly and the weak?'- — 
* Nay,' said he, ' but I, that I may escape from treat- 
ment of this kind, do not even f confine myself by any 
trammels of citizenship,^ but am every where a for- 
eigner.' 

* Say : ' do not shut myself up in (= into) any citizenship/ Kara- 
kXcIciv iavrhv ets iroXireLav. 



Chap. 7. § 2. av {irdXiv av). 

135. is also joined in various ways with the 
nearly synonymous particles ttoXlv and av^t^ : e. g. 
iTokiv av (less commonly av ttoXlv) : also avifL<i a5, av- 



76 



[136, 137, 



TToXiVy TToXiv av^t<;, av iraXiv aif^i^^ and even av^L<^ 
av ttoXlv (Pflugk ad Heracl. 488), combining renewal^ 
cpposition^ and return, 

136. d) Si conjunguntur hse tres particulae, videtur av^is earn rem, 
a qua proficiscentes repetitionem statuimus, efferre ; av contra repetition- 
em indicare ; i:d\iv autem, quod ipsum quoque ab loci significatione pro- 
fectum est, id potissimum sibi velle, ut ad earn, in qua jam fuerimus, re- 
rum conditionem revocetur auditor {Kl.). 

h) Contra si conjunguntur particulae irdXiv av (pro quo interdum dici- 
tur etiam av irdXiv) priore particula id potissimum, quod ante fuit, quo- 
que id, quod nunc fit, referendum est, indicatur; posteriore autem parti- 
cula omnino repetitio ejusdem rei aut similis certe significatur {Id). 

(iraKiy a5, Xen. Hell. 5, 1. av^is ad, Dem. Fals. Leg. 346. avbis av 
irdXiv, Soph. (Ed. Col. 1420. av irdXiv ad^is, Aristoph. Nuh. 975). 

Exercise 87. 

137. (1) I wonld tlierefore return to the measures 
I recommended immediately after this. % When I saw 
(cf. 149), 0 Athenians, your navy faUing to decay, 
when I saw the richer citizens purchasing a virtual ex- 
emption from public taxes at the expense of a small 
contribution, and the middle and lower classes losing 
all their property, and still more the state always losing 
the right season of action in consequence of these 
abuses, I proposed a law which compelled the rich to 
do their duty, relieved the poor from oppression, and, 
what was of most consequence, enabled the state to be 
prepared with her armaments and warlike preparations \ 
in time. 

(2) When our unexpected preservation enabled 
him to return again to the city, at first indeed the fel- 
low was timid and dejected, and, rising in the assem- 
bly, half dead (°with fear), desired you to appoint 
him a commissioner for the preservation of the peace. 
But when Philip was dead, and Alexander had suc- 
ceeded to the throne, then once again beginning to . 
practise his impostures, he erected altars to Pausanias, 
he loaded the Senate with the odium of offering sacri- * 
fices of thanksgiving for the good news, affixed upon 
Alexander the nickname of Margites, and dared to as- 



138—142.] 



77 



sert that lie would never stir from Macedonia, but 
would be contented to walk about in Pella, and observe 
the entrails of the victims. 



Chap. 8. ^£^^9. 

138. a) Av^L^ nearly resembles the particle av 
from which it is derived, but has a more definite de- 
monstrative force. 

b) '^5^i9 a particula au ita differre videtur, ut 
magis nos jubeat respicere ad eam rem unde omnis 
repetitionis significatio profecta est' (Klotz). 

139. Like a5, it is used to denote the repetition of 
the same or a similar action ; it points out however the 
connection of the two (the original and repeated action) 
more strongly than that particle. 

140. Hence av^t^ is more common than au, in con- 
nection with other adverbs of time {Trpoa^ev, irpcorov 
&c.). 

ITC09 ovv ovfc ivSi^erac o-axppovTjcravra ir p 6 ev 
av^c<; fir) crcocf^poveLV ] {Xen, Mem, 1, 2, 23.) 

141. AifisL'^ is also used, like our again ^ in the sense 
of ever afterwards^ ever hereafter^ in negative sentences, 
questions^ &c. — fxrjhe vvv firjS' a 5^ 6 9 ttote yevijaecr^at 
(FL) Legg. 4, 711 c. So 6 a^j^c^ xp6z/09 {PI). 

It is doubtful whether the Attic form is properly av^is or avris 
Cf. Ellendt. Lex. Soph. Dindorf. ad Aristoph. Aves. 1326 (Kl.). 

Exercise 38. 

142. (1) To those who alleged this, Clearchus re- 
plied, — ' I consider all these things, as well as the other 
bearings of the case ; but I reflect that, if we now de- 
part, we shall be looked upon as departing f with hos- 
tile intentions/ and as acting contrary to the terms of 
the truce, f And then,^ in the first place, no one will 



78 



AvT Lica, 



[143. 



provide a market for us, nor (° assign us any place) 
where we may supply ourselves with corn ; and, again, 
we shall have nobody to guide us ; and, whilst we are 
employed in these matters, Ariaaus will desert us ; so 
that we shall have no friend left, but rather even 
those who were so before will °then be our enemies. 
And whether there is by chance any other river that 
we can cross I cannot say, f but, at all events,^ we 
know that it is impossible to pass the Euphrates if an 
enemy tries to prevent it. 

(2) When they arrived at a strong place, which had 
neither city nor houses (°upon it), but where ^ great 
numbers of men and women, witn their cattle, were 
assembled, Cheirisophus ordered it to be attacked the 
moment he came before it, and. when the first company 
suffered, another went up, and another ; for the place 
being surrounded by a river, they could not attack it 
on every side with all their forces at once. When 
Xenophon came up with the rear guard, the targeteers 
and heavy-armed men, Cheirisophus said to him, 'You 
come very seasonably, for this place must be taken ; 
for, unless we take it, the army will obtain no pro- 
visions.' ® 

* eVt TToXiixu) == ' on condition of \v"ar : for war/ ^ eireira. 

c — d'ovy. d Say: 'there,' auroVe. Cf. Gramm. 1258, a. 

® Say : ' unless we shall take the place, there are no provisions for 
the army this use of the present to describe the consequence as an 
objective fact actually occurring, gives great spiiit to a narration. Cf. 
Gramm. 1295. 



Chap. 9. Avrl/ca. 

143. AvrUa (from avros : cf. r]VLfca^ rrivUa, &c.) = eo 
ipso tempore^ illico^ statim^ to denote (1) the immediately 
present moment [strengthened in avrUa vvv, ^aX av- 
TiKa in Hom. ; avrUa fiaXa in prose : to avrifca opp. to 
/jiiWov. Th,'] — (2) The immediately commencing future 
{max; opp. vvv), vvv fxev ovv, . , . ttjv evSal/xova ifkaTTO- 



144—146.] 



AvTiKa. 



79 



a€v kt\. . . . avTLfca 8e Trjv evavriav cr/ceylrofJLe^a {PL: 
nunc . . . felicem fingimus . . . mox contrariam conside- 
rabimus). 

144. (3) With participles it is used to denote the immediate coinci- 
device of another action or event with that denoted by the participle. 
Ai6vv(Tov . . . avTLKa y^vofxevov is rhv fJLf]phv iv€ppd\f/aro Zeus, the moment 
he was born {Hdt.). [C£ d/xa yiyvoiJi^voL Xafx^dvoii^v, at the moment of 
our birth. PI. a^a ravr clir^u avecri]. rw Be^i^ KEpa ev^vs aTrofi€^r)K6rt 
iir^K^Lvro, the moment {as soon as ever) it had landed.^ — (4) AvriKa . . . 
Kai are joined (like d/j,a . . . Kai : 1447, b) in the sense of simulac {as soon 
as ... ; or no sooner . . . than: aW* avriKa r) 5i/c7] i^eriricrro Kr\. . . . 
Ka\ dyyeXos -fiA^e fioi {Dem. : simulac . . . nuntius venit, &c.). So in Hdt. 
avriKa re . . . Kai. (I have not found another instance of this construction.) 

145. (5) AvTLfca is used {=for instance) in argu- 
ments, &c., when the first instance that presents itself is 
urged; e. g. vr) top ovpavov, avriKa yap ap^^et Sia tLv 
6 Zeij^ Tcov ^ecbv ; {Aristopli.) So : &a7Tep rov- OlhLirovv 
avTiKa (j^aalv ev^aa^au {== as CEdvpus^ to take the first 
instance that occurs to 7726, &c.). In such passages avrUa 
is sometimes introduced by yap, je roc, St], and the like 

Compare the Latin vel; e. g. cujus sunt innumerabi- 
lia exempla^ yel Appi majoris ilUu^^ qui kc. ( Gic.) 

Exercise 39. 

146. (1) Brasidas had just taken Amphipohs, and 
was within a night of taking Eion ; for if the ships had 
not quickly come to its aid, in the morning it would have 
been in his hands. After this Thucydides arranged 
matters in E'ion, so that it might be safe, both for the 
present time, if Brasidas should attack it, and in future, 
receiving those who had chosen to come there from the 
country according to the terms of the treaty. 

(2) As all other arts when neglected sink in their 
worth ; and, f as in the case of our bodies when in 
good condition, if we abandon them to a course of lazi- 
ness and inactivity, they become unhealthy ; so a dis- 
creet temper of mind, temperance, and the command oi 
our passions and courage, when a man remits the prac- 



80 rdp. [147, 148 

tice of them, from thenceforward turn again into vice. 
"We ought not therefore to be remiss, nor throw our- 
selves immediately on every present pleasure; for I 
think it a great thing to acquire a dominion, and yet a 
greater to preserve it when acquired. For to acquire 
often befalls a man who contributes nothing towards it 
but boldness in the attempt ; but to preserve an acqui- 
sition that one has made, this cannot be done without 
discretion, nor without the command of one's passions, 
nor without much care. 

(3) ' But my opinion is,' said he, ' that a governor 
ought to differ from the governed, not by a life of ease, 
but by care and circumspection^ and by his readiness 
to undergo toil and labor.' 'But, my son,' said he, 
Hhere are some matters wherein you are to contend 
not with men, but with circumstances ;^ and it is no 
easy matter f to come off triumphantly in a contest 
with these.^ For instance, you know that if the army 
have not necessaries, your command is immediately 
dissolved, and falls to pieces.' 

* avra ra irpdyixara. ^ tovtoov evirSptas wepLycvia^ai, 



Chap. 10. Fdp. § 1. {<ydp at the commencement of nar* 

mtiveSj &c.) 

147. rdp (= ye dpa) properly denotes an explanatory 
affirmation; the predominating notion being sometimes 
the explanation^ sometimes the affirmation, 

148. As explanatory it is used especially after de- 
monstratives^ and such sentences as (Tr]fxetov {re/cfiT^pLov, 
fjiapTvptov, S7]\ov) Si [sc. iari] • heLKVVjXL Se, crKeyJraa^e 
Si, and the like. Also not uncommonly after such 
formulae with the superlative^ as : o Se fieycarov {Setvo- 
rarov &C.) : to Se fxiyiaTov. 

After expressions of this kind, we seldom use a conjunction in 
"English. 



149, 150.] rdp. 81 

^A^rjvaloL Trepl ^pTyo-T?}? So^t]^ fioXKov icnrovSa^ov rj 
vrepl j(prjfjLdT(£iv, t e k fir} p lov he* ')(^p7]/iaTa yap ifKeiara 
vTvep (pikoTLfiia^ dvrj\o)(jav {JDera^j. OvSev iTriarevov i/cel- 
VOL' (TTj iMelov he* ov yap av hevp rjtcov ol><^ rjfia^ {Dem^, 
T € K fJbTj p Lov he TovTov* jovi)^ J^R "EpcoTos ovT elcrlv, 
ovre ... kt\, {PI.). ^E/3ovXovto tou? d/xeLvov^ rd d^ta 
^^(eLVi r€K/ji7]pLov he co? ov 7ro\e[xm<^ errpaacrov, ov 
yap r)hifcriaav ovheva {Th.). KecpdXacov rod Ka\S)S 
dXKrfKoL^ 6/jLL\eLV' at ydp fcrrjcret^ do'(f)a\eL<; '^crav (Zso- 
cr.). AvTO TO ivavT icoT arov * avrrf ydp rj elprjvr] 
Tov hrjfjbov Tov ^ A^rjvaCwv vyfrrjXov ypev {And.). To e^o- 
fievov crrparoTrehov ydp eri] heKa KaTe<T')(^ev {Isocr.). 

149. It slioiild also be observed, that when a speak- 
er has stated what he is going to prove, or, generally, 
in the beginning of any narrative for which the hearers 
have been prepared, the statement or narrative is usu- 
ally introduced by ydp. 

Thus Demosthenes, in his famous description of the 
consternation that prevailed at Athens, when the news 
arrived that Philip had occupied Elatea : 

^AWd fjLrjv, TOV TOTe avfji/BdvTa iv Tjj TroXet ^6pv/3ov 
tcTTe fjLev diravTe^^ fiLtcpd S' dKovaaTe ofico^ avTa Td dvay- 
fcacoTaTa, 

^Ecrirepa fjbev yap rjv, rjKe S* dyyeWcov rt? go? tou? 
irpvTavet^ ^EXaTeca fcaTelXijiTTaL (It ivas evening^ &c.). 
De Cor. 284. 

Exercise 40. 

150. (1) When the Persians made a descent upon 
Attica, our forefathers did not wait for their allies, but, 
taking the general war upon themselves' alone, they 
marched to encounter the army that looked down with 
scorn upon the whole of Grreece, with none but their 
own national troops, a few against many myriads, as 
cheerfully as if they were only going to hazard the 
lives of others in the contest ; and the Lacedaemonians 
no sooner received intelliDfence of the invasion of At- 

o 

tica, than tJiey laid aside all other care, and came to 
4* 



82 rdp. [151. 

our assistance witli as mucli haste and zeal as if it had 
been their own country that the enemy were ravaging 
And this is a token of the dispatch and emulation (**of 
both nations) : it is said that our forefathers, on the 
very day that they heard of the descent of the Persians, 
marched to the frontiers, gained a victory over the 
enemy, and raised a trophy ; and that the Lacedaemo- 
nians, marching with their whole army,^ accomplished 
twelve hundred stadia in three days and as many 
nights ! 

(2) I must also, it seems, defend not only myself 
but Lycinus, (^and show) that neither have they any 
grounds for accusing him. I assert then that his posi- 
tion, with respect to the murdered man, was the very 
same as mine ; for there was no quarter from which 
he would have received money, if he murdered him, 
nor was there any danger whatever that he would 
have escaped by his death. And here is a convincing 
proof that he did not desire his destruction : when he 
had the means of bringing him to trial for his life, and 
destroying him by the instrumentality of your own 
laws, if he had felt bound to accomplish his destruction, 
thus both effecting his own purpose and laying the 
state under an obligation to himself, if he had proved 
him guilty, he did not choose to do so ; nay, he did 
not even^ stir in the matter at all. 

Exercise 41. 

151. (1) Their shameless audacity and sordid ava- 
rice will be more clearly perceived by you, when you 
have heard the whole case, which I shall begin to 
relate from that part, whence you will soonest and 
most easily learn the state of our controversy. X Di- 
nias, our father's brother, was our guardian, he being 
our uncle, and we orphans ; at which time, judges, a 
violent enmity subsisted between him and Cleonymus. 



.152.] rdp. 83 

« 

(2) I am sensible^ then, tliat we shall have mucli 
"more trouble, if you return by sea; for in that case 
we' shall be obliged to supply you with ships ; ^ where- 
as, if you go by land, you' will have to fight (^not we). 
Still, however, I must tell what I know ; for I am well 
acquainted both with the country of the Paphlagonians 
and with tb.eir strength. ^ Their country contains both 
many very fair plains, and mountains of a gTcat height. 
And, first of all,^ I know the place where you must, of 
necessity, enter it ; for there is but one pass, and that 
lies between two mountain-peaks, hanging over each 
side of the road, exceeding high. These a very few 
men, posted there, may defend ; and, if the enemy are 
once masters of this pass, all the men in the world 
cannot force their way. These peaks I can even point 
out to any one you think proper to send along with 
me. On the other side of this pass, I know that there 
are plains, and upon them a body of horse, which the 
Barbarians themselves think exceeds all the cavalry 
the king is master of. 

a Say : ' the ships ;' i. e. the ships that yoti will require. 
^ ev^vs ; L e. to begin with the fii'st point. 



Chap. 10. § 2. {ydp anticipative.) 

152. 'Saepe in ratione reddenda invertunt Graeci 
jrdinem sententiarum, causam praemittentes : quo 
genere loquendi s^pissime usus est Herodotus.' (S) 
^ipe St], prjTopLKi)^ 7^P eiricrTrjiJLcov T6')(yT]<; elvat^ rj 
prjTOpLfcr] irepl tl tcov ovtcov Tvy^dvec ovcra ; {PI.) Nvv 
Se, a(f)6Spa yap Kal irepl fieyicTTcov 'yfrevSofievo^; SofceU 
uXrj^r] Xeyetv^ Sea raura ae iycb '^iyco {PL). 

• The following sentence is then often introduced by ovv : 'O Tlp6^€uosy 
^Tvx^ y^P vcrrepos irpoaiihu . . . ^v^vs ovj/ ets fxicov afjL(poT€p(av ayup 
€^ero rh oirXa {Xen.), 



« 



84 



[153, 154. 



Exercise 42. 

153. (1) Whilst Scione was invesxed, Perdiccas sent 
a herald to the Athenian generals, and concluded an 
arrangement with the Athenians, from the hatred he 
entertained against Brasidas, in consequence of the 
retreat from Lyncus. And as Isagoras the Lacedae- 
monian happened to be then on the point of taking an 
army by land to join Brasidas, Perdiccas, partly be- 
cause Nicias advised him, now that he had come to 
terms with the Athenians, to give them some conspicu- 
ons proof of his steady adherence to their cause, and 
partly also because he was himself anxious that the 
Lacedaemonians should never enter his territories 
again, won over to his views his friends in Thessaly 
(for he was always intimate with the principal men), 
and stopped the army and its equipments, so that they 
did not even try the mind of the Thessalians on the 
subject. 

(2) I called Damnippus (''to me), and spoke to him 
thus: 'You are a friend of mine, and I have been 
brought to your house : I have committed no crime, 
but am destroyed for the sake of my money. Do you 
then, seeing me treated in this way, zealously apply 
all your power to effect my preservation.' He prom- 
ised to do so ; but thought it best to mention the mat- 
ter to Theognis, who he believed would do any thing 
whatever, if a man were to offer him money. Now I 
was acquainted with the house, and knew that it had 
two doors ; whilst then he was conversing with The- 
ognis, it occurred to me that it would be my best plan 
to attempt my escape in this way. 



Chap. 10. § 3. {jap in questions?) 

154. 'In omni interrogatione locus est particulse 
yap, quia intelligitur semper nescio vel die mihiy vel 



155, 156.] 



85 



simile quid. Unde et Latini quisnam yel nam qui^ 
diciint' {Hermann). Eeisig and Kriiger make its inter- 
rogative use elliptical, referring to a preceding declara- 
tion, so that oXwXe yap; =o\&)Xez^; ovTco 'yap Xeyec^. 
(See Eeisig En. ad (Ed. Col. 1575.) 

'O veavl(TKo<^ dvayeKaaa^ elirev* oXei yap, ec^?;, S) 
Kvpe^ i/cavov elvau koXXo^ dv^pdoirov dvaytcd^etv rov fir] 
/3ov\6fievov Trpdrretv irapd to jBeKriarov ; (X^en.) 

155. Hartung says, that, if -sve except the case Tvhere the question is 
also a reply, the use of yap in questions carries with it an expression of 
surprise. Though this is not alvmys the case, yet it often is. Such a 
question may be prefaced by why? ichat? in EngUsh. 

Exercise 43. 

156. (1) We remember when yon, vmthing and 
twisting yonr body round the Bema, used to say, as if 
you were engaged in a personal contest with Alexan- 
der, ' I confess that I prevailed on the Lacectemonians 
to revolt, that I brought over the Thessalians and Per- 
rhgebeans.' What! could j'ou' then induce a single 
village to revolt ? Would you go near, I do not say a 
city, but even a single house where there is any dan- 
ger ? But if money is dispensed any where, then indeed 
you will beset it closely, but you will never do any 
action worthy of a man. 

(2) I will also relate an anecdote that was told me 
about him by Hermogenes the son of Hipponicus. He 
said, that after Meletus had broug^ht in his bill of in- 
dictment against Socrates, when he heard him converse 
on any subject rather than the ° approaching trial, 
he told him that he oua^ht to be considerinp; what 
defence he should make ; and that Socrates at first 
replied, ' How ? don't you think that I have spent all 
my life in preparing it?' and that, upon his asking 
him, how? he replied^ that he had never ceased to 
inquire into the nature of justice and injustice; both 
doing what was just, and refraining from what was 



86 



Tap, 



[157, 158. 



unjust, (°a conduct) which, he thought was the best 
method of preparing for his defence. 



Chap. 10. § 4. {Ti jdp ;) 

157. TL ydp ; is used in various ways : 

a) Sometimes (like quid?) it is used as a formula of 
transition to a new question. 

Thus in Xen. Mem. iii. 10, the answer to one qu.es- 
tion being '7tolov/jl€v ydp, e^rj^ ovrco^^ Socrates puts 
a.nother thus : T l ydp] ecf^rj^ to TTL^avcorarov re . . . 
aTTO/jic/jiela^e , . . ; ktX. 

b) Sometimes it has the force of quid enim ? quidni 
enim ? in reply to a preceding question or assertion ; 
it is then a form of assenting^ where we may under- 
stand aXKo {S,) : so that the full force is ^ \_yes\ : for 
lohat [else is it^ if not as you say'] ? ' It may be construed 
by ^why notP ^ certainly^ ^ undouhtedly'' (or, if the as- 
sertion or question was negative)^ ' certainly not^ 

TovTo fjiev dpa Travrl hrjXov^ on ovk ala'^pbv to ypd- 
fpeuv Xoyov^, — T I ydp] (PI.) 

c) Sometimes it introduces a question expressing 
emotion {quid ergo ?) Soph. (Ed. Col. 539. 547 : 

Tyndareus, MeveXae^ irpoacj^^iyyec vlv dvocnov Kdpa ; 
MeneL T i ydp] ^LXos fxob iraTpo^ eaTiv eKyovo^, 

Exercise 4:4:. 

158. (1) ^ Tell me, Critobulus,' said he, 4f we were 
in want of a good friend, by what test should we 
endeavor to try him ? Ought we not first to look out 

. for one who is master of his stomach, and (**has con- 
quered) the love of drinking, gluttony, sleep, and lazi- 
ness ? for he who is the slave of these things will never 
be able to do what he ought either for himself or for 
his friend?' 'No, by Zeus, he will not,' replied he. 



159.] 



87 



' We must then have nothing to do with one who is 
the slave of these propensities?' ^ Certainly not/ said 
he. ' How/ said he, ^ if a man is of expensive habits, 
and so, being nnal3le to s apply his own wants, is 
always requiring some of his neighbor's property, 
and who, when he receives any money, can never 
repay it, and when he is refused, hates him who 
refuses to help him), don't you consider that a man 
of this character is a troublesome friend?' 'Decided- 
ly,' says he. 'Must not we then keep aloof from 
him?' 'Certainly,' he replied, 'we must keep aloof 
from him.' 

(2) ' How, again, if a man, though, able to earn mo- 
ney, yet is greedy of it, and so is a hard man to deal 
with, delighting (v) to receive, but not liking to repay?' 
' In my opinion,' says he, ' this man is even worse than 
the other.' 'How now if a man, from the love of 
making money, has no leisure to do any one thing, 
but consider by what means he may put money into 
his pocket?' 'We must have nothing to do with him 
either, for he would be useless to any one, who tried 
to make a friend of him.' ^ Well then ! what if a man 
is factious, and anxious to raise up many enemies 
against his friends ?' ' By Zeus, we must fly from this 
man also,' he answered. 



Chap. 10. § 5. {ydp in recites.) 

159. In replies, ydp is often used with an apparent 
ellipse of a ^yes^ or ^no^ {yai or ov). 

To ye (jjtXo/Jia^€<; kol (f)c\6ao(j)ov ravrov ; Tavrov 
ydp J 6(^7] (PL). Al fjbrjTepes ra iraihia fir] ifcSeifiarovV' 
Twv, Mr] ydp, e(^r] {PI). 

In all probability, as Klotz observes, there is not 
realli/ a preceding ellipse, but rather a follovjing one ; 
that is to say, ydp has its original power of making an 



88 Fap. [160. 

emphatic affirmation^ from wliicli an obvious inference is 
left to be drawn by the hearer. 

Thus in Aristoph. Plutus, 1148, after Chremylus 
had asked, 

"EireLT airdXiTTOdv tovs ^eou? eV^aSe ixeveis ] 
Mercury replies, — 

To yap Trap* vfxcv icrrl /SeXtlco ttoXv, = sane quidem 
apud vos multo mehus est (ex quo sequitur, ut velit 
manere), Klotz. 

Exercise 45. 

160. (1) Hereupon the Greeks made answer, Clea- 
nor the Orchomenian speaking in the name of the 
rest : ' 0 Ariaeus ! thou most wicked of all men, and 
the rest of you who were friends to Cyrus ! have you 
no regard either to the gods or men ? You who, after 
you have sworn to us to look upon our friends and 
enemies as yoiu: own, now conspire with Tissaphernes, 
the most infamous and deceitful of all men, to betray 
us ; and having both destroyed those persons, to whom 
you gave your oaths, and deceived the rest of us, now 
come with our enemies to invade us?' To this Ari- 
seus answered, ^But it first appeared that Clearchus 
was forming designs against Tissaphernes, Orontas, 
and all the rest of us.' 

(2) 'What injury,' says Cyrus, 'have I done you, 
that you should now, for the third time, be found 
endeavoring to betray me?' Orontas saying that he 
was not provoked to it by any injury, Cyrus continued, 
'You own then you have wronged me?' am 
under a necessity of owning it,' replied Orontas : upon 
which Cyrus asked him again, ' Can you yet be an 
enemy to my brother, and a friend to me?' ' Though 
I should,' says Orontas, '0 Cyrus! you would never 
think me so.' 



161—163.] 



89 



Chap. 10. § 6. {ov jdp av^ &g,) 

161. Such, an omitted liypotlietical clause as we 
represent by otherivise or else (either alone, or after for^ 
since\ is in Greek omitted altogether, after eVel (ovk) 
aVj [ov) yap av, 

Ov (pLkels fjL€j S) ^vyarep, ov yap av ifxe dire- 
KpvTTTov rd ad ird^r]^ non me amas^ mea filia : neqiie 
enim doh7^es me tuos celares — el ydp ec^ikei^ /le, ov/c 
d V dire/cpvTrrov ktX» — Tovrov ivSed icfialvero • /Sia ydp 
av elXov to ')(copLOv {Th,), 

162. Two propositions introduced by ydp are occa- 
sionally found together in the best Greek authors. 

Exercise 46. 

163. (1) If 3^ou make an order, that whoever of you 
happens to be present,^ shall assist the commander in 
chastising those who are guilty of disobedience, it will 
be the most effectual means to frustrate the designs of 
the enemy ; for, from this day, instead of one Clear- 
chus, they will find a thousand, who will suffer no 
man to neglect his duty. But it is now time to make 
an end, for it is probable the enemy will presently 
appear ; and, if you approve of any thing I have said, 
ratify it immediately, that you may put it in execu- 
tion. But if any other person thinks of any thing 
more proper, though a private man, let him propose 
it, for our preservation is a general concern. 

(2) Theramenes afterwards arrived from Lacedae- 
mon ; and when some of the Generals and Taxiarchs 
(amongst whom were Strombichides and Dionysodo- 
rus), with some other citizens, who, as they afterwards 
proved, were your true friends, accosted him, they 
were exceedingly indignant, for he returned with a 

Eeace, the character of which we have learnt to know 
y experience ; for it cost us the lives of many good 



90 



[164. 



citizens, and our own banishment by the Thirty ; and^ 
the terms of it were, not that we should pull down ten 
stadia of the long walls, but entirely raze the whole of 
them ; and, far from obtaining any other advantage, 
should deliver up our ships to the Lacedaemonians, and 
throw down the walls of the Piraeus. 

(3) I was observing, that we have many fair pros- 
pects of safety, In the first place, we are observing 
the oaths which we called upon the gods to witness ; 
whilst our enemies have committed perjury, and vio- 
lated both the treaty and their oaths. Thus we may 
fairly expect that, under these circumstances, the gods, 
who are able quickly to make the mighty men weak, 
and, when they please, to save the weak with ease, 
though surrounded by dangers, will declare against 
them, and combat on our side. Again, that you may 
feel yourselves bound to acquit yourselves like brave 
men, knowing that the brave are preserved by the 
gods even in extreme perils, will call to your recol- 
lection the dangers that your forefathers encountered : 
:{:when the Persians and their allies came with that , 
innumerable host, as if to annihilate Athens, the Athe- 
nians, having the courage to encounter them, gained 
the victory. 

» 6 ael hTvyx6.vit)v. On this force of aet, cf. Gram. 1621. 
^ Say : ' for 



Chap. 11. § 1. TL 

164. a) Te^ {giddem^ eerie) is a restrictive particle 
which, without excluding the notion to which it is 
opposed, gives that to which it is attached a degree of 
emphasis that distinguishes it from all others. 



^ Kiihner says: '76 particula non hahet . . . vim restricfivam, sed 
argumcntativom s. explicativam' (Xeu. Mem. p. 215.) 



165, 166.J 



TL 91 



h) Accordingly as ye distinguishes its notion as being 
less than otliers, or greater than they, it n].ay be con- 
strued by {at least) quidem {certe^ saltern)^ or by even, 
liimsclf {itself)^ etiara^ vel^ adeo, 

c) The force of the ye is often to be given in English 
by a mere elevation of the voice^ adding emphasis to the 
word or notion to which the ye belongs. — It does not 
connect sentences. H, 

^E7rL(f)^ovov \Lav y' eiraivelv eanv {JEur.). Me/jLvr]- 
fxau eycoye. Ka\co<; ye av, rjv 8' eyc6, ttoloop {PI*). 
^/\ou9 eri^eaav rou? ye rrroXe fjuccordrovf; {Eur,), 
Td y' dpKOvv^^ Uavd to 69 ye aaxppoaLV {Eur.), Zrj- 
Tijreov OGTL^ rj/jid^ evi ye rco rpoirw /3e\TL0v<^ iroLrjaeb 

{PI). 

165. With respect to the place of ye, it follows, Kke §77, the notion 
to which it belongs. Yet both these particles may (1) stand between an 
OsTticle or preposition and its noun, or (2) separated from their notions 
by iJiiv or 5e. (1) oL ye aya^oi ' cvv ye (roTs) aya^ols. (2) iau^r] 5e ye 

Exercise 47. 

166. (1) We are all of us aware, that up to a cer- 
tain point' every man is, even against his will, re- 
strained by shame from not doing what is just, and 
openly declares himself against the unjust, especially 
if certain persons are the sufferers ; and we shall find 
that what is corrupting every thing, and is the begin- 
ning (°and root) of all evils, is^the not choosing to do 
what is just f simply and universally.^ 

(2) ' Is not God' essentially good, and must we not 
assert him to be so?' ^ f Without doubt.' ^ ^Moreo- 
ver, nothing' that is good is hurtful, fis it?'^ 'I 
think not.^ 'Does then any thing that is not of a 
hurtful nature °ever hurt?' 'By no means.' 'Does 
that which hurts not, do anv evil?' 'Nor this ei- 
ther. ' And what does no evil, cannot be the cause 
of any evil?' 'fOf course not.^*^ 'Now what is 
good IS beneficial, is it not?' 'Yes.' 'It is there- 



92 



[167 



fore tlie cause of prosperity?' 'Yes.' ^Grood, there- 
fore, is not tlie cause of all' things, but the cause 
of those things only which are in a right state — not 
the cause of those things which are in a wrong state.' 
^Entirely' so,' said he. 'Neither then can God,' said 
I, ' since he is good, be the cau.se of all things, as most 
men afhrm, but only the cause of a few things to men, 
but of many things not the cause ; for our blessings 
are much fewer than our troubles, and no other must 
be assigned as the cause of our blessings ; whereas, of 
our troubles we must seek some other cause, not Grod.' 

(3) ' What ^ is it that must induce men to believe 
what is asserted? Is it not the testimony of wit- 
nesses?' 'I presume' (^it is).' 'And what is it that 
must render their testimony credible ? Is it not the 
rack ? ' ' Assuredly.' ' And what must cause us to 
disbelieve the allegations of my adversaries ? Is it not 
their declining f the test of torture ? ' ^ ' f Yes ; beyond 
a doubt.' ^ ' By what kind of proof then is it possible 
to demonstrate to you more clearly than by this, that 
my mother was the legitimate daughter of Ciron ? ' 

a airXccs, simply for its own sake ; per se : * to do what is just because 
it is just, and from no lower motive.' ^ ri /xtju ; ^ Tj yap ; = 

nonne (ita est) ? ^ ttws yap ; giii enim [sc. esse potest] ? 

« Say: 'whence (irS^^v) must things asserted be believed?' and 
continue the corresponding form: 'is it not from (e/c) testimonies?* 
^ TOVS ix4yxovs. ^ avdyKf] fJceydXT]. 



Chap. 11. § 2. {ye in replies,) 

167. Te is also used in replies and supplementary 
additions that are closely connected with another person's 
speech, to correct or complete it. TIoTepov dSe\(f)o) iirjrph^ 
icTTOv ifc fJitas ; ^ lXottjt l y\ ia/xev S' ov KacnyvqTco, 
yvvat {Eur.y KaireLTa rod yepovro^ rjacnj^r] 
AlSol ye, Kal /jl eprj/jLov oc^x^erai Xlttcov {Eur,\ 

This use is a very frequent one, because it is natu- 



168, 169.] 



93 



ral that in an answer we slionld wish to give promi- 
nence and emphasis to a particular word or notion. 
The answer may be either affirmatwe or negative, 

168. It sometimes happens that a preceding yes or 
no must be mentally supplied. 

^AXka firj K6fcpdy€T6, — Nrj Al\ is tov ovpavov ye 
AnstOjph, Vesp, 401). 

Exercise 48. 

169. (1) ^Let us know then/ says Xenophon, 
' what you have in your power to give to the army, 
the captains, and the generals, if we come ; to the end 
that these may make their report.' He promised to 
every common soldier a cyzicene, two to the captains, 
and four to the generals ; with as much land as they 
desired, besides yokes of oxen, and a walled town near 
the sea. ^If,' says Xenophon, 'I endeavor to effect 
what you desire, but am prevented by the fear that 
may be entertained of the Lacedaemonians, will you 
receive into your country any who shall be desirous 
to come to you ? ' He answered, ^ ^ Yes ; and not only 
that, but (203) I will treat them like brothers, give 
them a place at my table, and make them partakers of 
every thing we shall conquer.' 

(2) To this Hystaspes replied : ' By Hera (Juno), I 
am glad that I put the question to you.' ^How so? ' 
said he. ^Because I too will endeavor to do this. 
There is but one point that I am in the dark about ; 
how I can show that I rejoice at your successes : whe- 
ther I must clap my hands, or laugh, or what I must 
do.' X Artabazus said, ^ You must dance the Persian 
dance.' This caused a good deal of laughing. 

(3) On this occasion,^ Cyrus is said to have asked 
the young man if he would accept of a kingdom in 
exchange for his horse ? and the young man is said to 
have replied thus : ' I would not indeed accept a king- 
dom, but I would give it to lay a brave man under 



94 Tk. [170, 171. 

an obligation to me.' Then Cyrus said: 'Come, I 
will show you where you may throw blindfold, and 
not fail to hit a brave man,' 'By all means, then,' 
said Sacian, taking up a clod, ' show me where, for I 
will assuredly throw this clod ° there.' Then Cyrus 
showed him a place where a great many of his friends 
were ; and the man, shutting his eyes, threw his clod^ 
and hit Pher aulas as he was riding by, — for Pheraulas 
happened to be carrying some orders from Cyrus, — 
and when he was struck he did not even turn back, 
but went on the business that was ordered him. The 
Sacian then, looking up, asked whom he had hit. 
'None, by ZeusT said Cyrus, 'of those that are pres- 
ent.' 'But assuredly,' said the young man, 'it was 
none of those that are absent.' 'Yes, by Zeus!' said 
Cyrus, ^you hit that man who is riding hastily on 
there by the chariots.' ' And how came he not to turn 
back ? ' said he. Then Cyrus said : ' Why, in all 
probability, it is some madman.' 



Chap. 11. § 8. (ye with pronouns ; eire^ ottco^, &c.) 

170. n is frequently attached to pronouns^ and, 
from the emphasis they thus receive, the accent of 
eyo), ifxoL^ e/xe, is moved back to the first syllable (eyo)- 
<ye, efjboiye, e/ieye ; and so crvyey aoiye ; but always ifjiov 
ye, and it would not be easy to find aovye in old MSS. 
Klotzl 

171. With relative pronouns ye adds emphasis to 
the whole relative clause, it being one that confirms or 
completes a preceding statement : o? ye {oaTL<^ ye), quippe 
quij or qui quidem, "Aroira Xeyei<;^ ... 09 ye /ca\eveL<; 
ifjie vecorepop ovra Ka^7]yeLa^at {Xen, ; == qui quidem, 
Jubes). 



172, 173.] 



95 



Exercise 49. 

172. (1) Cyrus, on reading the letter, immediately 
commanded Orontas to be apprehended, and caused 
seven of the most considerable Persians about him to 
assemble in his tent ; and, at the same time, gave or- 
ders to the Greek generals for bringing their heavy- 
armed men, and placing them round his tent mth their 
arms in their hands. This they did, and brought with 
them about three thousand heavy-armed men. He 
also called Clearchus to the council, as being a man 
whom both he and the rest looked upon to be of the 
greatest dignity among the Greeks. 

(2) The Mitylenaeans ought all along to have 
received no more honor from us than all the rest, 
and ®then they would not have come to such a pitch 
of insolence; for, fnot only in this instance but in 
all,^ it is the nature of man to despise f those who 
court him,^ and to respect those who do not stoop to 
him. But let them even now be punished as their 
crime deserves, and do not lay ^ all the guilt upon the 
aristocracy, whilst you acquit the commons ; for they 
all attacked us', seeing that they might now, if they 
had come over to us, have been in possession of 
their city again; but they believed {p) the chance 
they ran with the aristocracy to be the safer, and ° so 
joined them in the revolt. 

a = quippe quem^ (fcc. b koX aAAws. 

' Th ^^pairevov : so rh vire^Kov below. 



Chap. 11. § 4. {yi with pronouns^ continued) 

173. Te is used with the other relative pronouns in 
the same way as with 09, oVt^? (172), ajTid even (though 
very rarely) with the interrogative rt? ; when the prin- 
cipal stress of the question rests on the pronoun. 



96 



[174, 175 



d) ocrov ye XPV^^^^ {Soph, (Ed, Hex, 875). olov ye 
fioc (^aiverai {PI, Rep. 1, 829, A). 

h) TCP OS 7' VTT aXkov] 'from whom else, then, tell 
rmV {Eur, Hec, 774). 

Exercise 50. 

174. (1) I joined, as my accuser asserts, with Pliilip 
in singing paeans, when the walls of the Phocian cities 
were levelled with the ground. And by what proof 
can this charge be satisfactorily established ? was 
invited to his table, together with the other members 
of the embassy; and the invited guests, who dined 
together on that occasion with the embassies from the 
Greek states, were not fewer than two hundred per- 
sons. But, amongst all these persons, I, it seems, made 
myself remarkable by joining in the hymn, instead of 
remaining silent during the performance). — So De- 
mosthenes asserts, though he was neither present him- 
self, nor has called before you any one who was, to 
give his evidence. And to whom then did I make 
myself conspicuous, unless I forsooth acted as the 
leader does in a chorus? If then I was silent, you 
accuse me falsely ; but if, our own country being unin- 
jured, and no public calamity having fallen upon our 
citizens, I did' join the other guests in singing the 
paean, by which the goddess was honored, and no 
slight put upon the Athenians, I acted the part of a 
religious, not of an impious man, and ought to be 
acquitted. 



Chap. 11. § 5. {ye in exclamations.) 

175. Te is very extensively used in appeals^ and 
exclamations of every kind {Ev ye* ^Op^pCy^ ye* Ka- 
Xco? ye* Hdvv ye* X(^o^pci ye* Maka ye, and the 
like, are of constant occurrence) ; for instance, in ex- 
clarnatory commands or loishes: e, g. XvXKd^ere 7' av 



176—178.] 



97 



TOP ! seize Mm^ do ! {Soph, Phil, 1003.) 'H S' etXeV — 
ye fJLTiTTOT c!)(^eXev Xa/Setv — MeveKaov {Eur, Iph, 
Aid, 70). 

176. In this way ye is sometimes found appended 
immediately to tlie name of a deity in an oath that is 
equivalent to a vehement form of assertion. 

OvK av fjbci Ala y' ivrev^ev ^E^rjfceaTLSr]^. 

{Aristoph, Av, 11.) 

(This use has been denied by some critics. Even Person altered 
Aristoph. Eccles. ^48, to get rid of Ma rhv IlocrezSa) y — .) See Klotz, 
Devar. p. 282. 

117. In questions (a) ye is naturally often used to add emphasis 
to a particular notion (e.g. fVa 5e /ult) Bwd/xepos ucpeXrja'aL, iroos "hv ttoX- 
Xovs ye dvur^^elf] ; Xen. Mem. 3, 6, 14); but {h) its use immediately 
after the interrogative word is not common, though instances are found : 
woiov ye tovtov ttXtju y ^Odvacreccs €pe7Sf {Soph. Phil. 489.) 

(See TLs ye above, 173, h.) 

Exercise 51. 

178. (1) 'Don't you know,' said Adeimantus, Hhat 
in the evening there will be a torch-race on horseback 
in honor of the goddess ? ' ' On horseback ? ' said I ; 
' that is something new ! Are they to have torches, 
and hand them on one to another, contending on 
horseback? or how do you mean?' 'Just so,' replied 
Polemarchus. 

(2) For the reason, 0 Athenians, why the law is 
drawn up in these terms, 'that the Senate may not 
ask for the present if it has not built {p) the triremes ' 
is this : that it might not be left to the people to be 
persuaded or deceived at their pleasure. For he who 
drew up ^ the law was of opinion, that he ought not to 
leave this matter in the power of the orators, but that 
the regulation, which was at once just and expedient 
for the interest of the people, should be prescribed by 
law. ' Have you built no triremes ? then don't ask for 
the reward:' now where the law forbids (^the one 
party) to ask, must it not emphatically forbid (''the 
otherl to bestow ? ' 

» See Gr. 1148. 

5 



98 n. [179—181. 



Chap. 11. § 6. {ye vjith other particles. — ye fi'tjv.) 

I^i9. In connection mth other particles, when y4 stands first, it at- 
taches itself in meaning to a preceding word, and the following particle 
retains its usual signification. 

180. * The only difference between ye firjv and the 
simple firjv is, that by the use of fxrjv the preceding 
word is brought prominently forward by a particular 
emphasis. In this case the Eomans always use ve^ro 
alone ^ {Hartung^ vol. ii. 383). 

OvKovv BoKel aoL 6 ^PXV^ ttolcov dv^pco7rov<; eir 
u)(f)€\€La irpoa^elvai avTot<^ 8l &v ala^dvovraL eKaara, 
6(})^aX/iov<; fiev wcr^ opav rd opard, &ra he coar dfcovetv 
rd uKOvard ; oafichv ye fxrjv , el firj pive<^ Trpoaere^rjo-av, 
TL dv rj/iLV o(j)eXo^ rjv ; {Xen, Mem. 1, 45.) 

Ut vero colloqui ciim Orpheo, 3Iusce0y . . . liceat, quanti tan6.em cesti- 
matis ? Cic. Tusc. 1, 41 (Hartung). 

Of course the observation just quoted from Hartung must be under- 
stood with the limitation, that the 76, if preceded by e-n-ei, <fec., will have 
its usual force of adding emphasis to the whole clause which the e-n-ei, 
<fec., introduces (196). 

181. a) The particles ye firjv (= q^ddem certe) have 
also an adversative force (= certe vero ; tamen\ however^ 
nevertheless^ &c. This arises from the strong cLffirmation^ 
which the ye restricts to the statement made, to the 
virtual exclusion of some other supposition, or of all 
other conceivable suppositions. 

Thus : ore he %ct)/5t9 rjfjbev dXkrfKoDV, i/ceivoL 7]fuv 
i')(^pcovTo o)<; eKeivoi^ Tjv TjSiaTov, 7]fuv ye iirjv (i? %^3tXe- 
TTcoTarov {Xen, Cyr. 6, 1, 7). 

h) V\ fjLTju particulis tribuit Devarius vim quandam adversativam^ 
idque rectissume fecit, si earum usum spectamus. Quamquam per se 
neutra particula adversativam vim habet. Te enim particula id agit 
etiam in his locis, ut ea res, ad quam referenda est ipsa, cum restrictione 
efferatur, fx7}u autem rem ita profecto dicit esse. Sed ut saepe in ahis vo- 
cabuhs hoc factum est, sic etiam in particula /j.7]v per adfirmationem nata 
est qusedam oppositionis significatio, ut in hac quidem parte plane re- 
spondeat Latinge particulae vero, quae ipsa quoque ex adfirmativa vi nacta 
est adversativam potestatem. Itaque quum particulse 76 ij.r}i/ primum 
significent ahud nihil nisi : quidem certe, tamen Latine recte verti pos- 



182, 183.] Te. 99 

sunt: certe vera, ut vertit G-. Hermannus ad Vigerum p. 828, ed. tert.. 
usus hoc Euripidis versu de Electra v. ^ 54. 

yijLKpav yap ep-jreL yrjpvs, ifi(pau7]s ye firip, 

quod reddas : E longinquo enim accidit vox, clara quidem oerte, aut 
etiam, ut fecit Hermannus : at vero clara. Quamquam in particulis at 
vero adversativa vis magis exstare videtur quam in Grsecis particulis ; 
yh fiiiv {Klotz). 

182. The particular or clause introduced by ye firju is often the last 
of a series, and one the truth of which is uiideniahle, whatever may be 
thought of the preceding statements. Here the Romans use jam vero^ 
as well as vero only : in English we may introduce the particular by 

*and as to .' Thus, in the first example (180), oa-ficcu ye fx^u . . . , 

we may translate it : ' and as to srtiells, of what advantage would they 
have been to ils, if no noses had been given to us ^ ' 

Exercise 52. 

183. (1) Upon that occasion, you heard, on one side, 
Aristarchns ordering you to go to the Chersonesus, 
and, on the other, Seuthes proposing terms to engage 
you in his service, when all of you declared you would 
go with Seuthes, and all gave your votes for it. Say, 
then; if I committed any crime in carrying you whither 
you all resolved to go. If, however, when Seuthes 
began to break his promise concerning your pay, I 
then commended him, you would certainly have rea- 
son both to accuse and hate me; but if I, who was 
before his greatest friend, am now his greatest enemy, 
how can you any longer with justice blame me, who 
have given you the preference to Seuthes, for those 
very things about which I quarrel with him ? 

(2) His first expedition was against the Pisidians 
and Mysians, which he commanded in person; and 
those whom he observed forward to expose themselves, 
he appointed governors over the conquered countries, 
and distinguished them by other presents ; so that 
brave men were looked upon as most fortunate, and 
cowards as deserving to be their slaves ; for which 
reason, great numbers presented themselves to danger, 
where they expected Cyrus would take notice of them. 
And as for justice,^ if he observed any man anxious to 



100 



[184, 185. 



get a high, character for that ® virtue, his chief care 
was, that such a one should enjoy a greater affluence, 
tha.n those who aimed at raising their fortunes by un 
just means. 



Chap. 11. § 7. (ye 

184. d) Te fievToc, certainly however; hoiuever (the 
preceding word being rendered emphatic) is closely 
connected in meaning with ye firjv, 

Particulae 7e ^evroi continent adfirmativam quandam restrictionem 
non sine majore quadam oppositione, quasi Latine dicas certe tamen^ ta- 
men vero (Klotz). 

b) The particles ye fxevroi are also used, like ye i.ii]v (180, 182), in 
transitions to a final and tmdeniahle assertion ; e. g. oSo't' iv Kvpov 
OLpxy eyevero kolL "EWtjvl koI fiap^dpo) jJLTfdev adiKovpTL adeu>s Tropevecr^aL 
OTTOL Tis ^^eXev, exovri '6, ri irpox^poirj. Tovs ye ixevroi aya^ovs els 
TToXefjiov Qt)iJLo\6yr]To ^ia(pep6vT(jos Tifxav [An. 1, 9). 

Exercise 53. 

185. Then Artabazu^s, he who had said heretofore 
that he was his relation, rose up after him and spoke : 
^You have done very well, Cyrus,' said he, 'in be- 
ginning this discourse ; for while you were yet very 
young, I set out with a desire to be your friend ; but, 
observing that you were not at all in want of me, I 
was afraid to approach you. But when you afterwards 
requested even me to exert myself in diligently deliv- 
ering Cyaxares' orders to the Medes, I thought to 
myself, that if I assisted you in this patter with zeal, 
I should become your intimate friend, and have the 
privilege of conversing with you as long as I pleased. 
Well, this commission was so effectually done, that I 
had your commendation. After this the Hyrcanians 
first became our friends, and this while we were in 
great distress for allies ; so that, in our transport, we 



186, 187.) 



10] 



aVnost carried ttem about witli us in our arms. Af- 
ter this, wtien the enemy's camp was taken, you had 
not, I believe, any leisure for me, and I excused you : 
after this Grobryas became our friend, and I was re- 
joiced at it: then Gadatas too, and it was now become 
a difficult matter to get any share in you. When, 
however, the Sacians and Cadusians became your 
allies and friends, it was probably very fit for you to 
cultivate them and pay them attentions, for they did 
so to you. But when we came back again to the place 
from whence we set out, then seeing you taken up with 
your horses, your chariots, and your engines, I thought 
that, when you were at leisure from all this, then you 
would have leisure for me : when, however, the terri- 
ble news arrived, that all mankind were assembling 
against us, I felt that this was indeed a most important 
crisis : but, if things succeeded well here, I thought 
myself sure that you and I should then plentifully 
enjoy each other's company and converse. 



Chap. 11. § 8. (ye St], jk Stjttov.) 

186. Fe Srj. — Here the particle Stj simply adds a 
strong asseveration to the word or clause restricted (and 
so emphasized) by ye. 

TL ovv ; Tov "Epcora ovk ^A(ppoSLT7]'^ fcal ^eov riva 
^y€l] — Aeyerat ye S?;, dicitur quidem certe (Kl), 

ISl. Hermannus (Vig. p. 828, ed. tert.) recte ait, interesse hoc inter yh 
S97 et y4 roi, quod S77 sententiam per ye restrictam simpHciter confirmet, 
Toi autem earn sententiam indicet oppositam esse prsecedentibus quodam 
modo. — '^\mc hoc teneamus ye restringere aliquam rem, 877 autem earn 
quasi planmn at que apertam, de qua jam dubitari nullo modo possit, 
ponere. Latine dicas quidem aperte, quidem. profccto, quidem certe, 
quamquam hoc etiam pro ye tol aho quodam modo accipi potest. Dif- 
fert enim aliquid, qua mente dicas quidem certe. Sed ye d-q, ut indicavi- 
mus, est simplex illud quidem certe, sine ulla oppositionis signiiicatione 

j (KL). — The two particles are joined together in the Latin qui-dem 

I (Hartung), 



102 



[188—190 



188. These particles occur most frequently, whm 
the emphasis and asseveration belong especially to a 
single word. 

^AeL ye Stj vr]\r)<^ av kclI ^pdorov<; TrXeco?, alioays^ 
always art thou pitiless, &c. {JEsch, Prom, 42.) 

189. Te hr}7Tov has nearly the same force as je hrj ; 
it does not, however, directly assert the truth of the 
statement, but assumes it with the kind of appeal to 
the person addressed that belongs to hrjirov (= opinor). 
A word or words may be inserted between ye and 

^Eirel ifcelvo ye SrjTrov, & ^avfidaie, ovhel^ ovre 
^eci)v ovre dv^pcoTrcov roX/jia \eyetv, ft)9 ov to) ye dSc- 
KovvTi horeov SUrjv {PL Euthyphr, 8, e). 



Exercise 54. 

190. (1) But with regard to your trouble in the 
war, lest you should fear that it may prove great, and 
we may still be none the more successful, let those 
arguments suf&ce you, with which on many other 
occasions I have proved the error of your suspicions 
respecting it. At the same time, I will also lay before 
you the following advantage, which yourselves do not 
appear ever yet to have thought of as belonging to you, 
respecting the greatness of your empire, and which I 
never urged in my former speeches ; nor would I even 
now, as it has rather too boastful an air, if I did not 
see you unreasonably cast down. You think then that 
you only bear rule over your own subject allies ; but I 
declare to you, that of the two parts of the world open 
for man's use, the land and the sea, of the whole of the 
one you are most absolute masters, both as far as you 
avail yourselves of it now, and if you should wish to 
do so still further ; and there is no power, neither the 
king nor any nation besides at the present day, that 
can prevent your sailing [where you please] with your 
present naval resources. 



191.] 



103 



(2) About the same part of tlie summer, wlien 
Brasidas, being on his march with one thousand seven 
hundred, heavy-armed, to the Thrace-ward countries, 
had come to Heraclea in Trachinia ; and when, on his 
sending before him a messenger to his partisans in 
Pharsalus, and requesting them to conduct himself and 
his army through the country, there came to Mehtia, 
in Achaia, Panaerus, Dorus, Hippolochidas, Torylaus, 
and Strophacus, who was proxenus to the Chalcidians ; 
upon that he proceeded on his march, being conducted 
both by other Thessahans, and especially by Niconidas 
of Larissa, who was a friend of Perdiccas. For, on 
other grounds, it was not easy to pass through Thes- 
saly without an escort, and with an armed force, espe- 
cially to pass through a neighbor's country without 
having obtained his consent, was regarded with suspi- 
cion by all the Greeks alike. 



Chap. 11. § 9. {ye tol, yi TOL S?7.) 

191. The particles ye tol {—quidem eerie; eerie ia- 
men) carry with them the notion, that the assertion 
made is opposed to what preceded. Te drj simply affirm ; 
but ye TOL also imply, that the assertion made is the 
leasi that can be insisted on. Whatever else may be 
true or false, this ai leasi^ this ai all evenis^ cannot be 
denied. (See above on ye hrj^ 186, 187.) 

KXeTTTOv TO ')(^prjiia TavSpo^* ou koX aol So/cet, 
ooXeKTpvcov ] VT] Tov Al\ eTTLfjbveL ye tol, 

{Arisioph, Vesp. 933.) 

(quod rectissime Hermannus ita vertit : udnuii quidem 
certe^ ut hoc hanc fere in se contineret ratiocinationem : 
ttsi non respondei^ iia sibi quoqiie videri^ eerie iamen ad- 
nuii.) Kl, 



104 n. [192—194 

/BXeirec ye rot fiaviKov tl koX rpaycpSiKov : 

fortasse Erinys est ex tragoedia : tuetiir quidem eerie insa- 
num quiddam et tragicum^ (^l-)* — Quidqidd illud est^ lioc 
manifesto saltern verum estj in vultu aliquid inesse furicdc 
et tragicum (Hoogeyeen). 

192. Sometimes hr) is added to strengtlien the par- 
ticles ye TOL : after they have excluded the notion of all 
opposition, hr} adds a positive assertion. 

Keivov je roc orj irais eKKrjL^e^ • rj o eaco 
KaXKiar av eXiroi ar] yvvr\ raS' co? eyei. 

{Soph. (Ed. R. V. 1164.) 

193. The particles ye roc often occur in oppositions 
after — aXXd. Thus: el Se Trdat tovtol^ i^TTcofie^a, 
dWa TO ye tol irvp rov Kapirov Kpelrrov eartv {J^en, 
An. 2, 5, 19 : ^rrco^eS-a, not necessary. Kr!). 

Exercise 55. 

194. (1) 'Well, then/ said Simonides, 4f you are 
in a worse condition, with regard to the objects of 
sight, yet, at all events, you have greatly the advan- 
tage from the sense of hearing ; since you are never 
without an abundant supply of that most delightful of 
all sounds, the hearing of your own praises. For all 
those who approach you applaud every thing you say, 
and every thing you do. And, on thq other hand, 
you are never exposed to what is most painful, the 
hearing yourself censured or reproaclied ; for no one 
ventures to rebuke a king to his face.' 

(2) 'May we not then properly call this man's 
intellectual power, so far as he really knows, know- 
ledge ; but that of the other, opinion ? ' ' Certainly.' 

* Si dixisset poeta : 

BAeTre: ye ^t] fxaviKov tl koX rpaywdiKou, 

ista oppositionis vis nulla esset, et hoc tantum modo significaretur, quod 
per sese satis planum atque apertum esset (KL). 



195—197.] 



105 



^ But now, if the person wlio we say only opines things, 
and does not know tliem, becomes indignant, and 
raises a dispute, alleging that our position is not true, 
shall we have any method of soothing and gently per- 
suading him, and yet at the same time concealing that 
he is not in a sound state V 'At all events, we un- 
doubtedly ought (°to have some such way),' replied he. 



Chap. 11. § 10. {eirei ye. et ye.) 

195. AYith relative^ temporal, and conditional parti- 
cles, ye introduces a thought that confirms or completes 
a preceding one ; e. g. by adding the necessary liraitci- 
tion or restriction. 

Si quando particula ye adjuncta est ad particulas relativas, quales 
sunt oTTou, eTTti, 6?, eai/, ^v, ^v, iirEiddy, ore, oTrore, irpiv. 7r\7]u, etc, eodem 
modo explicanda res est, uti in pronominibus relativis. Spectat enim ista 
vis, qu£e est in particula ye, ad omnem condicionem, quas efficitur per 
istas particulas, ut etiam in his locis Latine commode reddi possit per 
particulam quickm (KL). 

196. El ye (= si quidem, if at least^ if that is (el . . . 
ye when the ye distinguishes the interposed word, et ye 
when its influence extends to the icliole clause) ; eirei ye 
{(paando quidem^ quoniarn quidera) ; to which the remark 
just made also applies, as also to other combinations. 

OvSeL<^y ec ye av cikiff^r} Xiyec^) nemo, si quidem tu 
vera narras), nobody^ if that is (or, if at least) ichat you 
say is true. 

197. When a condition is introduced by et ye, it is 
not necessarily miplied that the condition really exists ; 
it may he even an improbable or impossible one, since 
all that is asserted is, that 2/ that condition really exists, 
then assuredly the consequence is also true. 

jEvre/, e'i ye vrpo? (piXov^ iarl (bvXaKT). iracrav ocSa 
i^fia^ (f)vXa^afjLivov^^ co? /jlt] 7rapacr)(^eLV tovtw Trpocpacrcv 
ocKaiav /X7] aTroScSovaL tj/jllv a vireayero ktX. Sen. An. 

5 At 



106 n. [198. 

7, 6, 22 {=7iam si qua est ah amicis cautio, omnem novi 
a nobis seduh adhihitam esse^ ne liinc &c. [intellige : sed 
non est ulla ah amicis cavendi ratio^ ut opinari vide- 
mini], Kr. 

Exercise 56. . 

198. (1) On what reasonable argument, then, could 
we ourselves shrink from it ; or on what plea addressed 
to our allies there could we refuse to succor them? 
For, since we have entered into league with them, we 
ought to assist them, and not to object, that they too 
have not assisted us. For we united them with us, not 
that they might come here to help us in their turn, but 
that, by annoying our enemies there, they might pre- 
vent their coming here to attack us. And it is in this 
way that empire has been won, both by us and by all 
others who have enjoyed it ; I mean, by readily taking 
part with those barbarians or Greeks who from time 
to time called them to their aid ; since, if all should 
remain quiet, or^ nicely choose whom they ought to 
assist ; we should make but slight additions to it, but 
should rather run a risk of losing even what it now is. 

(2) Philip, king of the Macedonians, to the senate 
and people of Athens^ health ! — I have received three 
of your citizens in quality of ambassadors, who have 
conferred with me about the dismission of the ships 
commanded by Leodamas. I cannot but consider it 
as an extraordinary instance of weakness, if you ima- 
gine I can possibly believe, that these ships were des- 
tined to import corn from the Hellespont for Lemnos ; 
and that they were not really sent to the relief of the 
Selymbrians, now besieged by me, and who are by no 
means included in the treaty of pacification, by which 
we stand mutually engaged. 

(3) Fellow-soldiers ! it is certain that the relations 
between us and Cyrus have undergone a corresponding 
change on both sides ; for neither are we any longer 
his soldiers, since we refase to follow him, neither does 



199—201.1 Te. 107 

lie any longer give ns pay. I know he thinks himself 
unjustly treated by ns ; so that, when he sends for me, 
I refuse to go to him, chiefly through shame, because 
I am conscious to myself of having deceived him in 
every thing ; in the next place, through fear, lest he 
should cause me to be apprehended and punished for 
the wrongs he thinks I have done him. I am therefore 
of opinion that this is no time for us to sleep, or to 
neglect the care of ourselves, but to consult what is to 
be done. If we stay, we are to consider by what 
means we may stay with the greatest security ; and if 
we resolve to go away, how we may go with the 
greatest safety, and supply ourselves with provisions ; 
for without these, neither a commander or a private 
man can be of any use. 

^ Or, ' make distinctions of race in choosing,' &c. ; according to the 
reading <pvXoKpivoUi/, which Poppo, Goller, and Bloomfield adopt {Dale). 



Chap. 11. § 11. {Si ye.) 

199. a) When Si ye occur together, the Si is merely 
placed there as requiring another vv' ord to rest upon : 
the ji still belongs to that 2yf^eceding word, with the ob- 
vious exception, that if that word is the article, the yi 
belongs to the following substantive. 

200. b) These particles are sometimes employed 
(like Kai—yij 203) to add emphasis to the last member 
of a series in enumerations, 

Kal 01 crvv avr^ Se airi^vrjaKOVy 6 fiev nrpo^oXkofie- 
v6<; TLy 6 Se (pevycov^ 6 Si ye /cal afivvoiievo^ orco iSvvaro 
{Xen, Cyr. 7, 5, 30.) 

201. c) So in other instances, when a statement is 
to be strongly af&rmed, with opposition {Kl.)] hence 
sometimes = (6^^^) on the contrary^ {but) on the other hand, 

^Efjbol fjiev ovv SoKel fcrX. — ^E/jloI Se ye, ecprj 6 KXed- 
vcop SoKel /ct\» {Xen, An, 4, 5, 8.) 



108 n. [202. 

Exercise 57. 

202. (1) Upon this Xenoplion said, ^Of this'* we 
are all aware, that the king and Tissaphernes have 
caused as many of ns as they could to be apprehended ; 
and it is plain they design, by the same treacherous 
means, if they can, to destroy the rest. We' therefore 
ought, in my opinion, to leave nothing undone, that 
^v^e may not fall under their power, but rather, if pos- 
sible, subject them to ours. 

(2) I hear there are Ehodians in our army, the 
greatest part of whom, they say, understand the use of 
the sling, and that their slings carry twice as far as 
those of the Persians, who, from throwing large stones, 
cannot injure their enemy at a great distance ; whereas 
the Ehodians', besides stones, make use of leaden balls. 
If, therefore, we inquire who have slings, and pay 
them for them, and also give money to those who are 
willing to make others, granting at the same time 
some other immunity to those who voluntarily enlist 
among the slingers, possibly some will offer them- 
selves^ who may do us good service. 

(3) In little cities, the same people make both the 
frame of a couch, a door, a plough, and a table ; and 
frequently the same person is a builder too, and very 
well satisfied he is if he meet with customers enough 
to maintain him. It is impossible therefore for a man 
that makes a great many different things to do them 
all well. But in great cities, because there are multi- 
tudes that want every particular thing, one art alone 
is sufficient for the maintenance of every one ; and fre- 
quently not an entire one neither, but one man makes 
shoes for men, another for women. Sometimes it 
happens that one gets a maintenance by sewing shoes 
together, another by cutting them out ; one by cutting 
out clothes only, and another, without doing any of 
these things, is maintained by fitting together the 
pieces so cut out. He therefore that deals in a busi- 



203—206.] 



109 



ness, ttat lies witliin a little compass, must of necessity 
do it the best. 



Chap. 11. § 12. {jcaX—yL) 

203. KaX — ye{=etcerte; etiam certe ; et adeo. Kr.) 
are used, as Devarius expresses it, to superadd a notion 
to what preceded ; i. e. the notions are connected by 
the copulative KaL^ and the ye adds emphasis to its own 
notion ; implying that, whatever may be said of the 
rest, this at least is certain. Hence koI — ye are some- 
times virtually equivalent to non mod.o — verum etiam. 

^AW, Nr] Tov ^Ep/JL7]V TOP ayopaiov^ Kairiopfco} ye /3Xe- 
TTovTcov, {A/ristop)li. Equit. 296.) 

204. The particles koI — -yk often occur (like Se ye, 
200) in connection with the last member of an enume?- 
ation ; sometimes before one, which, though not the 
last, is to have the hearer's attention particularly called 
to it. 

''Erepai 8e y elcrl tcop re-^vchv — , olov api^jxr^TLKri koI 
XoytaTLKr) k al Trerrevrtfcr] ye /cat aXKau iroXXal re^^yac 
ktX, {Plat. Phced. 58.) 

205. These particles also frequently occur in an- 
swers or other replies which add more than what was 
contained in the question, or other address. Keopt, 
Xcopol^ av etaco, Phil. Kal ae y' elcrd^co {Soph. Phil. 
670). 

Exercise 58. 

206. (1) I indeed am of opinion that all men ought 
to feel grateful to those from whom they receive kind- 
ness. But you, before I did you any service, gave me 
a favorable reception by your looks, your v/ords, and 



110 



[207. 



your presents; and were never satisfied with promising 
wliat you would do for me. But now, that you have 
accomplished what you desired, and are become as 
considerable as I could make you, you have the heart 
to allow me to be thus disgraced amongst the soldiers. 
But I am confident, time will inform you that you 
ought to pay them what you promised, and also that 
fyour own feeling^ will not endure to behold those 
who volunteered their services to you, now loading 
you with reproaches. I have, therefore, only this fa- 
vor to ask of you, that when you pay it, you will study 
to leave me in the same credit with the army, in which 
you found me. 

(2) ' Does a man who practises gymnastic exercises, 
and applies himself diligently to them, pay attention 
to the praise and censure and opinion of every one, or 
of that one man only who happens to be a physician, or 
teacher of the exercises ? ' ^ Of that one only.' ' He 
ought therefore to fear the censures, and covet the 
praises of that one, and not^ those of the multitude.' 
' Clearly.' * He ought therefore so to practise and ex- 
ercise himself, aye, and so to eat and drink, as seems 
fitting to the one who presides and knows, rather than 
to all others together.' 

^ Koi aMu y4 ce. Supra. 



Chap. 12. § 1. Je (jM^v—Se). 

207. a) The particle Se distinguishes its notion from 
a 'preceding one, but without excluding that notion, or 
contradicting it as a direct opposition. 

V) The other; or conceded^ notion, is usually ex- 
pressed by the particle ixkv. 

c) Particulse i^iv — cum aliqua diversitatis notione copulant (Butt- 
mann). 

d) MeV is weakened from p.i]v^ vero, and probably di from d-fi; 



208—211.] J 6. ill 

though Hartung refers ^ueV to juety = efs (/xta. eV), so that /xeV is its neu- 
ter ; and 5e to 5ts = dvo, so that they would mean firstly — secondly. 

208. In the connection of sentences, Se is used ad- 
verbially, as a particle of transition^ to introduce an?/ 
continuation of a discourse, tliat does not require some 
other more definite adverb (as the conclusive ovv, there- 
fore ; the causal yap, for, &c.). Here we generally either 
use and, or continue the discourse without a particle 
{Madvig). 

This and the common connection of disjunctive clauses by /jl^j/ — 5e 
are so common, that Ave shall give no separate examples of thesd usages ; 
but in the following Exercises on this chapter, we shall print in italics 
* and,' and other EugUsh particles when they are to be translated by Se. 

On the position of [lev — Se. 

209. a) The fxev — Se are commonly placed after the 
words which are opposed to each other ; yet they are 
often to be referred to the predicate or to the whole 
clause. jKal eXeye fjuev Sco/cpdrr]^ co? to ttoXv, to?? Se 
/3ov\o/jL€vot<; i^v aKovetv (^en.). ""ETTo^e fjuev ovSep, 
TToWa Be Ka/ca ivo/jLicre Trotrjaai, (J^en,), 

210. b) When a substantive or adjective is con- 
nected .with the article or a preposition, /lev and Se are 
very often placed between the article and the preposi- 
tion, and between the preposition and substantive or 
adjective, e.g. vrpo? fjbev rov^ ^tXou?— tt/^o? 8' e^^^pou?: 
but uniformity in this respect is by no means always 
observed. Ta fxev dv^pcoireta irapevjes, rd Sac/jiovLa 
8 6 (TicoiTOVVTe^ riyovvTai rd irpoar}KOVTa irpdrreiv (^en.). 
OvSe rrjv irapovaav elprjvrjVy ovhe ttjv avrovofxLav rrju iv 
ral^ TroXLTetat^ fjuev ovtc ivovaav iv he Tal<^ (TVv^rjKaL<^ 
dvayeypafjLiJLevriv d^LOV eXia^at fiaXXov rj rrjv dp'^rjp rrju 
rjixerepav (Isocr.), 

211. Mev — 8e in anaphora.^ — Anaphora the em- 
phatic repetition of the same word in two consecutive 
clauses. (It may still be considered an anaphora when, 
instead of the same word, an equivalent one is emphat- 



112 



[212. 



ically used.) In the case of anaphora^ the repeated 
word generally has fxev the first time it occurs, he the 
second. Here we should use ^anclf and very often 
without anaphora. 

TOL^ dya^0L<^, I keep company with the gods and with good 
men (^Xen,), 

Exercise 59. 

212. (1) Do you imagine that the dangers which 
then filled the city with alarm, were of a trifling and 
ordinary character? — (**with alarm), in the midst of 
which this Leocrates ran away from the city himself, 
carried with him what money he had, sent for the 
household gods of his fathers, and advanced so far in 
this betrayal of his country, that, as far as his will was 
concerned, the temples were deserted, the watch-posts 
on our walls deserted ; our city and our country aban- 
doned. And yet at that time, gentlemen, who would 
not have pitied the city; not merely what citizen 
would not), bu.t even what foreigner who had ever 
in former days resided (° at Athens) ? — and who was 
such a hater of the people, such a hater of Athens,* 
that he could bear to see himself without a post as- 
signed him, when the defeat and the calamity that had 
befallen the people^ was announced ; and the city was 
in a state of universal excitement at the news, andj ° all 
the hopes of safety for the people were placed in those 
who were above their fiftieth vear ? 

(2) As therefore I am of opinion that such misun- 
derstandings will be most easily removed by confer- 
ences, I am come with an intention of convincing you 
that you have no reason to distrust us ; for to mention 
the first point, which is of the greatest moment, our 
oaths, to which we have called the gods to witness, 
forbid us to be enemies ; and whoever is conscious to 
himself of having neglected these, that man I shall 
never consider a happy one. For, in the war that is 



213, 214.] 



113 



waged against the* gods, I know no swiftness so great 
tliat it conld enable Mm to escape; no darkness so 
thick that he could fly to it (°for concealment); f no 
place so strong that he conld retire to it^ (^for defence) : 
for all things, in all places, are subject to the gods, and 
every where they are equally lords of all. ISTow,"^ this 
is my opinion concerning both our oaths, and the gods, 
whom, by our agreement, we have made the deposita- 
ries of our friendship. But, as to human advantages, 
1 look upon you to be the greatest we can. promise 
ourselves at this juncture ; for while we are with you, 
every road is pervious, every river passable, and we 
are sure to know no want ; but without you, our whole 
° homeward journey becomes obscure (for we are ut- 
terly unacquainted with it), every river impassable, 
every multitude terrible, and solitude the most terrible 
of all ; for that is attended with the want of every thing. 

^ fXLaoBrifxos. /j.Lca^rjpaios. ^ 5f)/xos • people, as opposed to the 

aristocratical or oligarchical party. ov^^ ottoos au eis ex^p^v x^^' 

pLQV a-KOdTairi, = oure [oiSa] els oiroos ^x^p^i^ xcopio;/ (Ut. axl qiiomodo 
munitum locum) diroa-raLrj. Cf. Kriiger, who compares for the owcos — 
cos: bdouras e^i^iqve — TrcDs Uv e'LiroL/jLL (Tol gttccs /ney AevKovs, ottcos 5e 
(TvfjLfxerpovs; (Luc.) The ort^r is regular, as in ori iy /Bpaxurar^;, etc. 

^ IJ,€U 5i7, which co7iclude a subject, and prepare for a transition 
(with Be). 



Chap. 12. § 2. {ixev—piev—Se—Sl) 

213. When there is a dovhle opijosition^ expressed 
in two relative clauses, each with its accompanying 
demonstrative clause (o'l — ovtol* orrov — ivrav^a, &c.), 
fjiiv and 8e are often, either both or oiie of them, douhled ; 
the jiev being used with the first relative and its de- 
monstrative, the he with the second pair. 

214. This parallelism is, however, but seldom found 
so regularly carried out as in the following example : 

Eycb ovv Secva av eirjv €Lpya(T/jievo<;, & avhpes ^A^rj* 
valoc, €/', ore jjuev fxe oi ap^ovre^ erarrov, o&? u/^ei? 



m Ak. [215,216, 

elXeor^e ap')(€iv fiov, koX ev TIoTthald koI ev ^A/uLcj)L7r6\eL 
Kol eiri Ari\i(p, rore /xev ov iicelvoL erarrov efievov— 
fcal €/av8vp€vop aTro^avelv, tov Se ^eoO TdTTOVTO<;, 
iyo) (pif^7]v re ical vTriXa/SoVj ^L\oao(j)ovvTd fie Selv tfjv 
KOL i^erd^ovra i/Jbavrbv ical rov^ dWov<^, ivrav"^ a Se 
(j)o^7]^€l<; rj ^dvarov rj dXko otlovv Trpdyiia \Litoiiil rrjv 
rd^bv {PI), 

Upcorayopas Xiyei, co? ola fjuev eKaara ifjLol (f)aLV6- 

rat^ Totavra fjuev iartp ejioL, ola he aolj roLavra 

c' av crol {PL). 

215. In the following example the 5e is only once used : *0?/ jaev t6t€ 
irapaxpyil^^ ^^cto'dyiaray^ ovtos fxkv ovdkv eiTre irepl ijULov (\>avKov • %v 5* ^/^e- 
pais vffTepov iroAAaTs i^oLcdvLcrav^ — ovtos 6 Treior^cls virh tovtqjv {Ant. 
5, 30). 

Exercise 60. 

216. And^ besides these, lie maintains garrisons 
in tlie citadels (^of his towns); and, although the gar- 
rison-troops receive their pay and rations from the 
officer who is appointed for this purpose, the king 
holds a review every year of the troops in his pay, and 
all of whose duty it is to appear under arms, appoint- 
ing them all to march to the place of rendezvous^ ex- 
cept the troops in the citadels at the place f for which ^ 
the review is fixed. And the king himself reviews 
those who are in the neighborhood of his own resi- 
dence, and sends persons who are in his confidence to 
inspect those who dwell at a distance ; and all those 
commanders of garrisons, chiliarchs, and satraps, who 
are found to have their full numbers, and produce 
them at the review, supplied with good horses and 
arms : these ^ governors he both distinguishes by hon- 
ors (^conferred upon them), and enriches by presents 
of great magnitude ; whereas^ whatever governors are 
discovered to be either neglecting their garrisons, or 
making money by unjust means, these he punishes 
severely, and, deposing them from their governments, 
appoints other commissioners in their stead. 

^ ev^a ^. Use ^€j/— 5e. cf. 253. 



217—219.] 



115 



Chap. 12. § 3. {he = autem) 

217. A second explanatory or completing designation. 
is usually appended to tie first by he (= auteni), 

Elirep ye Aapeiov earl Tra?? e/ib^ S' a8eX0o9 
* mens autem frater bu.t, in English, ' and my brother.' 

218. Ae {= autem) is also A^ery frequently used in 
explanatory {Qs^eoid^j pareiitlieticcil) remarks, where ice 
either use ^nov.\^ or, more commonly, no conjunction. 

IIaTpb<; fjbev hr] 6 Kvpo<^ Xeyerai yevea^at KapL^v- 
aecOy TIepao)V /3aaiXeco<; • 6 he Kapi^varj^ ovto^ tov 
UepaeihSdv yevov<; rjv* pLTjrpo^ he opLoXoyeiraL ktX* 
{Xen, Cyr, 1, 2.) 

Exercise 61. 

219. (1) Dicaeogenes, having sailed as captain of 
the Paralus, was slain in a sea-fight at Onidus ; and^ as 
he left no children, Proxenus, the father of I)ica30ge- 
nes (®the defendant), produced a will to our parents, 
which they believed to be a true one, and by virtue of 
it they divided the inheritance. :}: Dic^ogenes the 
defendant was by it adopted by the deceased Dic^eoge- 
nes, the son of Menexenus and our uncle, and appoint- 
ed heir to a third part of his property ; and each of the 
daughters of Menexenus had a decree for her share of 
the residue : facts, for which I call before you as wit- 
nesses the persons who were present at the time. 

(2) Consider [then] on what ground the parties 
who come before you respectively rest their claims. 
These men rely on a will which our uncle, who im- 
puted no blame to us, made in resentment against one 
of our relations, but virtually cancelled before his 
death, having sent Posidippus to the magistrate (for 
the purpose of solemnly revoking it) ; but we, who vv^ere 
his nearest kinsmen, and most intimately connected 
with him, derive a clear title, both fi^om the laws which 



116 



[220, 221, 



have established our right of succession on the score of 
relationship, and from Cleonymus himself, whose inten- 
tion was founded on the friendship subsisting between 
us ; fnot to urge that^ his father and our grandfather, 
PoljarchuSj had appointed us to succeed him, if he 
should die without children. 

^ €Ti Se (and still fui'ther). 



Chap. 12. § 4. {KoX—hl) 

220. KaL — he == et vero etiam : atque etiam. 

Since the Greeks used the same word («ai) both for and and also, 
they had no means of expressing and also, but that of combining the 
synonymous 5e with Kai {Hartung). 

This combination is common in Xenoph. ; far less 
so in Thucyd. and Plato {Kr,), OX re aXkoi irpo'^ vjuico^; 
TO) TekevTia virrjpeTovv^ Kal rj tcov ©rj^alcov Se vroXt? 
irpo^vfiw ^vveTrefiire Kal OTrXtra^; Kav nnrea^ {Xen). 
Aapelo^ Kvpop aarpaTrviv eTroLyae, Kal aTparrjjbv 8e 
airehei^ev (_Zen.). 

A fjiev sometimes precedes: TloXka'xov fxev ovv Kal 
aXXo^t Sr]\ov . , * Kal ev tovtco Se ehrjkwaev {Xen, Cyi\ 
7, 1, 80). 

Exercise 62. 

221. (1) At this time, Xenophon, observing the 
numerous Hoplites of the Greeks, observing their nu- 
merous targeteers, and bowmen, and slingers, and even 
of horse, who now from practice were become right 
good troops, and ^ considering that they were in Pon- 
tus, where so large a force could not have been assem- 
bled for a trifling sum, thought it an admirable plan to 
procure for the Greeks a territory and (^increase of) 
power, by founding ^ there a city. 

(2) Agasias the Stymphalian, and Aristonymus the 
Metliydrian, who were also captains of the rear-guard, 



222.] Je. 117 

and otliers also, stood apart from the trees, for it was 
not safe for more than one company to be j)osted 
amongst them. fThen it was that^ 'Callimachus de- 
vised {pres. hist) a stratagem : he advanced two or 
three steps from the tree under which he was standing ; 
a7id whenever the stones were thrown, he nimbly re- 
treated, and at each advance of this kind) more than 
ten wagon-loads of stones were consumed. 

(3) Cyrus then constituted different officers to take 
care of different affairs. He had his receivers of the 
revenues, his paymasters, overseers of his works, keep- 
ers of his treasures, and officers to provide things that 
were proper for his table. Nay, he even appointed as 
masters of his horse and of his dogs such as he thought 
V\^ould bring these animals into the best condition for 
his use. But, as to those whom he thought fit to have 
as joint guardians of his power and grandeur, he him- 
self took care to have them the best ; he did not give 
this in charge to otheis, but thought it his own 
business. 



Chap. 12. § 5. {Se in apodosi.) 

222. Id. the old Epic language, Se (allied to ^rj) 
stands with a certain emphasis in the apodosis after 
relative clauses and conjunctions. In Attic prose this is 
rare, and is only found where the apodosis, after con- 
junctions or a relative adverh of comparison (&>?, wo-Trep), 
is denoted prominently by a demonstrative word [this is 
the most common case] or personal pronoun, which in- 
dicates an opposition to some other object; and, in the 
same way, after a participial construction^ which contains 
an opposition to the principal sentence. M. 

Eli ovv iycb firj ^yi'yvdoaKO} fjLTjre ra oaia fxi^re ra 
SUaLa, v[JLets ScSd^are fie {Xen. Hell. 4, 1, 33). 'jEtt^- 



118 Ai. [22a 

Ttfji(b Tat<; iJiovap')(laL^ on Seov tou? fxovdpyov^ rrjv (ppovrj- 
CTLV dcr/celv fjuaXkov tcov aWcov^ o I 8e ^(eLpQV TraiSevovrai 
Tcjv iStcoTMP {Isocr?j, '^O he rrrepi ifkeL0V0<i tov acojiaro^ 
Vy^h ^frv')(r]V — TTepl he toutov eTre/coLVcoaco {PI, 
PtoL 813, A.). 

Exercise 63. 

223. (1) f As to my own particular (for^ I hear 
Dexippus tells Cleander, that Agasias had never done 
this if I had not given him orders), for my part, I say,^ 
I am ready to clear both you and Agasias of this accu- 
sation, if he will say that I was the author of any of 
these things, and to condemn myself, if I began throw- 
ing stones or any other violence, to the last of punish- 
ments, and will submit to it. My advice also is, that 
if Cleander should accuse any other person, he ought 
to surrender himself to him to be tried ; by this means 
you will be free from censure. As things now stand, 
it will be hard if we, who expect to meet with applause 
and honor in Greece, should, instead of that, not even 
be in the same condition with the rest of our country- 
men, but be excluded from the Greek cities. 

(2) As to what you say, that we made our way by 
force to our present quarters, we called upon the inhab- 
itants to receive our sick under their roofs ; but, when 
they did not open their gates, then we did indeed march 
in where the place itself of its own accord offered us 
admission ; and, though we have done no violence in 
any respect, our sick are (°we allow) quartered in the 
houses, yet at their own charges ; and we place guards 
at the gates that our sick may not be at the mercy of 
your Harmost, but in our own power, to convey them 
wherever we please. And the rest of us live as you 
see in the open air, and continue in our ranks, pre- 
pared to reward kindness by kindness, and to defend 
ourselves against ill treatment. And^ as to what you 
threaten ("us with), that^ if you °once resolve to do so, 
you wdll make an alliance with Corylas and the Paph- 



224.] 



119 



lagonians against us, :}: we tlien, if it must be so, will 
fight even against you both together — for before now 
we have fought with others many times as numerous 
as you — and, if we think well to do so, will also make 
the Paphlagonian our friend ; for we hear that he is 
actually longing for your city and your coasts: we 
will endeavor, therefore, to make him our friend by 
assisting him to obtain what he desires. 

* e7cb ixkv ovv — KoX yap (= etenim). 

^ nvv resumptive, though ovv had preceded. 



Chap. 12. § 6. {fxev — he resolved hy whereas or whilst.) 

224. The Greeks often express contrasted notions 
by clauses co-ordinately connected by aiv — Se, where 
we should rather point out the contrast more sharply, 
by connecting a subordinate clause introduced by 
whereas^ whilst (or^ sometimes, although)^ with a princi- 
pal one. 

Such clauses either contain a question whether the 
two suppositions can stand together, or depend on a 
negative that precedes them both, or are stated in a 
clause (with el, w?, on, &c., or in the acc. c, infin,) that 
implies the absurdity or inconsistency of supposing both 
the notions to be true. M, 

Ti ovv ; ol fiev apa vlk7]<; evetca 7raknrj<^ koX Sp6/iov 
iroX/jLTjaav djri'X^a^at , . . ol Sk rjpbeTepoL TratSe? dSvva- 
TTjo-ovai Kaprepelv ttoXv /caWlovo^ eveKa viKrj^ ; {PI, / 
Legg.^^UO) 

To elvau fjuev ra? dvayKaLordra'^ 7fkei(jTa<; 7rpd^6L<; 
To?9 dv^pcoTTOL^ ev v7raL^p(pj tou? Se ttoXXou? dyvfivd- 
arco^ ej(eiv 7rp6<; re '^^rv^r] /cat irpos ^dXirrj ov Sofcel ctol 
'TToXXr] d/jLeXeia etvat ; (Jfe??.) 

JToj? ov ayeTkiov rrjv fjuev iroXiv avrrjv rjpiSiV etcdaifp 
SeSddK€vaL dheiaVi avrrjv he firj rerv^rj/cevac ravrij<; rrjf; 
dcr(f)a\eLa<; ; {Dem.) 



120 



[225. 



Exercise 64. 

225. (1) fit was owing to these tilings,^ to tlie 
great injury wHcli Decelea inflicted on them, and the 
other expenses which fell heavily^ npon them, that 
their pecuniary resources began to fail them ; and it 
was at this time that they imposed upon their sub- 
jects the tax of the twentieth of all sea-borne com- 
modities instead of the tribute, thinking that by this 
regulation they should raise a larger amount of money. 
For, the longer the war continued, the more were their 
revenues injured, whilst their expenses were not on the 
same scale as before, but much greater. 

(2) When many dreadful events were taking place 
in the city, and all the citizens had suffered the most 
distressing misfortunes, a man would have especially 
grieved and wept for the afflictions of the state ° itself, 
when he saw that the people had voted the freedom of 
the slaves, the admission of the foreign residents to the 
rights of citizenship, and the restoration of the dis- 
graced to their forfeited privileges, — (°this people,) who 
before those days used to pride itself on being f of 
pure original race ° and free ; and so complete was the 
change, that whereas the city was accustomed to fight 
for the freedom of the other Grecian states, she was in 
those days contented if she could combat without loss 
for her own preservation. 

(3) On this*^ they went to their tents, and in going 
discoursed among themselves how great a memory 
Cyrus had, and how he gave his orders, naming all the 
persons that he gave directions to. This Cyrus did 
out of his great care and exactness ; for he thought it 
very strange that whilst mean artificers, each of them, 
know the names of the tools belonging to their art, 
and a physician knows the names of all the medicines 
and instruments that he uses, a general should be such 
a fool as not to know the names of the commanders 



226—228.] 



121 



that are Tinder liim, and that he must necessarily use 
as his instruments. 

* Si' & KoL Tore (the discourse is continued from what went before). 
Use the adjective ^liyas (as predicate). auTox^-coi/. ^ 'E/c 

rovTov Brj. 



Chap. 12. § 7. {Si in replies^ questions^ and 
personal addresses,) 

226. a) Ae may hegin a reply that is opposed to what 
has been said by another. 

Mera tovtov Xevo<pa)p elirev • ^Eyo) 8 ' eirep^oiiaL 
vfuv eiriKovprjawv ktK. {Sen.) 

(In Latin vero would be used with personal pro- 
nouns : ego vero ; mihi vero^ &c. Kl.) 

227. b) In questions, Se is sometimes used as an 
adversative J the interrogator giving vivacity to his ques- 
tion by omitting the concessive member; but some- 
times it has a copulative toTce, and continues a question 
which had been interrupted by the answer given to it. 
The same principle holds good in answers. 

Kal 6 ^(OKpdTr)<;' EiTre /loi, ec^rj, & Kpircov, Kvva^ 
h e Tp6(f)€c^, Lva aoi tov^ \vicqv^ airo twv 7rpo/3dTcov avre- 
pvKcocTL ; (i. e. though you will not keep a man to protect 
you from your enemies , will you nevertheless,' &c.? Sen, 
Mem, 2, 9, 2.) Ovkovv ola^a, ecf^rj, ore TrXrj^et fjiev ovSev 
fjb€iov<^ elalv ^A^TjvaloL Bolcotcov] OlSa jap, ecf>r], Sco- 
fiara Se dya^a /cal Ka\a irorepa i/c Bolcotcov oiet irXetco 
av etcKej^rjvat, rj ^A^tjvcov ; {Sen.) 

In adversative questions introduced by Se, we should 
use then, or hut — then : sometimes in resumptive ones, 
well — then ; and — then ; sometimes merely and. 

228. c) In addressing a person after his name, av 
{croc, &c.) u.sually follows with Si : this form indicates 
emotion (Of. Herm. ad El. 147). MeviXae, crol Se rdSe 

I Xiyco fcrX* 

6 



II 



122 



[229. 



Exercise 65. 

229. (1) Then Xenophon rose up, and spoke thus 
in behalf of the soldiers: 'We^ are come hither, O 
men of Sinope ! well satisfied with having preserved 
our persons and our arms ; for, to secure and carry off 
any booty along with us, and at the same time to fight 
with our enemies, was impossible. And now, since we 
arrived among the Greek cities — at Trebisond^ — ^we 
paid for all the provisions we had, because they sup- 
plied us with a market ; and, in return for the honors 
they did us, and the presents they gave to the army, 
we paid them all respect, abstaining from those barba- 
rians who were their friends, and doing all the mischief 
we are able to their enemies, against whom they led 
us. Inquire of them what usage they have received 
from us ; for the guides, whom that city has sent 
along with us through friendship, are here present.' 

(2) To this he made no objection, but said that he 
had brought some things necessary for the funeral, 
and had given earnest for them ; he therefore exacted 
a promise from me to pay what they cost, and desired 
me to give him back the earnest-money, engaging to 
bring me to those who had received it of him : soon 
after, indeed, he affected to insinuate that Cyron died 
insolvent, though I had not then spoken a word about 
his fortune. Now, if he had not known me to be the 
grandson of Cyron, he would never have made such 
an agreement with me, but would rather have ad- 
dressed me thus :— ' Why, who are you ? What con- 
cern have you with the burial ? I know you not. You 
shall not come within my doors.' 

* ^jU€?s S € . . , i. e. u/AcTs fx\v ovrco yiyvdxXKere Tifxels de {J^r.). 
^ Here fxev is used, referring to Korvoooiras 5e, in a clause not 
included in this extract. 



230, 231.] 



123 



Chap. 12. § 8. (8e as resumptive,) 

230. A 6 is also used resumptively after a parenthe- 
sis, but usually with, reference to a preceding hL^ 

Denique particula Se ssepe etiam post parenthesin inferri solet, non 
solum ibi, ubi significatam jam antea per Se particulam oppositionem 
rm*sus excipit, sed ibi etiam, ubi nihil ejusmodi erat significatum. In his 
enim locis nascitur interposita alia sententia oppositio quaedam, qua 
quasi novum quiddam illud, quod jam antea indicatum erat, infertur, 
quoniam propter parenthesin neglectum yidebatur. Apud Xenophontem 
quidem in Disciplina Cyri, ii. 5, § 19, haec leguntm': Tavra 5' d7ao'3-€iy 
6 Kvpos, rod fjikv ra^idpxov rrjv iiriuoiaUj rcou Be rrju irei^co, *6ri afxa fxkv 
iyvfxvaQiVTo — oTrXicreL • tovtgls 5 e Tjcr^els e/caAecre re iirl BettTvov aurou? 
ktX. et ibidem vii. 2, § 23 : Nuz/ S' af) iraKiv viro re ttXovtov rod irap6v- 
Tos Bia^pvTrT6jJ.€Uos, Koi U7rh rwu dutpctJi/, edidocrdy jaoi, koI vtt av^pdoiro}]/, 
ol fxe Ko\aKeifouT€S €\eyov — , vTrh toiovtoov §e Xoycav ai'a(pv(Tct}fjL€yo5 — 

Exercise 66. 

231. But after the tyrants of the Athenians and 
those in the rest of Grreece (which even at an earlier 
period was for a long time subject to tyrants), the most 
and last, excepting those in Sicily, had been deposed 
by the Lacedaemonians (for Lacedasmon, after the set- 
tlement of the Dorians, who now inhabit it, though 
torn by factions for the longest time of any country 
that we are acquainted with, yet from the earliest 
period enjoyed good laws, and was always free from 
tyrants ; for it is about four hundred years, or a little 
more, to the end of this war, that the Lacedaemonians 



^ Difficilior ilia qusestio, num etiam ibi, ubi Se non praecesserit, finita 
parenthesi poni possit. Qua de re ego ita adfirmandum esse puto, ut 
ei quando pluribus inter jectis verbis ahqua notio ita comparata est, ut 
aliquo modo antecedentibus opponi posset, eam per particulam 5e recte 
inferri existumem, veluti in illo loco Herodoti, quem hie posuerunt gram- 
matici, lib. viii. c. 67 : 'EttcI airiKaro is ras 'A^'^}uas izdvres ovrot wK^p 
rcbv Uapicou • Hdpioi d e v'7roK€L(p^eyTes eV Kv^j/o) eKapadoKeou rhv iroXe/uLou 
KT] aTro^7}(T€TaL ' 01 de Xoiirol cos airLKOuro is rh ^dXripov, iv^avra Kare^i) 
avrhs "Eep^Tjs, iirl ras vr\as KrX., quo in loco facile apparet, cui' ol Xomol 
Ulatum sit per particulam adversativam. 



124 



[232, 233. 



have been in possession of tlie same form of govern- 
ment ; and, being for this reason powerful, they settled 
matters in the other states also); — after, I say, the 
deposition of the tyrants in the rest of Greece, not 
many years subsequently the battle of Marathon was 
fought between the Medes and Athenians. 



Chap. 13. § 1. At^. 

232. At] (= 'dum, -dew.'^ -jam, as in quoniam^ quispi- 
am^ and as used with adjectives and adverbs ^) is a parti- 
cle which intimates an affirmation on the part of the 
speaker, that he knows the thing in question to exist at 
the moment actually present^ or present to his mind. Hence 
it also denotes, in general, certain existence as a fact ; an 
appeal to what is evidently hefore onels eyes^ &c. ; it inti- 
mates that the assertion made is true now^ or with ref- 
erence to the thing of which it is asserted, whatever 
may be the case with reference to other ^ times or things. 

It seems most probable that 5^ is a weakened form of ^^-q. Rost 
considers it related to S?)Aos and ^ojivcli. Klotz derives ^St?, and there- 
fore §4 from eiSeVai. 

The connections in which hrj is of extremely fre- 
quent occurrence are : 

233. a) With adverbs of time ; denoting that the 
thing is limited to the precise time denoted by the 
adverb, ivrav^a Sij. vvv hrj — {aprC) just now, irplv 
07], priaem, en or}, ovKerc orj, aeu 07], iraXat or]. Com- 
pare nuncduMj etiamdum^ vixdum. 



^ Cum adjectivis et adverbiis jam conjungitur, ut id quod his verbis 
dicitur distinctione lumen accipiat. — Grseci usm-pant drj, veluti iroXXa S-f]. 
Bern. Cor. 32 {Hand). 

^ Thucyd. i. 74: Kat ahroX Zlq. rovro fidXicTTa iTifMrjcraTe apdpa 
^€P0Vj ubi Blo. rovro drj sic dicitur, ut appareat propter earn jam rem^ 
quum fortasse propter alias res minus hoc antea factum esset, honoratum 
esse ykum peregrinum {Kl), 



283.] 



125 



(^Evrav'^a S-t] and rore Srj very frequently com- 
mence the apodosis after eVet, eireihrj, Cf. e.) 

h) It is frequently used with imperatives and hor- 
tatory subjunctives (with which we often use now^ then), 
hrj, e(j)7]v iyco, "Akov6 Bt],^ ©co/ie^a Srj to 
(j^opTLov, Compare clicdum^ cedodum. — [Also adeo. Pro- 
pera adeo puerum toller e hinc ab janua. Ter, Andr, 4, 
4, 20.] 

c) With reference to purposes of pretention^ assevera- 
tionSj &c. it denotes the thing as settled^ completed, cer- 
tain^ &c. St], assuredly ; /jlt] Brj (c. iraper, =), hoc 
tantum te rogo^ nihil amplius^ ne, 

(On }jt,i] TL d-q, (fee. = 7i€dum, c£ chapter on /j.'f].) 

d) In explanations it denotes an immediate judgment 
of the mind^ formed upon the obvious appearance of the 
thing. So in yap St], co? Bt], ola S?; (iitpote). Here there 
is often an admixture of irony^ and sometimes of false 
pretence^ as if the thing were so obvious^ that it may be 
assumed as a fact without hesitation. EkTjyaye ra? 
eTatpiBa^^ Brf^ he brought in the pretended courtezans 
(Xen. Hell. 4, 56). iBLBa^av w? Kar evvoiav Brj Xeyeiv 
(Th,), 6 ao(f)6^ 0 7] J sapiens scilicet ille 

e) After demonstratives it denotes limitation to the 
thing in question, w^hich it distinguishes as being the 
very thing meant, often as remarkable^ luell known. Here 
it may sometimes be QOTi^iTuedi precisely ^ just, som^etimes 
simply, merely;^ it often, however, cannot be con- 
strued, but must have its force given by emphasis 
added to the word. So rore Brj^ ovto<^ Brj^ e/c tovtov Brj^ 
(TV Brjy ra avra Bi-j Tavra, ovtco Bt], eV^a Bi], &c. Com- 
pare dumtaxat and demum, 

f) With relative pronouns and adverbs it either de- 
notes limitation to the particular object (as with demon- 

^ Here it has also an annective force. H. 

^ Thus Cyrus, after stating that he wished for wealth that he might 
maintain troops, reward his friends, &c. adds : Tovroiv Z}) eVe/ca ^ovXofxai 
ois acp^ovcarara xpv^cl't^ ^X^'^j '^'^^^^ely for these purposes [= his adeo de 
causis. Kl.\ 



126 



[233 



stratives) or implies decision. 09 St^/ 0I09 eireihri 
{(]uoniam==^quum jaiTi)^ el hrj, ev^a Bij. (See h.) [a 8i]= 
qucBj ut satis constat K.] So with ha (botli as a local 
and a j^naZ particle). 

g) With interrogatives St] and St] irore imply (like hrj 
in commands) impatience^ as requiring an immediate 
explanation, Tk 8?;; who ever? who in the world? tl 
hrj ; 7ra)9 ; qitidum ? tl St] Trore ; quid tandem ? iro- 
aoL hrj iTore ; It has the same meaning in exclamations : 
0(709 8r} ! \oaa hrj hehrj^fjiai ! Aristoph^ 

Hand compares it "with autem. * Primum autem exprimit quserentis 
impetum et vehementiam, sive ea ab admiratione proficiscatur, sive ab 
indignatione et iracundid, maxime in reprehensione. Grseci dicunt hri! 
1, 575. 

h) 1. Its use with indefinites^ inclnding oaTL<^, 6ao<^, 
and the dependent interrogatives, oiroao^, kc.^ when 
used indefinitely ; and the corresponding adverbs, o^ez/, 
&c. Here, too, it denotes haste and indifference; any 
one^ without inquiring who^ or going further to take in 
others (= -cunque^ -vis^ -lihet). So that in effect it iii- 
creases their indefiniteness, o(jti<; S77, nescio quis [but also 
quicunque\, oarc'^ hrj irorey^ quicunque tandem ; 6ttoIo<^ 
hrj, bcroi hrj^ quotquot: oXko^ hrj^ alius nescio quis: eire 
hrj, whether it be that, &c. (= sive), 

i) 2. With Tt9, TTore, irov^ the hrj precedes (it can- 
not, of course, stand at the beginning of a clause) ; irj 
TLS^ quispiam^ or nescio quis: Sij Trore (S/^Trore^), icspi- 
am ; Stj irov (St^ttou), in some way surely (as used in a 
half-questioning or half-douhting manner ; = opinor, ni 
fallor. See below\ — 3. "Oao'^ hrj often means any de- 
gree however small (= quaniuluscunque), 

^Prj^vvrai oiToia Srj (p\e'^ {J^en,), '£9 TTjif "Aairev- 



* hs dr] — evp-fjcr^i ^ qui jam iriveniet, quod dici etiam potuit %s ^dfj 
evpTjcei, quamquam sic . . . vis minus spectaret ad pronomen ipsum. Kl. 
^ Also '6aTis 597 TTOT* ovy. 

' ^7} iroT€ {jam aliquando ) = 9nodo {rrjv 6.paa-orau drj ttot* ovaav 
IXiov. Eur. Hec. 480); unquam {cxrov ris . . , TrXuarov otj ttot" eSw/cev, 



234.] At^. 127 

Bov fj TiVL Srj yvco/XT] a^ifcveiTai {Th,^, To ^rjv oiroo'ov 
Srj ^povov TOP ft)? aXri^a)^ avhpa eariov eariv {PI-)- 
Qpaavfiaj(o^ Sca/SdXXetp re kol ScaXvaaa^ac 8cal3oXai 
o^ev St) KpdnaTO^ ykyovev {PI.)* "Evloc rd /xev ^lXo- 
vecKLciy rd 8' yrtvL Srj ttot' air la Trpodyovrai Xeyecv 
{Dera.), Tovro TreTrpa/craL vvvl oVft)? Sr^ irore (JDera,), 
^EfiLCF^doaaro (le oarL^ hrj ttot^ ovv {/Eschin.), Tfj 
KwicTKa TO iTriypafjifjLa eiroirjae oaTL<^ hrj {nescio quis), 

k) After expressions of numher and degree (e. g. 
com'paratives and superlatives)^ it denotes liriiitation to 
tlie asserted magnitude or degree, wliicli the thing pre- 
cisely attains to. It may denote either that the number 
or degree is not exceeded.^ or that it fully reached, i. e. 
is not fallen short of 

Movo^ St;, quite alone: rpei^ Sy, no more than three: 
irdvre^ Srjj all vjithout exception: da^evr]^ very iveak: 
^paj(p^ Srj, St], jrdvv Srjj fieya hrji TrXelcrra hrj^ 

(xeyiaTo^ hrj (the very greatest). 

Exercise 67. 

234. (1) In consequence of this, Mello, taking with 
him six of the properest persons amongst the exiles, 
armed with daggers and no other weapon, goes in the 
first place bj^ night into the territory of Thebes. In 
the next place, having passed the day in an unfre- 
quented spot, at evening they came to the gates, as if^ 
returninp; from the countrv, about the time that the 
last parties came in from their working in the fiekls. 
When they had thus got into the city, they passed that 
night in the house of one Charon, and moreover ^ spent 
the whoie of the following day ^ there. 

(2) But when^ upon trial, they found the water 
came up above their breasts ; that the river was ren- 
dered uneven by large slippery stones ; and that it 
was not possible for them to hold theif arms :n the 
water ; which, if they attempted, they were borne 
away by the stream, and, if they carried them upon 



128 ^ J 7. [234. 

their heads, they were exposed to the arrows and the 
other missive weapons of the enemy ; — then they re- 
tired, therefore, and encamped on the banks of the 
river. From hence they discovered a great number ot 
armed Carduchians, who Avere got together upon the 
mountain, in the very place where they had encamped 
the night before. Then indeed the Greeks were very 
much disheartened, seeing on one side of them a river 
hardly passable, and the banks of it covered with 
troops to obstruct their passage, and, on the other, the 
Carduchians ready to fall upon their rear, if they 
attempted it. 

(3) The final issue of all things is as the Deity 
wills ; but the plan and intention does itself declare 
the mind of the statesman. Do not then, do not im- 
pute it as my offence, that it was Philip's good fortune 
to be victorious in the battle, for that event depended 
upon God, not upon me; but prove that I did not 
take every precaution which human prudence could 
suggest; that I did not exert myself with integrity, 
with assiduity, with toil even greater than my strengi^h ; 
that the conduct I pursued was not noble, was not 
worthy of the state, was not necessary: let this be 
proved, and then at once^ accuse me. 

(4) Gobryas then said : ' But if one has a mind to 
dispose of a daughter, whom must one tell it to?' 
* This/ said Cyrus, ^ must be told to me too ; for I am 
a notable man in this art.' ' What art ? ' said Chrysan- 
tas. ^Why, in knowing what match will best suit 
each particular man.' Then Chrysantas said : ' In the 
name of all the gods, then do tell me what wife you 
think will best suit me ! ' ' First,' said he, ^ she must 
be little, for you are little yourself ; and if you marry 
a tall wife, and Avould kiss her as she stands, you must 
leap up as little dogs do.' 'Well, as to that,'^ said he, 
' you certainly provide with judgment ; for I am f any 
thing but a good jumper.'® 'And then,' said he, 'a 
wife with a snub nose would suit you admirably.' 



2S5.j 



129 



* And wliat in the world is this for ? ' * Because,' said 
he, 'you have a hooked nose, f and a hooked nose 
would fit best into a flat and sinking one.' ^ 

^ Supra d, ^ Of. 220. « t6t ^Bt]. ^ See 212, note d. 
® ov^ b'K(a(TTLovv (= ne tantillum quidem) a\riK6?. ^ Say : 

* and know that hook-nosedness would best suit (or fit into) snub-nosed^ 
ness.' TrpocrapfMO^eLU 7rp6s' yvTzorris' (TLfjL6r7}s. 

Exercise 68. 

235. (1) I swear by all the gods and goddesses, 
that I have not even received from Seuthes what he 
promised me in particular. He is present him self; and, 
as he hears me, he knows whether I am guilty of per- 
jury or not; and^ that you may still have more reason 
to wonder, I also swear that I have not even received 
what the other generals have, f^^y? ^^t even^ so 
much as some of the captains. And why then, why' 
did I act thus? I thought, fellow-soldiers, that the 
more fully I shared the poverty which he then suffered, 
the more would he show himself my friend when it 
was in his power. But now I no sooner see him in 
prosperity, than^ I at once thoroughly understand his 
character. 

(2) As soon as they began their retreat, the enemy 
sallied upon them in great numbers, armed with buck- 
lers, spears, greaves, and Paphlagonian helmets ; while 
others got upon the houses on each side of the street 
that led to the fort, so that it was not safe to pursue 
them to the gates of it, for they threw great pieces of 
timber from above, which made it dangerous both to 
stay and to retire ; and the night coming on, increased 
the terror. While they were engaged with the enemy 
under this perplexity, some god administered to them 
a means of safety ; for one of the houses on the right 
hand took fire on a sudden : who set fire to it is not 
known ; but, as soon as the house fell in, all the enemy 
who were in the houses ° on the right quitted them ; 
and Xenophon, being taught this expedient by fortune, 



180 



Ay. [236, 237. 



ordered all the houses on the left to be set on fire. 
These being built of wood were soon in flames, upon 
which the enemy quitted them also. 

* fjLT] roivvv /xTjde (ac ne quidem), though the particles are probably 
not fouiid elsewhere in this connection (Kruger). ^ Supra, 85, 86. 

* C£ Gram. 1 4.35 : imitating the attraction of prepositions there ex- 
plained. 



Chap. 13. § 2. {yap S^, &c.) 

236. With declarative particles (yap, o)?, ola)^ and 
the filial particles^ co?, iva, the particle St] denotes that 
the fact is simply and precisely as stated. When a rea- 
son is introduced by <yap hrj^ the hr) adds to the state- 
ment the implied affirmation, that the reason given is 
now a certain fact proved hy experience. 

Ov yap 8?], non enim profecto^ is of common occur- 
rence. 

237. Hartung observes, that sometimes the S7 does 
not relate to the yap, but to the preceding word, from 
which it is separated by the intervening particle. He 
quotes HoXKa yap hrj^ Cyr, 5, 3, 8 ; ^pdaco yap Srj, Eur, 
Rhes, 340 ; K(0(pr]v yap Srj yalav decKL^ei fieveaivcov, II, 
(D, 54. — Klotz says that he does not understand this 
remark ; for that, for instance, in the first passage 
quoted, HoWa yap 87] eycoye Kd/ceivos iTTapprjcnaad' 
fie^a TTpo^ aXX7]\ov9\ the asseveration expressed by the 
particle only relates to iroWd^ because the whole 
sentence is affirmed by the particles yap Sy, I cannot 
but think, however, that Hartung's meaning is obvious 
and correct ; namely, that the Stj sometimes does not so 
much affirm the whole clause, as attach itself to one of 
those words which it usually accompanies, to heighten 
their meaning by fixing it clown precisely to the proper 
nature of the word. — Thus with an imperative : e. g. 
<f)€p€ yap Srj, fcrX, {Antipli, Cced. Her, 723): here the 
S77 has just the same kind and degree of reference to 



238, 239.] 



131 



the imperative cj^ipe that it would have if no yap inter- 
vened. 

238. The second passage Hartung translates : * the 
earth all dumb [= senseless] as it is ' {die ganz stumme 
Erde) ; Klotz : ^ mutam enim jam profecto terram violat 
iracundus^ referring the hr], not to Kco(p7]v only, but to 
the whole affirmation. This is a point that can hardly 
be decided, as the stress may equally well rest on the 
whole action, or on the notion that the object he wreaks 
liis anger upon is the dumb earth. 

Exercise 69. 

239. (1) But when the Paphlagonians and Spithri- 
dates brought in the booty they had taken, Herippidas, 
who had posted his officers for the purpose, took every 
thing away from Spithridates and the Paphlagonians, 
merely that he might enlarge the booty he himself 
should deliver in to the commissioners of sale. The 
Paphlagonians, however, did not put up with this 
treatment ; but, as men who had been injured and dis- 
graced, packed up their baggage and went off by night 
to Sardis, to offer their services to Ariseus, confident of 
a good reception from him, as he too had revolted from 
and was making war upon the king, Agesilaus ^ took 
nothing to heart during this expedition so much as 
this desertion of Spithridates, Megabates, and the 
Paphlagonians. 

(2) The plaintiff is so cunning, and determined to 
affect ignorance of what is right, that, although he has 
preferred a charge of perjury, upon which you are 
sworn to give your verdict, he declined to question the 
slave as to the truth of the deposition (the point about 
which he ought to have been most anxious), and now 
falsely asserts that he requires him to be delivered up 
for a different purpose. Is it not monstrous that he 
should complain of my refusal to deliver to him a 
freeman (for such I shall clearly prove Milyas to be) ; 



132 



[240, 241 



and sliould not consider my witnesses hardly treated, 
when I offer to him a person who is confessedly a 
slave, and he refuses to put their evidence to the test 
by examining him ? for he surely cannot contend that 
the torture is for some purposes (which he himself 
desires) a certain criterion of the truth ; and again, for 
other purposes, uncertain. 

^ Insert the terminative ixkv 5^. 



Chap. 13. § 3. {^rj retrosjpeciive and resumptive?) 

240. Ai] has also an extensive use in appending a 
new notion, with an accompanying reference to what 
has immediately preceded, 

Omnino usurpatur St] particula, ubi aliquid ad ea quae prsecesserunt 
ita adjicitur. ut hoc statim ac vix absolutd priore re fieri videatur {Kl^. 

Thus Xen. Cyr. 1, 5, 1 : "ESoaav 8e avrS koI irpoae- 
Xea^at hiafcoaiov^ tcov o/jlotI/jlcov, tcop av hiaKoaLcov 
eKaarcp rerrapa^; ehcoKav irpoaeXea^ao koL tovtov<^ etc 
Tcop o/jlotl/jLcov* yijvovTac Sr] ovroo ')(^L\toL* ktK., {novj 
these amount at once to a thousand men). 

(Quibus in verbis particula propterea locum habet, quod shnulai 
postrema electio facta est, jam erunt tot homines numero. Kl.) 

241. The retrospective and continuative force of hrj is 
shown principally in its employment as a resumptive 
particle, both after a po.rentliesis in the strict sense, 
and after all remarks of a more or less parentheticai 
character. 

Thus, Plat. Gorg. 456, C. : Ael (levroty m 5'., rfj prjro- 
pLKr) "^^prja^aL coairep koX aWrj irdarj ajcovia. The 
speaker then goes on to explain the sense in which he 
understands this^ and having done so proceeds : 'O av* 
To<; 8rj \6yo<; kol Trepi ri}? prjropLtcrj^;. Here we should 
often use ncio^ or then : sometimes 5o, thus. 

So also Thuc. 1, 128 : The historian having stated 



242.] 



J 7;. 



133 



that tlie Lacedaemonians had called upon the Atheni- 
ans to drive out the pollution of the goddess (to ayo? 
iXavveiv ttJ? ^eov) proceeds to describe what this pollu- 
tion was ; and after this continues his narrative (in 
chap. 127) thus: Tovro Srj to ayo? ol Aa/ceSac/iovtoL 
iXavveiv i/ciXevov ktK,, this pollution then the Lacedczmo- 
nians^ &lg. 

Exercise 70. 

242. (1) When after this the second expedition took 
place, which Xerxes, quitting his palace, and daring 
to assume the chief command, and collecting all the 
forces of Asia, conducted in person — (^an expedition) 
about which what man, however desirous to use exag- 
gerated language, has not fallen short of the truth ? — 
for he advanced to such a degree of insolent pride, 
that, deeming it a light task to subdue Greece, and 
wishing to leave such a memorial of it as should be of 
absolutely superhuman magnitude, he never rested till 
he had devised and forciblv executed what is in all 
men^s mouths, sailed, that is, with his army through 
the main land, and marched on foot through the sea, 
by yoking together (°the shores of) the Hellespont on 
the one hand, and digging through Athos on the 
other. — Against this monarch, I say^ filled with pride 
like this, and who effected works of this magnitude, 
the Lacedaemonians and our ancestors marched, di- 
viding the danger between them ; the former, with a 
thousand picked men and a few allies, to ThermojDyl^ 
against the land forces, to oppose in that pass their fur- 
ther progress, and our fathers (^sailed) to Artemisium, 
having manned sixty triremes against the whole navy 
of their enemies. 

(2) Having then thus palpably brought forward an 
illegal decree, he will endeavor, assisted by his confed- 
erate Demosthenes, to do violence to the law by subtle 
artifices, which I will explain and announce to you 
beforehand, that you may not be deceived for want of 



134 



[248, 244 



knowledge. ^ These men will not have it in their 
power to deny that the laws expressly declare, that a 
crown conferred on any citizen by the people shall be 
proclaimed in no other place than the assembly ; but 
they will drag into their defence, f the law by which 
the festivals of Bacchus are regulated,^ and, making 
use of a certain part of the law, will entrap you to 
listen to them, and °so producing an enactment that 
has no bearing upon this action, will assert that there 
are in the state two laws enacted relative to proclama- 
tions: one is that which I have now produced, ex- 
pressly forbidding the proclamation of a crown granted 
by the people to be made any where but in the assem- 
bly ; but there is another law, they will say, which is 
contrary to this, which allows the liberty of proclaim- 
ing a crown so conferred in the theatre, when the 
tragedies are exhibited, ^provided the people shall 
have so determined by their votes.' It is ihen^ in 
accordance with this law, they will maintain, that 
Ctesiphon founded his decree. 

^ o AiouvcTLaKhs vo/jlos. 



Chap. 13. § 4. {koI — St] as annective), 

243. In KoX — the two particles retain each its 
proper force. The Kal appends what follows to what 
preceded, and the hrj (with that retrospective force that 
often belongs to it [241]) intimates, that from that pre- 
ceding statem.ent what is now asserted is hnown^ or 
may obviously he inferred. It conveys this information 
with the life and spirit that usually belong to it as a 
descriptive particle. 

244. The particles koX — hrj append in this way 
obvious conclusions where we should use 50, just so^ &c.) 
particulars in an enumeration^ ichich must not be over' 
looked [compare koI — yi in enumerations, supra [204] ; 



245, 2i6.) J^. 135 

and rapid transitions from a general statement to a par- 
ticular instance of it, &;c. 

1. 'O i.Lev ovv iv d.7Toppr]TQi^ Xeyoficvo^ rrepl avrCov 
k6yo<^y CO? ev rtvi cj)povpa iafxev ol av^^pcoiroc /cal ov Sel 
Si] kavTov ifc raiJTrj^ Xveiv ovS" aiTohLhpdatceiv, fieya^ re 
tL<; pLOL (batverac fcal ov paSco^ SuSelvj ktX. {PL) 

Respicitur particulis koI — ^5??, id quod recte Hartungius docuit; ad 
id, quod modo dictum erat, ut hoc significetui', cum quidem nos 
homines simus in aliqua custodia, etiam istud ja?/i consentajieum 
esse, ut non discedamus ex ea injussu ejus, qui nos dedit in custo- 
diam {KIX 

2. "flare i] rod Sreci) ivepyeca pLaKapiorriTL 8La<pi' 
povaa "ijecoprjTL/cr] av eirj* Kal tcop dv^poTrlvcov Sr) 97 
ravrr] cvyyepeardTT] evSacpiovL/ccordrT], Aristot. {Etli, 

10, 8, 7.) ' 

Ubi ideo adjecit postenorem emmtiationem per particulas kol — 077 
Aiistoteles, quod, priore sententia concessa, hoc jo.in necessario 
ita esistumandum esse videretur {KIX 

8. Olov opav. aKoveiv, <^povelv. Kal vytaLveiv hrj 

Kal oca aWa aya'i^a yovtpia tt) oJjtoov (pvaec dW ov 

Eo^rj iariv (PI Pep. 2, 367, D.)- " 

Quo in loco byicLiv^Lv ita accedit, ut significetur ceteris rebus positis 
hoc fere jo/ni declaratum yideri, quo alacrior ac jucundior est 
oratio {KIX 

(Klotz observes, that when Ka\ — are used in enumerations, the 
meaning is, not that the notion so adduced is true rather than the 
others, but only that it is one ^vhich must not be overloohed in the 
enumeration "wiih the rest. — ^To denote a proper ascensio ad ina- 
jus, KoX — y\ 07] must be used : Ttjv yap Qecro-aXiap aJKAccs re ovk 
evTTGpcv duiyai avev aycoyov, Kal /j-era ott?^o:v ye drj. (7^.4,78.) 

4, AeLTrerai crrpaTTjyecv Tkyya^ nvd^* Kal S?) 
Tr}pr;aavT€^ eSo9 tl tcov ^ap(3dpcov . . , emTL^evraL Kal 
"veipovvTai iroXKov^ (Strab. 5, 3). 

5, Kal ipcora S ?) ttco? pL€ "^dirrrj (PI. Pliced. 1 157, c). 

245. Hartung compares this lively and sudden selec- 
tion of a single instance "witli tlie use of jarn^ in ad- 
ducing examples or instances in proof of an assertion : 
Fcecida jam quo de genere est (Lnci^et. 2, 430). 

246. Tliis Kal hi mav be foUovred bv another Kai 
{=-- also) ; tlie particles Kal Si) KaL are often preceded by 



136 



[247, 



a\Xo9 re (in the proper case of aXXov) to conyey an 
especial instomce of a general statement, 

'£/9 AiyvTTTov aTTi/cero irapa "Afxaacv koA Or] fcal 
€? SdpSL<i irapa Kpolaov {Hdt 1, 80). 

Exercise 71. 

247. (1) ^For wliat purpose, v/itli respect to tlie 
joint application of money, is the just man more useful 
than others ? ' ^ When ayc wish to deposit it and have 
it kept safe, 0 Socrates.' ^You mean then, do you 
not, when we have no occasion to use it at all, but wish 
it to be left in deposit ? ' • Exactly so.' • When there- 
fore ou.r money is useless, (''then it is that) justice is 
useful with regard to it.' * It would seem so.' ^ And 
just sOj when we have to keep a pruning-hook safe, 
justice is useful both for a community and for a pri- 
vate individual ; but, Vv^hen we have occasion to use it, 
the art of vine-dressing is useful ? ' ^ It seems so.' 

(2) 'Indeed, my son,' said he, 'to a forced obedi- 
ence this is the way ; but to a willing obedience, v^hich 
is much the better, there is another way, and a readier ; 
for, whomsoever men take to be more knowing than 
themselves in what is for their interest and advantage, 
him they obey with pleasure. This you may know to 
be true in many other cases, and particularly in that 
of sick people, who are very ready to send for such as 
may prescribe what is fit for them to do : so too at sea, 
the people that are on board are very ready and zeal- 
ous to obey their pilots ; and travellers are extremely 
averse to part with such as they think know the roads 
better than themselves : but when men think that thev 
shall be injured by their obedience, they will neither 
yield to punishments nor be raised by rewards ; for 
even presents are not willingly received by any man 
to his own prejudice.'* 



248—252.] 



Aij. 



137 



Chap. 13. § 5. {/cal Srj.) 

248. In Kol Srj tlie St] has often its temporal mean- 
ing (=^jam)^ the KaL having that of etiam ; so that the 
Koi St] = eveii 7iovj ; already ; less commonly immedi' 
ately^ which meaning, however, it always has with the 
'future^ and when any thing is to happen. 

With respect to the /cat, it is to be remarked that sometimes it is to 
be taken separately, in the sense of and or also, and sometimes in close 
comiection with §17, as in the kindred forms, koX irpip, koI ird\ai, when it 
may be rendered even {Hartung). 

249. Hartung also observes, that in many instances the St? in koL hrj 
may have what he calls its metaphorical meaning, of lively and pointed 
annexation with added importance ; and that the meaning of koI St) is 
decidedly temporal, only when it stands in the middle of a clause, or 
begins the apodosis: Xlporepecov §e Tr\s o5ou wpa Ka\ 5-^ cpevyoyras rovs 
Uepcras (already in flight), Hdt 9, 66 ; 'ETre: re i^efid^ere, . . . Kal 5 77 
x6yov ovBei/a rwv ^K^7]valoov iroieea^e {you at once make no account), id. 
7,2; ^'E.v ^ ^\ ravra. e^ovXevoyro, /cat h)] ^acriXevs izapafJL^L'^dfxevos els 

avrh crxVH-^ /carecTTTjcrez/ ipapriau tt]v (pdhayya {Xen, An. 1, 10, 10 : — 
^577. Kr^. 'Hs fioL ^€\ri(rra koI Taxicrra BokeI irapacrKevacr^tvai, /cal 
ir€Lpd(ToiJ,aL Xiyeiv, I will immediately {or, at once) endeavor to state 
(DejJi. Phil. 4, 4, 44). 

250. When this temporal kol hrj is followed by an- 
other A:a/, the second KaC does not belong in sense to 
the Kal hrj, but to one of the following words {Hart' 
ung\ =etjam etiam ; atquejam etiam (KL). 

251. When Kal hrj occnrs in replies, the Kai denotes 
readiness to meet the ivishes of the other party, the hr] 
intimating assent. Here the force of hrj belongs to 
what Hartung calls the determinative meaning of the 
particle. 

BXe-^ov Karct), ^'Kal B7] ySXeTro)." {Aristoph, Av, 
175.) 

Exercise 72. 

252. (1) But so soon as Cleombrotus began to 
advance towards the enemy, in the first place, even 
before the bulk of the army was aware that he was in 
motion, the cavalry had already engaged, and that of 



138 



[252- 



the Lacedasmonians had quickly been defeated, and in 
their flight had fallen in amongst their own heavy- 
armed ; and moreover the heavy-armed of the Thebans 
were making their attack. However, that the body 
posted round Cleombrotus had at first the better in the 
fight, any man may have a certain proof from hence ; 
for they could not have taken him up and carried him 
off yet alive, unless those who fought before him had 
the better of it at that time. 

(2) Cyrus's men were thus occupied. But the As- 
syrians had already dined (^), and were forming them- 
selves with a great deal of resolution. % The king was 
marshalling them himself, driving around in his chari- 
ot ; and he exhorted them to this effect : * Alen of 
Assyria ! now is the time for you to quit yourselves 
like brave men, for now you are fighting for your 
lives, for the country where you were born, for the 
houses in which you were bred, aye and for your wives 
and children, and for every thing valuable that you 
possess. If you conquer, you will remain masters of 
all these as before; if you are defeated, be assured 
that you will give them all up to the enemy. 

(3) Socr, But, my dear Phsedrus, I shall expose 
myself, if I, f who am no poet,^ place myself in com- 
petition with a good one, and speak extempore on the 
same subject. 

PhcBd, Do you know how the case stands ? Don't 
give yourself any more of these airs, for I have that to 
say, which will hardly fail to force you to speak if I 
utter it. 

Socr, Then do not say it on any account. 

Phoed. Nay, but here I do say it at once : — and the 
speech shall be an oath ; for I swear to you — but by 
which, by which of the gods ? shall it be by this plane- 
tree ? — that, unless you make a speech to me before 
this very tree, I will never again either show or repeat 
to you another speech by any author whomsoever. 

Socr, Ah, rascal, how ^vell you have found out the 



253—255.] 



139 



way to compel fa lover of speeches and arguments'' to 
do whatever you bid him ! 



Chap. 13. § 6. {St] in lively suppositions,) 

253. At], especially koL St;, is also used in making 
suppositions in a lively, spirited way. The hrj, according 
to Hartung, here denotes indifference. 

254. In suppositions, hrj or koX hrj is used in two 
ways : 

1) With a conditional particle, and the suhjunctive 
or optative mood. 

""'Ottco? Se XPV TaacreLV et9 /Jbd-^rju arpariav , » , /cal 
6L ye Br] aoi . . . iroXeiiLOL einc^av elev , tto)'^ 
'^prj avrtKo^LardvaCy ktX, {Xen, Cyr. 1, 6, 43.) 

2) In the indicative, \jcal Stj = fac, finge.^ 

Kal St] a<p6a(; Troceco taov^ ifcelvoLcn elvau {Hdt 
vii. 10, 2), Well, then, I set them down as equal 
in number to the former. 

Exercise 73. 

255. (1) ^And how pir ay, father,' said he, ^ shall 
one be best able to raise such an opinion of oneself?' 
^ My son,' said he, ' there is no readier way to appear 
wise and knowing in things wherein you desire to 
appear so, than to be in reahty knowing in those 
things; and if you consider feach particular case by 
itself^^ you will find that what I say is true : for if you 
would appear a good husbandman when you are not a 
good one, or a good horseman, a good physician, a 
good player on the flute, or (° a good) any thing else 

when you really are not so), consider how many con- 
trivances you must use in order to appear so. And 
even suppose that you could even prevail with a great 
many people to commend you, that you might gain^ a 



140 



[256, 



reputation, and if yon shonld purchase fine instrn 
ments, and furniture belonging to each, of the arts, 
f scarcely would you have succeeded in deceiving 
them, when^ presently, on coming some time or other 
to give proof of your skill, you would be convicted, 
and would appear an arrogant boaster. 

(2) ^ Listen then,' said Cyrus, ^ (° to determine) 
whether you think my advice to the purpose. I have 
very often hunted on the borders of your territory and 
that of the Armenians, with all the Persians that were 
with me ; and, more than that, I have gone thither 
f before now,^ taking likewise from hence several horse- 
^ men from amongst my companions here.' ' There- 
fore,'^ said Cyaxares, 'by doing just the same things 
now, you will pass unsuspected ; but if a much greater 
force should appear than what you used to have 
with you in hunting, this at once^ would excite suspi- 
cion.' 'But,' said Cyrus, 'one may also frame a pre- 
text that would be very plausible, both here and there 
also, if that is any one should report it there that I 
intend to undertake a great hunting-expedition ; and,' 
said he, ' I would openly desire from you a body of 
horse.' 'Excellent,' said Cyaxares; 'and I shall re- 
fuse to give you any but a very few, as intending to 
march myself to our garrisons that lie towards Assy- 
ria, f For indeed I do really,'^ said he, 'intend to go 
thither, in order to strengthen them as much as possible.' 

* fcaS-' %v %Ka(rrov, as Dem. Cor. 230, 2 : BovKofxai Se /ca^* %v eKaa-rou 
avTcou i^erdcai' — the /ca3-' eV being adverbial. ^ ' Optativus \d^ois 

quoniam ab cogitatione Cambysis omnia pendent, legitimus est.' Borne- 
mann. ^ dpri re ^TjiraTTjKcos eCiqs av Kai, (fee. Compare a/uLa — /ca(, 

83 ; ^577 T6 . . . Acat, &c. ^ ^St]. ® roivvv. ^ rovro ijdrj, i. e. 
without going on to other suspicious circumstances. ^ kol yap uj/tl. 

Chap. 13. § 7. {fiev Se St^.) 

256. a) Mev 8i] is generally a concluding fornmla, 
in which the force of fxiv is confirmative, that of 8^ 



257-^259.] 141 

retrospective; dismissing the statement made as now 
completed. 

h) A summing up or recapitulation, introduced by 
fiev OTj, is usually followed by a transition to a new 
subject, or a new part of the same subject (usually a 
fuller explanation of it), introduced by Se, or sometimes 
by he hrj, 

Xpvadvra^ fjbev, 8r) ovrco^ elTrev* avearrj S eV 
avTM ^epavXa^ Heparj^ {X^en.), 

So in the common formula, kuX ravra /jlcv St; ravra, in Plato, (kc. 

c) In the progress of a narrative /Jiev hrj is often 
used, where we should employ 50, accordingly ; i. e. 
Avhen the fact stated founded upon what preceded. 

d) In }x\v ^7], as Klotz observes, each particle retains its usual force, 
and the fj-ei/ is usually followed by its con*esponsive 5e. But the two 
particles have a more blended meaning in the combinations dAAa fxeu b-f], 
^ yuev 54 ov fih Srf, kol jj-ku St/, ye fiku bij, in which Hartung and others 
would write {jL^i/drj as one word ve7'o ; the fi€u having here an adver- 
sative force). Kal fxiv^t] koL ToiuraXSv y€ elaeT^ov, et vero etiam Tan- 
talum videbam. PL Protag. ^15, c. Baa-iXiKol /jlev oLv^pes ov ixivhji 
eiTLcrTriiJiovis 76. PI. Phcedr. 266, c. 

257. The particles he hrj retain, in this combination, 
each its usual force^ so that he hrj == autemjam, 

^Epel he S77 T^?, S) KaKCL /jiavTev/jLara {Eur. Phoen, 
589). 

258. As each of the particles, he and hrj, often fol- 
lows a particle or pronoun, to add emphasis to it, or 
give it prominence and distinction, so the two particles 
are often used together in the same way. 

a) Thus, 6i Se 5t/, si vero jam ; iap Se St?, qimm vero jam ; vvv 5e 5??, 
nunc vero jam; rovro 5e dij, hoc vero jam. 

b) Here we should either merely pronounce the if, &c. with empha- 
sis, or use a strengthening adverb of tims or degree : ei (iau) Se Srf, and 
if, and if indeed {really, now, after all, <fcc.) ; and now if 

Exercise 74:, 

259. When there came to me a person who was 
going to Persia, and bade me give him the letter I had 
written home ; and I told the captain, for^ he knew 



142 Ajj'^ev, Stjttov, Stjirov^ev. [260. 

where ttie letter lay, to run and fetch, it. he, according- 
ly, set off a-running ; but that young man, armed as he 
was with corslet and sword, followed after his captain; 
nay more,^ the rest of his company, seeing him run, 
ran off with him ; and all of them came back again, 
and brought me the letter. 'Thus,' said he, 'at all 
events, this company of mine is very exact in exe- 
cuting all the instructions they* receive from you.' 

The rest, as was natural, laughed f at this gua:ii^ and 
attendance on the letter ; ^' f but Cyrus said : ' 0 Zeus, 
and all you gods ! why what men then have we for 
our companions ! They are so easily won by atten- 
tions, that many of them might be made one's friends 
for a little portion of meat ; and they are such obedient 
persons,^ that they obey before they understand what 
they are ordered to do. For my part, I do not know 
what sort of men we should wish the soldiers to be, 
unless it be just such ! ' Thus Cyrus, laughing all the 
time, praised the soldiers. 

» Supra, 152. ^ Supra, 218. « iirl dopv<popia rrjs eVt- 

CToXri^. ^ A new clause would follow with 5e. 



Chap. 14. Arj^ev, St^ttov, hrjirov'^ev, 

260. Arj^ev (from hr) and SreV, a weakened form of 
^rjv ^ ~ scilicet) is properly an affirmative particle, but is 
mostly used either of a false pretence or notion (= irpo- 
^acrtv, or co? TrpoaeTTOLovvro : in appearance ; as they [Ae, 
/] wished it to he thought)^ or as an ironical affirmation 
(scilicet^ videlicet ; quasi vero). It is, however, sometimes, 
though seldom, used as a simple explanatory particle. 

^ AireTreiJiy^dfjirjv top vIop, /Jiey a cfypopoyp^ otl hr}^ep 
(= videlicet^ scilicet) rr}? jSaatkecD^ ^vyaTpo<; oyJroL/nTjp top 
efJbop VLOP yajjL6Trjp (Xen,), Tovto Srj to ajos ol Aafcehau- 



* As -^sch. Prom, Vinct. 928 : 2u ^-qv t xPvC^^h '^avr iTriyXooo-ffS 



261—263.] Arj^ev, Stjttov, Sr^Trov^ev. 143 



fjLOVLOL ekavveiv i/cekevov Srj^ev to69 ^€ol<; irpoiTOv tl/jlo)' 
povvre^^ Uepiickea he elhore^; top Aav'^Lirirov irpoaeyopje- 
vov avT^ Kara rrjp fjLTjrepa {Th,y 

261. AriTTov ippinor^ ni fallor)^ I imagine^ I suppose^ 
surely, 

Ov hrjiTOV TOP ap')(pvra TOdv ap')(piievctiv TropTjporepop 
irpoarjKei elpai {Xen,). On ye hriirov, cf. supra l89. 

ArjiTov often stands as the last word in a clause 
(e. g. in Dem^: "On yap eh tovto irepicrTiqaeTai ra 
Trpdj/JLara, iap ra irapopra irpQayjie^a, a')(ehop 'ia-pLep 
airapre^ hrjirov [Dem.), 

262. ArjTTov^ep (from hrjirov and ^rjp: compare hy)- 
^ep\ I Jiope^ 1 suppose^ surely {iiempe^ ironically : opi- 
nor), "Ap^pcoTTo^ el ht^Trov^ep' ov/c ear ovhe eh (p 
/JLT] KaKOP Tt yejopep rj yeprjo-erai {Phil,), ^Eyco he rjp 
LTTTreveLP pLa^co, orap pbep eirl rod lttttov jepcopLai, ra rod 
liTTTOKePTavpov hrjTTov^ep ciaTrpd^opLaL (Xen,), 



Exercise 75. 

263. (1) But, after flinging away all these advan- 
tages, and all but assisting him in securing them for 
himself, by Heavens, shall we then inquire to whom 
these consequences are owing ! Yes ; for we shall not 
allow that we are ourselves in fault ; that I well know : 
for even in the dangers of the field not one of those 
who run away accuses himself, but every man) laj^s 
the blame on the general, on those about him, or any 
body rather than himself ; but, for all that, the defeat 
of the army is due, I presume, to the fugitives collec- 
tively ; for he who now accuses the rest might himself 
have stood his ground, and, if every man did this, they 
would be victorious. 

(2) The Lacedaemonians, on hearing this, did not 
let their anger appear ^o the Athenians (for they had 
not sent their embassy to obstruct their designs, but to 
offer counsel, they said, to their state; and, besides, 
they were at that time on very friendly terms with 



144 



[264. 



them, owing to tlieir zeal against tlie Mede) ; in secret, 
however, they were annoyed at faihng in their wish. 
So the ambassadors of each state returned home with- 
out any complaint being made. 

(3) Meanwhile the Mantineans, and to those to 
whom the truce had been granted, going out under 
the pretext of gathering herbs and fire-wood, secretly 
went away in small parties, picking up at the same 
time the things for which they 'professed to have left the 
camp ; but when they had now proceeded some dis- 
tance from Olpag, they began to retreat*^ at a quicker 
pace. The Ambraciots and the rest, as many as hap- 
pened thus to have gone out with them in a body, 
when they found that they were gone away, them- 
selves also pushed forward, and began running, on 
purpose to overtake them. 



Chap. 15. Ar]Ta. 

264. d) Arjra^ combines a confirmatory force with 
the notion of approval and assent; and serves, like Brj, 
only in a higher degree, to render prominent and more 
exactly define the word which stands before it. It may 
be joined with all the parts of speech, in order to de- 
fine them, whether by extension or restriction of their 
meaning. 

After interrogatives it is either consecutive (i. e. 
relates to a preceding statement) = then ; or assumes in 
an impatient vehement way the answer it confidently 



* Kriiger considers the particle to come from Syf or 5e, and elro. 
Rather the ra in both words is of the same origin. Klotz thinks it 
related to the old indefinite pronoun tos ; so that STjra = jam aliqiid 
tenus ; jam aliqud ratione ; = jam sane ; jam quidem ; jam profecto ; 
jam certe ; since what we assert to he trice somehow or other (though we 
can't tell how), we assert to be certainly true. Hartung thinks the ra 
identical with Ka in avriKa, <fec., and re in rSre, <fec. (ra being ^olic, Ka 
Doric), both being from the old demonstrative pronoun tos, as Trt^re, ttSku ; 
iTo7os, Ko7os., &c. 



265.] 



Arjra, 



145 



expects: sometimes it has tlie force of really^ indeed 
[eacocra Srjrd ere; (Ed. T. 558]. 

c) It is often used witli imperatives {=do^ do pray^ 
&c.) ; and very often in replies (usually with, the repe- 
tition of the word assented to), where it denotes un- 
conditional emphatic assent. It frequently has an ironi- 
cal force (= forsooth), 

d) Also, ?7 Srjra^ sane profecto ; then — really; in- 
deed; ov hrjra^ minime vero ; nequaqiiam ; fir] hrjra^ 
nay do notj &c. ; do not^ do not; koX hr\Ta^ and indeed 
(e. g. in a question which it suddenly occurs to the 
speaker to put with reference to the subject of dis- 
course). 

(Mt; Srjra prohihitio est mm o.ffectu asseverandi, quemadmodum oh 
hriTOL negatio cum asseveratione {Devar.). 

Electra: Ao<; drjra iraTpo<^ rocaSe TC/icopov Sl/crjp 
(Eur.). Mrj Sr/ra hpaarj^ ravrd y' alrovfJiaL cr' eyco. 
— Ti Srjr^ ev oX^cp firj (Ta(f)€l /Se/SrjKore^ Ov ^cofiev o)? 
T^Scara /jltj Xvirov/jLevoL] [Eur.) ^Att^ i-^^^pcov Srjra 
TToWa pLav^dvovaiv ol cro(f)OL {Aristoph,). Tavra St^t' 
dvacr)(€Td; {Soph.) Uvix/SoXaca Se Xiyec^ fcocvcop7]/jLa' 
ra, 7] TL aXXo] — KotvcopTj/jbara S^Jra {PL)* 

Exercise 76. 

265. Socr, What^ you state is a marvellous fact 
and strange, 0 Hippias ; and tell me ° now, is not your 
wisdom able to improve in virtue those who associate 
with it and learn of you) ? 

Hip. Yes, and ("^to improve them) greatly, 0 So- 
crates. 

Socr. But then, whilst you were able to improve 
the children of the Inuceni, were you unable to im- 
prove those of the Spartiates ? 

Hip. Far from it. 

Socr. Then are the Siceliots really anxious to be- 
\ come better, but the Lacedsemonians not anxious ? 

7 

i 



146 



Aio, ScoTrep. 



[266— 26a 



J3vp, Assuredly, I imagine tlie Lacedaemonians 
also are anxious (°for improvement). 

Socr. Did they then shun your company from 
want of money ? 

Hip, Certainly not^ since they have money enough. 

Socr, Then how in the world can it be, that, though 
they are anxious (^for improvement), and have money, 
and you are able to be of the greatest benefit to them, 
they have not sent you away loaded with riches ? 

* In this passage S^ra occurs three times. 



Chap. 16. Al6, ScoTrep. 

266. Alo (=St' o) is wherefore; for which reason. 
Aioirep {=Sv^ oirep) has the same meaning, rendered 
however more emphatic by the addition of the Trep. 

267. Al6 is sometimes followed by /cai, wherefore 
also^ or hr} ; hto 8rjj for which very reason, 

(A very rare meaning of di6irep is propterea quod, because. 'AAV 
oliaaL fxeya rois tolovtols vTrdpx^t x6yQis rj Trap* kKOLCrov ^ov\7}cris, dioirep 
p^ffTov airdvToov iarlu avrhv i^aTrarrja'ai {Dem. 01. 3, 19. So in ^en, 
Mem, 4, 8, 7). 

Exercise 77, 

268. I think that you have often admitted and 
acknowledged that^ there is a twofold method of 
treatment, both with respect to the body and with re- 
spect to the soul ; and that the one is ministerial, by 
which we are enabled to procure food, if our bodies 
are hungry; drink, if they are thirsty; and, if they 
are cold, garments, coverlids, shoes, and all other 
things which our bodies require. And I purposely 
speak to you through the same images, in order that 
you may understand the more easily. For when any 
one supplies these things, being either a retail trades- 
man or a merchant, or a manufacturer of any of them, 



269J 



A LOT I. 



147 



a baker, a cook, a weaver, a slioemaker, or tanner, it is 
not at all surprising tliat such a person should appear, 
both to himself and others, to be concerned in the 
management^ of the body, f that is, to all who are ig- 
norant*^ that, besides all these, there is a gymnastic 
and medicinal art, to which' the ®true management of 
the body really belongs, and whose duty it is to rule 
oyer all these arts, and to use their respective produc- 
tions, through knowing what meats or drinks are good 
and bad for the health of the body, whereas^ all those 
others are ignorant of this ; for lohicli very reason all 
those other arts are servile, ministerial, and base, as 
regards the management of the body, but the gymnas- 
tic art and medicine are justly the mistresses of these. 

* ws ^pa, supra 120. b ^epairda, i. e. the true fostering and cul- 

tivating care of it. ° Travrl jut) cldori. ^ 8e. Cf. 224. 



Chap. 17. Alotc. 

269. Alotl {=SLa TovTo otl) is (a) lecause^ and {IS) 
in indirect questions, wherefore^ why, 

d) ^Tfiei^ Mevcova fxev top /ivXco^pop aireKTeLpaTe 
Slotc TralSa iXev^epop i/c IleWrjpT]^ ecr^ep ip rw fJLV- 
X&PL {Dinarch), 

^Edp t/? fjLOC ^ey?7, Sloti, koXop iaTCP otcovp, 
kt\, {PL Phced. 100, c). But in this passage Baiter 
and Sauppe print St' otl, 

c) In the sense of that {— oVi), ^lon hardly occurs in the best 
writers, but stands Her. 2, 50 : PI. Ep. 1 ; 309. It is also found in a 
letter of Philip' and in a decree in Dem. de Coron. 

Exercise 78. 

270. The next day the thirty Athenian ships, 
and as many of the Corcyraean as were sea- worthy, 
put out and sailed to the harbor at Sybota, in which 



148 



EL 



[270, 271. 



the Corintliians were ancliored, wishing to know 
whether ^ they would engage.^ But they, having put 
out with their ships from the land,^ and formed them 
in line at sea, remained quiet ; not intending volunta- 
rily to begin a battle, since they saw that fresh ships 
from Athens had joined them; and that they them- 
selves were involved in many difficulties, with regard 
to the safe keeping of the prisoners they had on 
board, f and because there were no means of refitting 
their ships ^ in so deserted a place. Nay, they were 
thinking of their voyage home, how they should re- 
turn ; being afraid that the Athenians might consider 
the treaty to have been broken, because they had come 
to blows, and not allow them to sail away. 

* el, which, like our * if,^ is also used in the sense of whether. Cf. next 
Chapter. ^ Cf. Part I. ^ vavs dpapres. The usual form ia 

vavfflu 6.pavT€s. ^ koI iiriaKevrlv ovk ovaav rav vewv' the Kai con- 

necting different constructions. 



Chap. 18. § 1. El, if— whether. 

(The general construction of conditional clauses has been given in 
Part I.) 

271. a) In Attic writers, when two conditional 
clauses are placed in contrast by el (eav) fiev . . . 
{eav) he firj^ in the first such, a general apodosis as 
/caXw earf r)av')(^da(o, &c. {it is well ; well and good; 
be it so, or the like), is sometimes omitted, as contain- 
ing a thought which may be easily supplied, and the 
discourse hastens on to the following more important 
thought. 

b) The verb is sometimes omitted after el, &c. 
Thus in el firj SLd = if it were not for; if it had not 
been for, as in el firj Sea rbv Kvva, but for the dog. 
The verb omitted is usually ifccoXi/^rjv {-^vaav, &c.) 
e. g. eKelva he tovtol^ av irpoarjv, el fxrj hca tovtovs 
(= el firj hca tovtov^ eKcoXv^T] TrpoaelvaL), 



272.] 



EL 



149 



c) So too el /jiT] receives tlie meaning of 7iisi, Ov 
K€\evcro)j el /xr] ^v/i(f)€pop {Th.). 'H/jLlv ovSev iartv 
dya^op aWo el /jlt] oirXa kol dperrj (Xen.^, 



Exercise 79. 

272. (1) And now we have at length.^ both fought 
and won the decisive battle ; we have both Sardis and 
Croesus in our hands, have taken Babylon, and"^° 
borne down all before us ; and ° yet by ^ Mithras ! yes- 
terday if I had not used my fists against several per- 
sons, I should not have been able to get near you. 
f When' however ^ you had taken me by the hand, and 
bade me stay by you, then I was at once^ an object of 
envy, because I passed the whole day with you fast- 
ing ! ISTow, therefore, if it can be any how managed, 
that those who have been the most deserving may 
have the greatest share of you (°well and good) ; but, 
if not,® I am ready to make a proclamation once again^ 
in your name, to the effect) that all should quit you 
except us, your original friends. 

(2) Beginning from childhood, they both teach and 
admonish them as long 'as they live. For as soon as 
any one understands what is said, nurse, mother, ped- 
agogue, and the father himself, vie with each other in 
this, hovf the boy may become as good as possible ; in 
every word and deed teaching and pointing out to 
him that this is just, and that unjust; this is honora- 
ble, and that base ; this is holy, and that unholy ; and 
this you must do, and that you must not do. And if 
the boy obeys willingly^ it is well ; but if not,® like a 
tree twisted and bent, they make him straight by 
threats and blows. 

* ]^ow at leDgtli — vvv Zt]. ^ ' dixit non vri, quia negat ... ad 
Cyrum accedere potuisse nisi puguis cum multis cercasset' {Bornemann), 
c eVei 76 (196) ^eVroi (184). ^^y^^ e 5^ See 273 

' irdXiv au, 136. 



150 



El. 



[273, 



Exercise 80. {el fxr] Sid,) 

273. (1) And from this delay, ArcHdaimis incur- 
red the greatest censure, though, he had, f even while 
the war was gathering,^ f been thought to show a 
want of spirit,^ and to favor the Athenians, by not 
heartily recommending hostilities. And again, after 
the army was mustered, the stay that was made at the 
Isthmus, and his slowness on the rest of the march, 
f gave occasion for charges against him,^ but most of all 
his stopping at CEnoe. For the Athenians during this 
time were carrying in their property, and the Pelo- 
ponnesians thought, that by advancing against them 
quickly they would have found every thing still out, 
but for his dilatoriness. 

(2) Again, tell me with respect to Cimon. Did 
not they whom he took care of, pass a sentence of 
ostracism upon him, in order that they might not hear 
his voice for ten years ? And did they not do the 
very same to Themistocles, and beside punish him 
with exile? And did they not sentence Miltiades, 
the conqueror at Marathon, to be thrown into the pit;^ 
and would he not have ° actually been thrown into it 
but for the president of the Prytanes?^ 

* Koi iy ry ^vuayooyjj rod TroXcfxov. ^ Bokcou /LLaXaKSs elvai (the 

infin. and partcp. of the present (as they are usually called) belong to 
the imperfect also, and may have its meaning of a pluperf. eveji after the 
present. Kr. * die^aXev avT6v by prosopopoeia. ^ ^dpa^pou, 

a gulf or pit at Athens, behind the AcropoUs, into which prisoners were 
thi'owu. e The president {iTTLCTdrrjs) of the Prytanes is here called 

6 npvTavis. 



Chap. 18. § 2. (e^ 8k 

274. a) The form el Se firi (sin minus)^ hut if not^ 
often occurs withoat a verb ; e. g. after /xaXiara fxev 
(properly, potissimum quidem^) if possible; of the 
thing to be done hy preference.^ if it can be done. 



274, 275.] 



El. 



151 



MaXto-ra fiev evp€Trj<^ yiyvov twv /SeXTLcrrcov* 
el Se /JLij, fjit/jiov ra irapa roh dXXot^ 6p^a)9 €)(pvTa 
(Isocr.), 

b) This el Se firj, having become a standing formu- 
la, was often used after eav fxev (where one should 
expect eav Se ixrj). Also after negative notions it is 
found introducing the opposite supposition (though this 
is here affirmative, and would be introduced by el Se, 
if the verb were repeated) ; the strict opposition being 
neglected from its haying become the regular office of 
el Se firj to express, hut on the contrary supposition; 
otherwise. 

^Eav fjuev TL vfJLLV Sofcco Xeyecv dXrj^e^j ^vvo/jLoXo'y)]- 
aare* el Se fir), vravrl Xoyw avrtreLvere {PL). 

c) The notion indicated by el Se ^jlt) is often not 
opposed to any preceding one stated in words (intro- 
duced by el [A^eV]), but to one that is merely implied 
by the statement previously made. 

^ AiTTjiei ra ')(p7]fjLaTa' el Se fjurj, TToXefirjcreLv e^r] 
avTOL<^ {^en.), IIoXefjLov ov/c eccov iroLelv el Se fjurj, 
Kal avTol avayKacr^rjaecT^aL e^acrav ^LXov^ iroiela^aL 
01)9 ov ftovXovrac (Th,), 

Exercise 81. 

276. (1) With respect to our own ancestors, no 
man can prove that in the long succession of previous 
ages they attempted to subject to themselves any city, 
whether small or great ; whereas all men know, that 
the Lacedaemonians, ever since they came into the 
Peloponnesus, have, in all their actions and all their de- 
liberations, made it their sole object to subject to 
themselves, if possible, the whole Greek nation, but 
at all events the Peloponnesians. 

(2) After she had told me every thing, I said : ' fBe 
sure not to tell a soul of this:^ if you do, no i3art of 
our agreement will stand. But I expect you to give 
me ocular proof of your assertions ; for I don't want 



152 



El. 



[276 



words, but ^ desire that the fact should be openly dis- 
covered, if ^ it is as you say.' 

(3) These actions, 0 men of Athens, are noble ac- 
tions to record, an honor to those who performed 
them, and the imperishable glory of our state : not ^so 
however what Leocrates has done, but ° rather he has 
voluntarily sullied with disgrace the glory that our 
city has accumulated from the earliest ages. If there- 
fore you put him to death, you will be reputed by all 
the states of Greece to hate such actions, as much as 
they do; but, if not, you will both rob your fore- 
fathers of their ancient glory, and inflict a great 
injury upon your fellow-citizens. 

* Sa7/ : ' (° see) that no man (^TjSeis av^pcJoiroov) hears of this.' ottws 
IJ.7] c. futuro indicativi. Part 1. 287. Gr. 799. ^ ctircp. 



Chap. 18. § 8. {el firj.) 

276. The particles el fjirj often stand without a 
verb, in the sense of nisi. 

In this sense they may follow negatives: ovrc, ovSeL<;, 
ovSel^ aXXo9, &c. (as aXX rj^ aXXd, or r/ do. Cf. 53) ; 
or an interrogative that implies a negation. 

a) Ov KeXevaoy el f^rj ^viuL(f)epov (Th.). [Compare 
our use of unless ; e. g. donH do it unless convenient to 
yourself.] 

^HfjLLV ovhev eariv dya^ov dWo el fi^ oifXa 
Kai aperr/ 

Exercise 82. 

277^ The Athenians, therefore, when preparations 
had been made on each side, both by deeds and words, 
sailed in the night to Minoa, an island off Megara, 
with six hundred heavy-armed, under the command 
of Hippocrates, and posted themselves in an excavated 



278.] 



EL 



153 



piece of ground, from wliicli they used to make their 
bricks for the walls, ^ and ^which^ was not far off; 
while the troops, with Demosthenes, the other com- 
mander, consisting of light-armed Plat^ans, besides 
peripoli,^ placed themselves in ambuscade in the 
ground consecrated to Mars, which was at a less dis- 
tance. Now no one was aware of this but those who 
were charged with the execution of it. When day 
was about to dawn, the traitors amongst the Megareans 
did as follows. They had for a long time past used 
means to secure the opening of the gates, and with the 
consent of the ofl&cer in command, in the guise of pri- 
vateers, to carry on a cart during the night a boat 
worked by sculls^ along the trench down to the sea, 
and so sail out ; and before it was day they brought it 
again on the cart, and took it as far as the wall through 
the gates ; that the Athenians in Minoa,^ as they pre- 
tended,^ might not know what precautions to take, no 
boat being visible in the harbor. 

* To make bricks for the walls, Tr\tj/^6V€LV ra reixVj ^ construction 
hardly to be found elsewhere (Kr.). ^ Kai without o. koI 

€T€poi TTcpLTToXoi. Cf. ^x^^ J^aGs eTEpus Kvpou TTe^Te Koi e^Kocriu (Xen. An. 
1, 4) alias naves quce Cyri erant — praeterea Cyri naves (^r.). The 
Peripoli were the young men from ten to twenty. Cf. Gr. Antiqq. 
Gr. 1433. Jelf, § 645. « Sr? supra, 233, d. 



Chap. 18. § 4. {el /it] el.) 

278. When el fiTj has the meaning of except^ an- 
other el is sometimes subjoined; thus el fjurj el = nisi 
si; except if^ unless: the predicate of el firj -being 
omitted. 

')(p7]ijLaTtcrTLKo<; Trpo? to /cepSacvetv rrjv rov rtfid" 
a^at TjSovrjv t) rrjv rov /xav^dvetv ovSevb<; a^iav ^rjaeo^ 
el firf el rt^ avrcop apjvpcov iroLel {PI-)* 



154: 



El. 



[27a 



Exercise 83. 

279. Socr. "Well theiij if these things are true, 
Polus, what is the great utihty of rhetoric? For, 
from what has been now agreed on, every one ought 
especially to beware of acting unjustly, in the belief 
that (^by so acting) he will sustain great evil. Is it 
not so ? 

Pol. Certainly. 

Socr, And if a man has committed injustice, either 
himself, or any one else for whom he has regard, he 
ought of his own accord to betake himself thither, 
where a^ soon as possible he will be punished, to a 
judge as to a physician, taking every pains lest the dis- 
ease of injustice becoming inveterate should render 
the soul corrupt and incurable; for what must we 
say, ^ Polus, if^ our former admissions are to stand? 
Do not these things necessarily harmonize with the 
former in this, but in no other way ? 

Pol, For what else can we say, Socrates ? 

Socr, For the purpose, then, of excusing injustice, 
our own, or that of our parents, or friends, or chil- 
dren, or country, when it acts unjustly, rhetoric is of 
no use to us at all, Polus [nor is it of any use], unless 
any one supposes that he ought especially to accuse 
himself, and afterwards his relatives, and any other of 
his friends, who may have acted unjustly, and not con- 
ceal the crime, but bring it to light, in order that he 
may be punished, and restored to health ; moreover, 
that he should compel both himself and the others to 
lay aside fear, and with his eyes shut, and in a manly 
way, deliver himself up, as to a physician, to be cut 
and cauterised, pursuing the good and the beautiful, 
without paying any regard to what is painful ; if he 
has committed a wrong worthy of stripes, delivering 
himself up to be beaten ; if of bonds, to be bound ; if 
of a fine, to pay it ; if of exile, to be banished ; if of 
death, to die ; being himself the first accuser of him- 



280—283.] 



EL 



155 



self, and others liis relatives ; not sparing either him- 
self or them, but employing rhetoric for this very pur- 
pose, that^ the crimes being exposed, they may be 
freed from the greatest of evils, injustice. Shall we 
say thus, Polus, or not ? 

* ^ TTws \€yofjLei/ ; {iroos Xeyoo/jLeu est deliherantis, quid dicendum sit ; 
TTwy Aeyojuev autem qucerentis^ quid dicatur ac statuatur. SfoJlbaum.) 
^ eiirep (= siquidem). 



Chap. 18. § 5. {el /caL koX el.) 

280. Ei /cai, etsi, although; but sometimes, even if, 
Kal el = even if (etiam si; vel si; etiam tum^ si): here 
the even^ preceding the supposition^ marks it as an im- 
pi'obahle and extreme condition, or, at all events, as the 
most unfavorable that can well be conceived. 

281. Hartung says that in koI el the Kai (as in 
KaiTrep) has a heightening effect^ and this force affects 
only the hypothesis or conditional particle ; whereas 
in el Kai the fcal has not any heightening effect ; the 
particles imply no ascensio in majus; and moreover the 
force of the particle affects the lohole contents of the con- 
cessive clause^ not merely the conditional particle. 

282. Hartung also objects to Hermann's state- 
ment, that Kal el leaves it doubtful, whether the sup- 
position really exists or is merely assumed, whereas el 
Kai signifies that the thing really is as we say, Klotz 
defends Hermann ; but the example in the first ex- 
tract of the following Exercise at once disproves the 
notion, for Demosthenes there uses el Kai^ though the 
supposition is pointedly stated to be inconsistent with 
the fact. 

283. a) Sauppe says: Utraque {Kal el et el kuC) 
exprimunt ei rei quae periodo primaria continetur 
aliquid repugnare, sed cam nihilominus vel esse vel 
fieri. Kal el vero effiiciunt, ut ea sola res, qu(B 
periodo conditionali profertur, repugnare videatur: 



156 



El. 



[284, 285. 



prseposita particula conditionali (e^ /cai) efficituPj ut rea 
aliqua, qu^ cum aliis compluribus {/cat) vel sit vel esse 
possit, repugnare, sed nihil valere dicatur, Ita koI el 
particulge vim eorum, quae sequuntur, yalde adaugentj 
el Kai minus efferunt : quanquam apparet el Kal SEepe 
in locum particularum Kai el substitui posse {Sauppe^ 
ad Dem. 01 2, 19). 

T?}^ r^Tj^ Kparovvre^j Kal el ^aXdrrij^ eipjotvro, 
hvvaivT^ av Ka\o)<; Sia^rjv {Xen^), 'Hjelro dvSpb^ elvai 
dja^ov od^eXelv rovs <pL\ov<i, Kai ec fjL7]Sel^ pueWoi 
etaea^ab {Lys^. Kal el pL7]Seva dv^pcairayv rjaj^yvoVj 
Tovs ^eovs e^pyjv cr^ SeScevat {Lys,y Mrj drtfidcrco/jiev 
elirelv, el Kai rep afiCKporepov SoKel ecvac (PL). Td 
hiKaca Trdvre^^ edv Kal p^rj ^ovKcovrac, alcr'^^vvovrac prj 
TTpdrrecv {Dem.y 

284. b) I own that I cannot perceive any certain 
distinction beyond this, that the Kac in Kal el adds 
emphasis to the whole contents of the conditional 
clause ; in the Kal it usually points out a particular 
notion in the supposition, whether as opposed to the 
true state of the case or not. 

In el Kal (like etsi) the Kac (as also p^rjSe after el) 
often relates to some following notion : e. g. Herod. 5^ 
8 : el Kal ^A'^rjvacoc, siquidem etiam Atlienienses. 

Exercise 84. 

285. (1) We must look to the truth, not to the 
contrivances by which men like you patch up a plau 
sible story. Besides, good heavens! suppose it were 
ever so true that you had paid the portion (which you 
have not) who is to blame for that ? Yourselves ; for 
you took my property as a security. Did not Aphobus 
take possession of my estate (for which judgment was 
given against him) ten whole years before he became 
your brother-in-law? And was it right tnat you 
should recover every thing, while I, who have obtain- 
ed a judgment; an oppressed orphan, and the loser of 



286.] 



157 



a real portion, who alone of all mankind ought to 
have been exempted from the risk of costs, am thus 
reduced to distress, and have recovered nothing at all, 
though I have been ready to accede to any terms of 
your own proposing that were fair and reasonable ? 

(2) I know that the king would grant even the 
Mysians many guides, and give them many hostages, 
as a security to conduct them out of his territories 
without fraud ; that would level roads for them, ^ aye 
even if they insisted upon being sent away in chariots. 
And I know ^too that for us he would do all this wdth 
the utmost alacrity, if he saw us preparing to settle in 
his country. 

(3) 0 EryximachuS; it is fair that you should 
either stop my hiccup or speak for me, till it is over. 
And they tell me) that Eryximachus replied: ^ Well, 
I will do both ; for I will speak in your turn, and you, 
when you have done ^hiccuping, shall speak in mine. 
And, whilst I am speaking, hold your breath for a 
long time together, and if your hiccup chooses to stop, 
well and good, but if not, gargle your throat with 
water ; but, if by chance it is very violent, take some- 
thing to tickle your nostrils with, and make yourself) 
sneeze ; and if you do this two or three times, even if 
it is exceedingly violent, it will stop.' 'You can't 
begin your speech too soon,' said Aristophanes; *and 
I will do what you tell me.^ 



Chap. 18. § 6. (oiS' el. et rt?, &c.) 

286. a) In ovSe el {idv), fxrjhe el (edv), it is only 
the connective particle which the ovSe or juTjSi involves, 
that belongs to the conditional particle ; the negative 
belonging to the principal clause. So that, e. g. ouS' 
el = Kal 6t . . . ou. In other words, the particles =6;i;e7i 
if^ with a not, that must be carried to the verb of the 
apodosis. 



158 



Ei. 



[287—289. 



01 fifj '^prjcrdfjievoc rot? KaLpOL<? op^w, ouS' €t av- 
ve/Stj Ti irapa tcov ^ecov ')(^prj<jTov^ fJbvrjfjLovevovaiv {Dem,). 
OvS^ av S6/cd/ct<; airo^dvrj ^LkLiriro^^ ovhev /xaXXov 
v/jL€l<^ ye Kivrjcrecr^e {Dejn,). 

287. h) The negative of el Kai is el /j/rjSe. 
There is often an ellipse of such a notion as to see, 

to try, &c. before el, et ircos^ edv irm {if any how), el 
TTov {rrorey &c,), if haply, 

MeXrj(TL7nrov . . . diTO(TTeWec eh rds ^A^yvas, ec re 
a pa fiaXkov evhoiev oi ^A^rjvaiot ktK, {Th,) TIpo^v- 
fjbia re irday e')(^pS)VTO . , . et tt co 9 . . . eXocev to rec- 
XtcTfJia (Th,), 

288. c) Ei T69 {tl, &c.) frequently implies no doubt 
with respect to the existence of the object in question, 
but is nearly equivalent to ocrrt? (whoever, whatever). 

(Of course eif ns may be, and often is, used in the strict sense of 
* if any:) 

Exercise 85. 

289. (1) To this Phalinus replied: ^The king is of 
opinion that he has conquered, since he has killed 
Cyrus ; for who is there, who now contends with him 
for the empire ? He looks upon you also as his pro- 
perty^ since he has you in the middle of his country, 
surrounded by impassable rivers, and can bring against 
you such a host that, even if he were to allow you to 
slay them, you would not be able to do it. 

(2) "When Anaxibius arrived, by land he assembled 
a body of mercenary troops, and wrested some of the 
^olian cities from Pharnabazus. He also requited 
the cities that had marched against Abydos by ^ now 
marching against them, and proceeded to invade and 
lay waste their territory. Moreover, he manned three 
ships at Abydos, in addition to those he had, and put 
to sea with them, to try whether he could any where 
meet with and capture any vessel of the Athenians or 
their allies. 



290—292.] 



159 



Chap. 19. Eiirep (a\\' elirep), 

290. Etirep (si omnino) is only el strengthened by 
Trep. It calls attention to tlie condition, and so adds 
emphasis to it. The condition introduced by eiirep 
may be one that is douhted {if really^ if indeed?) ; or a 
restrictive or corrective condition (^if that is ; at least f) ; 
or it may be strongly affirmed^ with a view to point out 
the certainty of the consequence that is said to follow 
the realization of the condition. 

291. After eiirep (especially after eiirep irore, and 
d\X\ eiirep)^ there is often an ellipse ; which may al- 
ways be supplied by a tense of the verb in the princi- 
pal sentence, or by a verb expressing some more gener- 
al notion suggested by it, 

^■qpX helv e^eXiiaaL eiirep irore, Kal vvv (De'/n.), 
OvSev yap irapa TTjV avrov iracr^ei, j3ov\riaLv, cocne 
ovic aSi/celraCj Std ye tovto, dX\' ecirep, ^Xdirrerai 
fjL6vov = but at most only hurt [i. e. dW' eiirep tl irda- 
'Xec, /SXairreraL [lovov]. Arisi. Eth. v. 296. Trjv ap.- 
ireXov ov (paac Becv i) diroKovieiv rj oXco^ dirrear^ai 
irep/cd^ovTO^ rod /Sorpvo^j dXX\ ecirep, orav dirop^e- 
Xav^fi^^ i. e. hutii at all, only ichen: [^uod si quando id 
faciendum sit, turn certe dernurn quuni iiva nigrcc jam 
fuerit.'] Theoph. Plant. 11. 

Eo:ercise 86. 

292. (1) Grentlemen, jovl may infer from another 
strong circumstance, that Aphobus lived with his wife, 
and has continued to do so to this hour. :{:The lady, 
f before her union with him,^ did not remain a day 
single, but left a living husband (Timocrates) to come 
to him ; whereas now, we see that, in a period of three 
years, she has not married any other man. iSTow^ who 
can believe, that on the former occasion she went 
straight from one man to another, to avoid living 
single ; and that now {if she is really divorced) she 



160 



E Ira, 



eireira. 



[293. 



would have endured to remain single for so long 
time, when it was in her power to get a new husband, 
her brother possessing so large a fortune, and she her- 
self being so young ? 

(2) This very thing was then mentioned, that there 
must always be in our state something that has the 
same regard for the constitution which you, the legisla- 
tor, had, when you enacted the laws. ^ Yes ; that was 
mentioned,' said he, ^Yes; but,' said I, 4t was not 
made sufficiently clear, owing to the fear of what you 
objected, when you showed also that the illustration 
of this would be both tedious and diflS.cult; for, in- 
deed, it is not quite easy to discuss what remains.' 
' What is that ?' 'In what manner a state is to under- 
take the study of philosophy, so as not itself to be de- 
stroyed ; for all great pursuits are dangerous ; and, as 
the saying is, noble objects are difficult indeed.' ' But 
still,' rejoined he, 4et our demonstration be completed 
by making this evident.' 'Want of inclination,' said 
I, ' will not hinder me ; but, if any things want of 
power [or, hut at most^ want of power only] ; and now 
vou shall at once be convinced of my readiness.' 

» Say : ' before she came to (ws) Aphobus.' ^ koutol. 



Chap, 20. Elra, eireira. 

293. a) Elray eireira, ilien^ thereupon: in enumera- 
tions, = cZemcfe, UpcoTov {fxev) . . . elra (Se), or eTretra 
{he), &c. ; the opposition being sharper when the 5e is 
omitted {Kr.')^ which it is more commonly than not.^ 

This seems to me a correcter view than that of Klotz, who says : 
*E?ra simplex ordinem ac seriem tantummodo indicat, elra Se quan- 
dam oppositionis significationem in se continet.' 



Thus in Dem. it is very rarely expressed. K, 



294—297.] 



Elra, eireira. 



161 



h) So also elra {eTretra) are sometimes Avitliout Si 
in tneir temporal sense, =a?itZ then; e.g. S^c^Sepa? — ■ 
eTTLfjiTrXacrav '^oprou Kov(pov, elra avvrjyov ktX. {Xen, 
An. 1, 10.) 

294. "EiTTeLTa^ elra {=nextj in the next place)^ some- 
times refer to fjiaXiara fjbh {principally^ especially^ 
above all), Cf. Soph. (Eel Tyr, 647. In Th. 6, 16 ; i^ev 
fiaXiara — eTreura he. MaXicrra fxev — elra fievTOL 
(Bern, de Cor. 278). - 

295. Elra and eTrecra (= cleinde^ p)Ost talia) are nsed 
in questions that imply surprise at what is felt to be 
strange and inconsistent; the ground of the surprise 
having been stated or implied in what jDrecedes the • 
question. 

Ev ta^L^ e(f)7]^ ore, el vofiL^OL/jLt S-eou? dv'^pcoTrcop tl 
(ppovTL^ecv^ ovfc av afxeXoLrjv avrcov. ^ETveiT^ ov/c 

otec ^povTL^eiv] ot rrpoiTov fiev fiovov rchv (^cocov av^pco- 
TTov op^ov aveaTTjaav fcrX. (Xen.) — Often Kara KciTreL- 
ray which are more emphatic. KaTrena tolovtov 
ovra ov (^uXel^ avTov] (Xen^ 

296. After a participle, the particles elra {Kara), 
GTrecra {fcaTreira) are often added to the predicate of 
the sentence (with the force of nevertheless ; noticith- 
standing ; for all that; after all). The elra, eTrecra pro- 
perly denote sequence in time (= then) ; but in this con- 
struction imply strangeness or inconsistency in the 
agent's doing the second action, v:hen (or cfter) he had 
done the first. 

^TTTO^epievo^ aco(}>poavv7]v elvac to ra eavrov Trpdr- 
reiv eTrecra ouSeV ^7;<76 /ccoXveLV /cal tou9 tcl rcov 
dXXcov Trpdrrovra^ crcocppovelv {PI-)* 

Exercise 87. . 

297. (1) First then, I tvt.11 proye by w^itnesses that 
he made this will, not from having any cause of com- 
plaint against us, but in consequence of a quarrel be- 
tween him and Dinias ; next, that, when Dinias was 



162 



[297. 



no more, he superintended all our affairs, and gave us 
an education in his house, to which he had removed 
us ; and, thirdly, that he sent Posidippus for the magis- 
trate, who, however, far from fetching him himself, 
actually sent away Archonides when he came to the 
door. Call those who will prove the truth of my as- 
sertion. 

(2) Are you so clever, that you can make just 
what use you please of the laws ; or so powerful as to 
feel sure that those you have wronged will never ob- 
tain satisfaction at your hands ? And are you not then 
ashamed of being so senseless as to look for advan- 
tages, not from the actual services that you have ren- 
dered to the statCj but from the injuries that you have 
inflicted upon it with impunity ? 

(3) Come, then, let me read you also the several 
attestations of those public offices^ that I have dis- 
charged ; and, in return, do you read those verses that 
you spoilt (°in the delivery) — 

* Forth from the deep abyss behold I come,^ 
And from the gates of darkness 

and 

* Know that unwillingly I woes announce 

and 

^0 fin the first place and above all,^ may the gods 
— and then may all these (**your fellow-citizens) cut 
you off by a miserable death, like a bad citizen as you 
are, and a traitor, and f an actor of third-rate charac- 
ters!'® 

* KeLTovpylas Xcirovpyuu, i. e. ' to discharge the liturgies (state-bur- 
dens or public charges).' ^ Say : ' I am come, having left the 
abyss and gates of darkness.' This is to be expressed in one Iambic 
Trimeter. « Say : ' Know that I not willingly (^r; ^eAoji/) bear ill 
tidings {KaKayy^\e7py To be an Iambic Trimeter. ^ fxaXicrTa. [liv. 
^ rpiTayccuicTT'fjs, the thii'd actor, whose parts, of course, were less im- 
portant and difficult ones. 



298—302.] 



Eire. 



163 



Chap. 21. Ehe, 

298. ELT€ = sive: edv re {rjv re or av re) being 
used where idv {ijv, av) would be used for el, 

Eire — elre ^ {idv re — idv Te)=sive — sive (the whether 
• — or ; either — or), of indifference ; the speaker leaving it 
undecided which supposition he assumes to be the true 
one. 

AiKacov elV dya^op ecre (j)avXov to ap^eiv^ irdv- 
Ta<; avrov /jLere^^ecv {Aristot.). 'O dja^o^ dvrjp aco- 
(f)pcov cbv Kol hiKato^ evSaL/xcov iarl koI /la/cdpco^, idv 
T€ fieya^ koI l(j')(yp6^^ edv re afiLKpbs fcal da^evrjs 27> 
KOL edv ifXovrfi kol firj (-P/.). 

299. The particles are sometimes preceded by 
oTTorepa : e. g. Xen. Hell. 3, 5, 9. 

300. The following forms also are sometimes used: 
viz. : etre — el Se (sive — si vero)^ when the second mem- 
ber contains something opposed to the first : ecre — r;. 

Eire Avaia^ r] tls aXXo^ TrcoTTOTe eypa^jreVj ovei- 
So9 T(p ypd(f)ovTti ecre rk c^rjcnv etre jxr} {PL), 

Etre but once for etre . . . eire is mostly poetic : \6yoi(riv dr * ^pyoi- 
u-LV {Soph. CEd. R. 517); but eav tls acsfi^ \6yoLs dr' epyois. 6 irapa- 

301. The particles etre — etre occur also in indirect 
questions. El — ehe is rare (Anab. 6, 4, 20 ; and PI. 
Legg. 878, 952 : cf Crat. 424). 

302. In the meaning a7id if it is better to write €^ re, wliicb, like 
iju re, sometimes refers to a preceding ovr^ {Kr.). 



^ The second particle, or both, often take /cat, oZv, or Stj. The fol- 



Icwinor forms and combinations occur : — 



Kal 
eXre /cat 



err* 
err' 



ovv 
ovv 



elfre 

ELT 



i/ 9 

J/ 

etre 




Tvn. 21, b] 



6iTe 



6.pa 

ap^ ovv 
(Kai). 

dr,. 



[PL 



164 



Eire 



[303- 



Exercise 88. 

308. (1) They cannot say it was poverty that pre 
vented their making an immediate transfer ; for Timo- 
crates has an estate of more than ten talents, and 
Onetor above thirty ; this then conld not have been 
the canse. Nor can they allege that they had valuable 
property, but no ready money ; or that the lady was a 
widow, and therefore they hurried on the marriage 
• without paying her portion at once. For, in the first 
place, these men lend a great deal of money to other 
people ; and, secondly, the lady was not a widow, but 
was living with Timocrates, and removed from his 
house, when they gave her away to Aphobus. This 
last excuse, therefore, it is plain, cannot be received. 
And I think, gentlemen of the jury, you will all agree 
upon this point, — that any man, contracting such an 
alliance, would rather borrow of another than not pay 
his sister's portion to her husband. For, in the latter 
case, he is esteemed as a debtor who is not certain to 
perform his engagements ; whereas, if he gives away 
the lady and her money together, he becomes indeed 
a brother-in-law and a friend ; he has then acted an 
honorable part, and is not looked upon with mistrust. 

(2) Then Xenophon said: 'Would you consent 
(pl)j 0 Medosades, to leave it to the people in whose 
country we are (since you say they are your friends), 
to determine by their votes which party ought ^ to 
leave it, you or we ? This he refused, but urged, as the 
best thing to he done^ that the two Lacedemonians should 
go to Seuthes themselves about the pay, and said it 
was his opinion Seuthes would hearken to them ; hut^ 
if they did not approve of that^ he recommended them 
to send Xenophon with him, assuring them of his co- 
operation ; and he ° also begged they would not burn 
the villages. Upon this, they sent Xenophon with 
such persons as were thought most proper to attend 
him. 



304—306.] 'Eirei, eVetSj?. 165 

TTpoa-riK^yy which (according to Thorn. Mag.) is an Attic idiom for 



Chap. 22. 'Eirel, iTrecSij. • 

304. a) *E7r6i, eVeiS?} [which become with au, iirdu or iirrju and 
^TretSar, of which the last is far the more common, and eVav somewhat 
more common than iirrju, Kr.l are properly particles of time {when ; 
after ; posiquam) ; but, like most particles of time, also denote cause, 
since {puisque), quoniam. 'ETrel (eVeiS??) rdx^crra, (fee. = as soon as; 
as soon as ever. 

h) Both are also since {ex quo) of time. 

Ov iroXvs XP^^^^ eTreiS^ Xirwvas Xlvqvs iTravcravTO (popovpres {PI.) 
[See Part. I.]. 

305. ^'Particula eVe/ cum aliis conjuncta particulis 
has fere significationes liabet : 



iireL Tot,^ nam prof edo. 
irrei ye, quandoquidem, 
lirei Toi Ka'i^^ nam certe qui- 
dem (H.) ; \nam jprofecto 
etiam ; enim vero etiam 
(S.)]. 



iTreiTrepj quum semel^ quan- 

do semel. 
eTTeiirep ye, quandoquidem 
semel, 

eTreihrj ye, quoniam qui- 

demy (H.) 
eVet ye St;, quum quidem 
jam (KL). 

306. ^Eirei {=for if not ; for oiherioise ; for if so^ 
&c.) is sometimes used argumentatively, where el he 
iJb7]y or, after negative propositions, el Se, might be 
employed. The particle does not really change its 
meaning of quando quidem^ but there is an ellipse of a 
conditional sentence, such as if you douht it; if you 
thinJc 50, &c. 



* Most of these forms (which are placed here for convenience of re- 
ference) will be illustrated in later Exercises. On eVei ye, c£ 195, sqq. 

^ "Facile concedimus Porsono (ad Med. 6Y5) in hac quidem formula 
illud {ye) arbitranti nusquam post Toi insertum reperui " (>S^. ad Hipp. 
Maj. 288, c). 



166 



[307. 



Ovfc oXet e^ekrfKejj^aii & ^co/cpare^, orav rocavra 
\ejr]^i a ouSel? av ^rjaeiev av^pcoTTCov ; iirel epov riva 
TOVTcov {PI'). Nocrov yap 6 irarrjp clWokotov avrov 
voaeLj "^Hv ov8^ av eh jvoltj ttot' ouS' av ^vfji/SaXot, Ei 
/jif] TTv^ot^^ r]iio)V^ eirel roTrd^ere {Aristoph,), 

Exercise 89. 

307. (1) Euc. As I was going down to the port, I 
met with. Thesetetiis, who was being carried from the 
camp at Corinth to Athens. 

Ter. Alive or dead? 

Euc, Alive, though scarcely so ; for he is in a bad 
state from several wounds, though he suffers more from 
the disease that is prevalent in the army. 

Ter, Is it dysentery ? 

Euc, Yes. 

Ter. What a man you speak of as being in danger ! 

Euc, An honorable and good man, Terpsion ; for 
indeed even^ now I heard some persons highly extolling 
his conduct in the battle. 

Ter, Nor is that surprising ; but it would be much 
more wonderful if he had not behaved so. But^ why 
did he not stop here at Megara ? 

Euc, He was hastening home ; although I begged 
and advised him, yet he would not. 

(2) They ratified these oaths by the sacrifice of a 
boar, a bull, a wolf, and a ram, whose blood being 
poured into the hollow of a shield,*^ the Greeks dipped 
a sword therein, and the Barbarians a spear. When 
they had pledged their faith, Clearchus said, — ^ Come 
now, 0 Aria3us! since your route and ours are the 
same, say, what is your opinion concerning our march ? 
Shall we return the same way we came, or have you 
thought of any other more convenient?' 

^ eTrei tol Koi vvv (the instance being given as a proof of the fact). 
^ What is the Greek particle for hut when it introduces a questioc 
that suddenly occurs to a speaker? (126, 12Y.) 
« Say : ' having slain a bull, (fee. into a shield.' 



308—310.] 



"Etc. 



167 



Chap. 23. "Etc. 

308. "Etl^ yet^ stilly further, 

309. OvKeTL^ /ji7]K6TL, olo Taore^ no longer. In the 
progress of an argumentj these particles denote that 
what has been previously said no longer holds good ; the 
case now arrived at being of a different character. 
The particles are then sometimes printed separately. 

TavTa [Jiev ovv TrdvTa o/jlolco^ dfJb^oTepwv iaTiv • 
aWa TO iJbd')(€a^aL ovKeTi (or ovfc €tl) dfi(poT€p(op 
{Xen,), TovTO fiev . . . Trdvv cruy^cypw . . . aXX'. 6pa9, 
eKelvo ye ovk av €tc 7reiaaL<^ dv^pcoTTcov ovSeva (^e/i.). 

Exercise 90. 

310. (1) It was on such grounds and with such rea- 
sons, Lacedaemonians and allies, that we revolted; 
suflS.ciently clear ones for those who hear them to judge 
that we acted rightly, and sufficiently strong ones to 
alarm us, and make us betake ourselves to some means 
of safety; which indeed we wished to do long ago, 
when we sent to you, while the peace yet lasted, on the 
subject of our revolting, but were prevented by your 
not receiving us into alhance. But now, when the 
Boeotians invited us, we immediately listened to their 
proposals, and thought that we should withdraw our- 
selves in a twofold manner, — from the Greeks, so as 
not to join in injuring them in company with the 
Athenians, but to join in giving them liberty; and 
from the Athenians, so as not to be ruined by them 
ourselves after the rest, but to be beforehand in acting 
[against them], 

(2) On this account our crews have been wasted, 
and are still wasting ; as some of our seamen, in con- 
sequence of their fetching wood, of foraging, and of 
distant watering, are cut oft' by their cavalry ; while 
our servants, since we have been reduced to an equal 
footing, desert from U5, and those of the foreigners 



168 "H. [311. 

wto went on board, as pressed men, straightway de- 
part to the several cities ; while those, again, who were 
at first elated by the high pay, and supposed that they 
were going to make money rather than to fight, since 
they have unexpectedly seen both the fleet and every 
thing else on the side of the enemy offering resistance 
to us, either leave us on finding some excuse for going 
over to the enemy, or in whatever way they severally 
can (and Sicily is a large country) ; while in some in- 
stances, by engaging in traffic themselves, after per- 
suading the captains to take Hyccarian slaves on board 
in their stead, they have destroyed the perfection of 
our navy. 

(3) And now Grylippus went away into the rest of 
Sicily for forces, intending to raise them both for sea 
and land service ; and, at the same time, to bring over 
any of the cities that was either not hearty in the cause, 
or had hitherto stood entirely aloof from the war. 
Other ambassadors of the Syracusans and Corinthians 
were also sent to Lacedsemon and Corinth, in order 
that a fresh force might be sent over to them, in what- 
ever way might answer best, whether in merchantmen 
or boats, or any how else; since the Athenians too 
were sending for reinforcements. Moreover, the Syra- 
cusans proceeded to man and practise a fleet, for the 
purpose of making an attempt in that way also, and 
were, in other respects, much more full of confidence. 



Chap. 24. "H. 

811. "H, 1) autj vel; 2) an ; 3) quam. "H — r/, aut — 
aut; vel — vel. 

a) The comparative is sometimes used after juloX- 
Xov omitted, or after a positive. This is the case after 
expressions of ivilUng^ clioosing^ and the like, because 
these contain the notion of difference^ separation^ or 
preference: BovXea^aL, i^eXecv, alpelcr^ai, aipeaiv SoO- 



312—314.] "H. 169 

vaL, eTTL^v/jLecv, Se^^ecr^a^, ^rjreip, XvacTeXelv {~potius 
esse), 

ZrjTovcn Kepiaiveiv^ rj i/za? Tret^etv {Lys.). Ayr]- 
(TiKao^ ypeiTO kol avv rw yevvaicp fxeioveiCTeiv^ rj avv too 
uSlkm irXeov €')(eiv {X^en.y Te^vdvat vo/ii^ovaL Xvaure- 
Xelv, Tj ^fjv {Andoc), 

312. h) In the same way it stands not only after 
coviparatives^ but after words tliat express a difference 
{dX\o<;^ oi'Set? dXXo^j aXXolo^y ivavTio<;, i8to<;, 8ia(f)6p(Oy 
Sia(/)opo9), and after all words wMch. have the force of , 
a comparative {pL7rXd(Jio<^y irplvy cj>^dvco^, 

OvBev dXXo avTol iTTLTrjSevovaLV, rj dird^vrjCTKeLV re 
Kol Te^vdvai {Pl.\ Ti) firj yevea^ac iarlv rj Trecpvfce- 
vai Kpelcraov KafcS)^ nrda^ovra {^^Jsch,), "Eart '^VXV 
iToXew^ ovSev erepov rj iroXireLa {Is.), IIoXv ol Xojol 
ovTOL dvTLOL rj ou? eycb r/fcovov (Xen.), Hdvra rdvav- 
Tia v'7Tdp')(ei T0L9 rd aco/jLara ev e^ovcrtv rj to6? Ka/cw 
{Xen^. ^Keyjraa^e tl SovXov rj iXev'^epov elvac Sta^e- 
p€L {Dem.), Aid<j)op6p tl otec iroielv tov<; toZ? v6/jlol<; 
7r€L^o/jL6vov<; ^avXit^cov rj el roi)^ ev rots iroXefJiOi^ evraK- 
Tovvra^ yjreyoL^; ; {J^en.) UpocrelBaXov etc rov/jLTraXtv rj 
ol dvBpe^ avrcov VTrepe/Sacvov (Th.), Kr. 

813. c) The particle ^ occasionally connects different constriictions 
hj which similar notions are expressed. 

*EiraLyovfjL€yot iiaXXov t) toIs ^KKols anacrL xatpere. — *Eu oXiycopia 
iiroLovPTOf ws orav i^eX^uaiu ^ oifx vTro/J-euovj/ras crcpas ^ paStcos X7]^6- 
fi€yoL ^ia {Tlx,). 

314. d) In 7/ — 7/ (as in aut — aut)^ the two members 
are equal; with a single r], unequal (the r}=aut etiam)] 
and there is generally a descensus a major e ad minus : 
virep &v i/ceiVo<; ooero Selv dTro^vr]o-fceiv rj VLfcav {Dem.). 
^ Chabrias maluit pro honoribus sibi decernendis mori, 
ant, si fieri posset^ yincere' (JSand^). 

[The descent is here, not to a less desirable^ but to a Jess probable 
event.] 



1 ( 



Formulas aut nihil aut paidlo et parum aut nihil, sicut ^ /LL-qSep 
t. /jLiKpa {Dem.), et oXiyov ^ ovBev differunt. In altero enim descensus 
apparet, nec facile quis dixerit aut parum aut 7iihil, nisi certS, causS, in- 
tercedente.' Hand, i. p. 537. 

8 



170 



[315, 316. 



315. e) "H in questions, cf. Gr. 1360; in double 
questions, Gr. 1359. 1364: apa . , . r^, 1359, b, Cf. also 
1466. Sometimes after a general and quite indefinite 
question, ^ introduces one which, in the opinion of 
the speaker, is probably very near the truth : or — not. 

Uo^ev 7]/c€L] rj SrjXov ore ajopas] {Pl^ Tk rj 
TraiSeia ; rj ')(aXe7rov evpeiv /SekrLco Tri<; vtto tov ttqWov 
Xpopov evp7]fievrj^] (PZ.) Cf. Elmsl. Soph. (Ed. Col 
66 {Kr). 

On ^ Kara, ^ SJo-re (sometimes ^ tt^Js* ^ ws, cf. Gr. 1338). 



Exercise 91. 

316. (1) As in the persons of young people, who 
have shot up suddenly, so^ as to be very tall, there yet 
appears something childish that betrays their youth ; 
so in Cyrus, it was not an impudence and boldness that 
appeared through that talkativeness, but a simplicity 
and affectionate nature; so that one would desire 
rather to hear yet more from him, than to be with him 
while he held his tongue. 

(2) ' If I had happened to ask you to what class of 
painters Xeuxis belonged, if you had said he is a 
painter of animals, should I not have properly inquir- 
ed of you what animals he paints?' 'Yes.' 'And that, 
for this reason, that there are many other painters who 
paint many other animals T ' Yes.' ' But if, on the 
contrary, no one but Xeuxis painted animals), you 
would have answered well already ? Certainly. 

(3) Why does origanum, if thrown into the must, 
make the wine sweet ? Two half -pints of it are thrown 
into a jar of wine. Is it perhaps because it abstracts 
the watery and feculent portions, which cause harsh- 
ness (^in wines), by imbibing them itself? A proof 
that the harshness is thus caused is this : % wines are 
rendered less mellow by being mixed with water, and 
by being suffered to remain long upon the lees. And, 
when sweet wine is made, the bunches of grapes are 



817—319.] 



171 



exposed to the sun for a long ume, and tlie sun ab- 
stracts the watery particles and mellows all tlie rest. 
Now the origanum has the very same eflfect, for it is 
dry and hot. 

* As — so, oicrirep — ovroi /cat. This /cat is usually, but not always, 
added in comparisons of this kind. See below under /cat. 



Chap. 25. "H. 

817. {profedo) expresses confirmation. To 
strengthen it, fir^v is often added (= assuredly^ in as- 
severations, promises, &c.). 

/3apv ^oprjfi'' av^pcDTTO^ evTV)(0)v a(ppo)V {^sch.). 

TTov TL ydXeiTQv eo-TL TO ^jrevSf] Xiyeiv {2fen.). "O/jl- 
vvfiL croc Tj fiTjV jiTjheiTOTe aoL erepov Xoyov LTTiSeL^eLV 
{■PI')' ' O [xoXoyrjcra^; rj /irjv irei^ecr^aL ovre Trei^erat 

318. ^H^ interrogat cum conjectura verisimili yel 
persuasione (EUendt.). 

Kjiiger says, ' it indicates a doubt^ a struggling against 
the acknowledgment that the thing is so; partly, how- 
ever, only from urhanity ; so that, as in the case of the 
Latin -ne, the answer may be affirmative or negatived 
In many examples I cannot perceive this force. Eost 
says, ' it indicates that the questioner takes a peculiar 
interest in making out the true state of the case.' — 
ovTOC^ ecpT), CO irdirire, iroXefiioL elaiv^ ot e(^eaTr}Kacn tol<; 
LTTTTOL^ rjpefia ; HoXepbLOi fievTOC, ecj^rj {^en.). op^w 
aoL hoKO)^ €(j)^]Vy av elirelv ovrco Xeycov, rj ov ; 'Op^co?, 
€(j)7] (PL). — Very often in connection with other parti- 
cles, e. g. iji7]v, S/;, S?; TTOV, Sfjra^ apa, yap, Kai, ttov, 
TTOV apa, 

319. c) '^H iTov {=6vTco^ TTov) nihil signiflcat aliud 



* Tlje use of ^ in interrogations may be compared ^ith that of our 



172 'H. [320—322. 

nisi ejus, qui loquitur, de re aliqua conjeduram cum 
asseveratione conjunctam' (aSI ad Lys, p. 108). 

TTOV ; surely? — ttov rjv S' ijco, & Avai^ a^o- 
Spa (^Ckel ere o irarrjp /cal rj /jLrjrrjp'j Udvv ye, rj S' 09 
(PI.) K. In Eur. Med. 695, ttov reroX/jLrjfc' epyov 
aXa')(iaTov roSe; (^/.) Elmsley reads r] yap] Wits- 
cliel oi) TTOV ; Klotz and Pfliigk defend tlie usual read- 

320. d) '^H TTOV (surely, I imagine) is also used as 
an affirmative asseveration. If there is an ascensio a 
minori ad r)iajus, we might use much more ; and hence 
Budaeus gave multo magis as a meaning of the particles. 
If there is a descensio a majori ad minus, they might, in 
the same way, be rendered multo minus ; but this kind 
of descent is always ironical. • 

821. e) yap ; asks for information with respect 
to what the speaker suspects to be the case from what 
he has just heard. Of course it may often express 
surprise : sometimes it is used ironically, but the irony 
does not proceed from any force of the particles, but 
from the context. 

Tl XeyeL^, (j)dvaL, & Kvpe ; rj yap au Tal<^ aal^ X^P^^ 
TOVTCOV TL e^vTevaa<; ; (JCen,) did you really (or actually) 

plant ? 'H yap, & ^IirirLa, edv tl ipcoTa ere Sco- 

/cpdT7]<;, diroKpLvel', {PI.) ydp (=nonne ita est?), 
is it not so ? often stands alone, to demand assent to an 
assertion just made. 

Exercise 92. 

822. (1) Socr, Do I understand what kind of art 
you wish to call it ? but I shall soon comprehend it 
more clearly. However, answer me. We have arts, 
have we not ? 

Gorg, Yes. 

Socr, Of all the arts, some, I think, consist princi- 
pally in workmanship, and stand in need of but few 
words, and others of none at all, but their work may 
be accomplished in silence, as painting, statuary, and 



322.] 



H. 



173 



many otliers. With such arts, you appear to me to 
say rhetoric has nothing to do ? is it not so ? 

Gorg. You. apprehend my meaning perfectly, So- 
crates. 

jSocr, On the other hand, there are other arts which 
accomphsh all by means of words, and require no 
work at all, or very little, such as theoretical and practi- 
cal arithmetic, geometry, the game of dice, and many 
other arts ; some of which require almost as many 
words as actions, and most of them more ; so that al- 
together their whole activity and efficiency is by 
means of words. You appear to me to say that rhe- 
toric is among arts of this kind. 

Goiy. You say truly. 

(2) Fol Surely he who dies unjustly is to be pitied, 
and is wretched, is he not ? 

Socr, Less so, Polus, than he who slays him ; and 
less than he who dies justly. 

Pol, How so, Socrates ? 

Socr, Thus; because to act unjustly is the greatest 
of evils. 

Fol What,' is this really the greatest of evils? Is 
it not a greater evil to suffer unjustly? 
Socr, By no means. 

Pol, Would you yourself then wish rather to suffer 
unjustly than act unjustly? 

Socr, I should wish neither of these ; but, if I must 
necessarily either act unjustly or suffer unjustly, I 
should choose rather to suffer unjustly than to act un- 
justly. 

Pol, Does he, then, who slays whom he pleases, 
slaying him justly, appear to you to be wretched, and 
an object of pity ? 

Socr, 'Not at all; f nor yet indeed^ is he to be en- 
vied. 

Pol, Did you not say. just now that he was 
wretched ? 

Socr, I said, my friend, that he is wretched who 



174 



[823—328. 



slays another unjustly, and, more than that, to be 
pitied ; but that lie who slays another justly is not to 
be envied. 

^ ou5e ixivToi. 



Chap. 26. "Hhr] (Jam), 

323. a) With reference to ^?'e<5e?2^ and ^(25^ time 778?/ 
^already J just^ and in a negative proposition, hitJierto 
(adhuc)^ as yet 

324. b) With reference to future time, at once, im- 
mediately^ forthwith^ stronger than rap^a, and opposed 
to the indefinite irore, at some time or other ^ and h va-re' 
pep 'yCP^vcp, 

"E(f)7) jprjvat ivavTLOV aTravrcoif 7; 8 77 Xeyetv, Avo 
mO? Tou? KopLv'^LOv^ rjSrj eKekevev ol ireixireLV e? ^Aai- 
V7]Vj Ta9 Se \oL7ra<; irapaaKevd^ea^at, 

325. c) With commands and exhortations it may be 
construed at once : it is also used in impatient questions, 
like our now^ and like quid jam ? in the Latin comic 
writers. 

0dp(7€L, Hdv^eia, /cal %a?p6 /cat ain^i rjST] (JSen.). 
Kdarov 77877 ttoO; {Aristoph.), 

326. d) With reference to future time beginning and 
extending onwards from the present, r^hrj ^henceforth 
iposthac)] 7]Sr] ov/<:,= henceforth not J or no more. 

"JI8?7 Sel fie SovXevecv irdXiv {Eur,), "HSr} rd roOS' 
ov StareTL/jirjTaL ^eot^ (^sch,). 

327. e) "HSt] is also applied to space^ and denotes 
contiguity, 

^coKevoriv 77877 o/jiopo<; 7] BotcoTia eaTiv {Th,), 

328. /) Of unexpected or long expected events, 
^8?7 7roT€=at lastj at length (jam tandem^ tandem all- 
quando). But this combination has also the indefinite 
meaning of several times already, 

^AvaTravcrco/jLev 77877 vrore ttjv ttoWtjv (j)povTLSa ^Pco- 



329—332.] 



175 



jjiaLcov {Plut). Ovfc ol8a ec rt^ ecopaKe ra ivro^ dyaX- 
jiara. dXX! iyo) tjStj ttot' elSov {PI-)' 

329. g) From this temporal meaning, 7]Sr] passes by 
a natural transition to its other use ; that of denoting 
immediate^ present existence, i. e. present reality^ certainty^ 
&c. In this way it often serves like our at once^ to 
mark a consequence that immediately follows from a 
preceding statement, &c., or a state thafc commences at 
once, or is at once discovered without going any further. 

El 8e veo^ rj 7rpecr/3vT7]^ rj SlKaLo<;^ rj ahiico^;, rjSr] Sta- 
(f>epec. El ye fjurjv oca etpTj/ca irepl e/jLavrov, fjLrjSel'^ hvvauT^ 
dv e^eXey^at pie co? ylrevSopLaL, ttw? ovk dv rjhr] Sc/caL<j)<^ 
Kol VTTO ^ecbv KoX viro dv^pcoTTcoi/ eTraivoLpLTiv ; (-Ze72.) 

330. h) "HSt] frequently attaches itself to demon- 
stratives: o5to9 tjSt], t6t^ 7]Sr}j eVrau^' ijSr], &c. 'O i]Sr} 
is often =^:)re5e7i^. 

331. i) It is frequently found with KaL 

Kvpe /3a<Tc\ev, /cat epuol t^St] '^prj a)9 ifKovaiM XPV' 
a'^aL (JTen.). 

For examples of r/S?; see 255, notes f. 

[Klotz refers i]87] to ciSeVat, and thinks that it is not properly a tern,' 
poral particle, but asseverative of what is now proved hy the fact itself 
to have really occuiTed.] 

Exercise 93. 

332. (1) Ehetoric comprehends under itself, one 
may almost say, all powers ! And I will give you a 
strong proof of this. For I have often, ere now, gone 
with my brother and other physicians to various sick 
persons, who would neither drink their medicine, nor 
suffer themselves to be cut or cauterized by the physi- 
cian ; and, when the physician was unable to persuade 
them, I have done so by no other art than rhetoric. 

(2) Gorg. I think, Socrates, that any one, if he did 
not know, would learn these things from me. 

Socr, Stay ; for you say well. If then you make 
any one a rhetorician, it is necessary that he should 
know what is just and unjust, either before or after* 
wards, from your instructions. 



176 



1 va» 



[333. 



Gorg, Certainly. . 
Socr, What then ? Is he who has learnt carpen- 
tering a carpenter or not ? 
Oorg. He is. 

jSocr. And is not he who has learnt music, a musi- 
cian? 

Gorg. Yes. 

/Socr, And he who has learnt medicine, a physi- 
cian ? And so, in the same way, with regard to other 
things, is not he who has learnt any particular art such 
a person as each science respectively makes its profi- 
cient ? 

Gorg, Certainly. 

jSocr, By the same reason, then, does it not follow 
that he who has learnt just things is just? 
Gorg, Assuredly. 

(3) He consented to do so, f out of regard for the . 
Messenians, whom he favored,^ and still more because 
he thought that, without employing the forces of 
Athens, with only continental tribes as his allies, and 
with the ^tolians, he would be able to go by land 
against the Boeotians, through the Locri OzSlas to Cy- 
tinium in Doris, keeping Parnassus on his right hand 
till he reached the Phocians, who, he thought, would 
eagerly join him^ (for the friendship they had always 
borne the Athenians^), or might even be brought over 
by force ; and to Phocis Bceotia is at once the border- 
ing state. Starting, therefore,^ with all his armament 
from Leucas, in opposition to the wishes of the Arca- 
nanians, he coasted along to SoUium. 

^ M^cTdfivlwv xctptTi 7rei(r(8-6i5. ^ The inf. present sometimes fol- 
lows 5o/cw without ct.v (Gr. 1087), but only to denote an infallible result, 
^ Kara rrjv 'A^rjvaLcov ad irore <pi\iav. ^ ovv resumptive^ relating 

to TT^KT^eis. 

Chap. 27. ''Iva. 

333. 'Ti/a, with the indicative of an historical tense^ 
expresses an unattained result^ which, however, luovid 



334r— 336.] 



1 va. 



177 



be (or would have been) attained on the supposition made 
by the speaker (in the form of a wish, of a question 
implying a wish, or of a declaration of what should be 
or should have been), 

^E/3ovX6/jL7]p dv — ^tfiwva ttjv avrrjv yvdfiTjv i/JLol 
€)(€tVj LP^ d/jL(poT6pct)v rjficov cLKOvaavTe^; pahcco^ eyvcore 
rd SifcaLa (Lys,), "Iv^ r)v tv^Xo^, ut essem coccus: ti/' 
eyevopLTiv Tvcj>X6^^ ut ccecus /actus essem, "I v a dirrfXXdy' 
juLe^a (pluperf,), ut liber ati essemus, H. 

334. a) The Imperfect is used of a continued effect or state (as the 
being blind) ; also in the sense of solere (S.) ; the Aorist, of one consid- 
ered, not as continuing, but as having ta.hen place and being terminated. 

835. h) "iva is here virtually conditional : ubi^^-wo statu, qua con- 
dltione (like our then — if that loere the case) : that — so. The Indicative 
without 6.U is used in just the same vraj that it may be used in other 
conditional sentences ; the consequence being stated, not as the conse- 
quence of a conditional proposition, bat as an objective fact : e. g. et fxlv 
^ ^vKcp 7]iJLvvd{xif]v auTou, Tj^LKovi/ fxkv ou5' ovrois. This mode of 
explaimng the construction is proved, I think, to be the true one by the 
actual occurrence of in the following passage of Is£eus (274) : — KalroL 
Tov ye TTpdrrourd tl diKaioi/ ov irpoaT^Keu aiTopeLV aAA.' ev^vs Xeyeiy, kol 
(JL^ jxovov rouTo TToieiv^ aAAa Ka\ ^LGiMwabai /cat rov yevovs Trapix^trhai 
/xaprvpiaSy 'Iva. fxaWov h.v eTncrrevero vcp^ v^wf. 

(For the usual construction of '{ua, see Part I.) 

Exercise 9i. 

336. (1) I have many witnesses to speak to this 
point, and as many circumstantial proofs. In the first 
place, if he really never gave this testimony, he would 
have d enied it, not now for the first time, but immedi- 
ately upon its being read in court, when denial would 
better have served his purpose. In the next place, if 
I had without cause exposed him to a suit for false tes- 
timony against his brother (a charge on Avhich men run 
the risk of degradation, besides pecuniary penalties), 
he would not have let the matter rest, but would have 
brought an action against me for compensation. Fur- 
ther, to sift the thing to the bottom, he would have 
demanded of me the slave who wrote the deposition, 
so that, if I refused to give him up, I might be deemed 
unworthy of credit. 

•^8 



178 



KaL. 



[337—340 



(2) What they ought to have done was, immedi- 
ately after my father's death, to have called in several 
witnesses, and requested them to seal the will, so that, 
in case of any dispute, the writing itself might have 
been referred to, and the whole truth ascertained. In- 
stead of this, they thought proper to get certain other 
papers sealed, which were only memoranda, and did 
not specify all the assets ; but the will itself, by virtue 
of which they became possessed of these same papers, 
and all the rest of the effects, and were discharged 
from responsibility for not letting the estate, they nei- 
ther sealed nor delivered up. Very li'kely you should 
believe any thing they say about the matter ! 



Chap. 28. § 1. Ka/, and; also {principally from Kruger). 

337. KaL connects either single notions or sentences. 
Also Kal — /cat, both — and. Cf. re. 

a) When three or more notions are connected, the 
Kai is placed, not like our and merely between the two 
last, but also between the others, and sometimes also 
before the first. 

Xprjjjbara ihcoprjaaro avTol^ Kal olfcia<; Kal avhpd^ 
TToSa, 

338. h) Asyndeton (i. e. the mere apposition of no- 
tions, without any conjunction) is also often found in 
enumerations of this kind. 

^v/ji/3aX6vT€<i Ta<i aa7rLSa<; eco^ovpro, ifid^ovro, avre/c- 
T€LvoVj dire^vrjcrKov {Xen,^ 

339. c) When two adjectives belong to one substantive, the Greeks 
visually connected them by kolI, less commonly re /cat. Hence not the 
good old times, but the good and old times. This is especially the case 
after ttoAus, but even here the conjunction is sometimes omitted. 

'H ir6\is vSfJLOvs V7reypa\p€y, aya^wv Ka\ iraXaioov voixo^erSov evprjiuLa' 
ra {JPl.y Aia ttoWccv (re) Kal deLvcoy Trpay/JLarcop cr^croocrixivoL irdpecrre 
(Xen). 

340. d) After 6 avro^j lao^, oixoio<^, TrapairX'tjaco^;, 



t 



341,842.] Kai, 179 

and tlie corresponding adverbs cocrauTco?. &c., KaL=^as, 
(Compare idem atque^ &c.) 

TovTov av fJLCLKLara (fiCKot tl<; co ^v/icj)€p€tv rjyocro 
ra avrd /cat eavrco {PI.). O yvoii^ Kai fir] aac^w 
hihd^a<^ iv Xaw koi el fii] ive^v/JLTj^j] (Th.). At SaTrd- 
vac ou^ ofioi(j}<^ Kai irplv, dWd ttoXXco fiei^ov^ Ka^e- 
araaav {Th.), "ESo^ev avroU rrapaTrXijaia fcai avri- 
\eyov {Th.). 

341. e) After ov (f)^dvo)y dfia, rjhrj, and after sen- 
tences that denote tlie passing of tirae^ Kai introduces 
the immeclmtely follovHng event ^ where we should use 
v:hen, ovk e^^rjv (or €<^^aaa) — Kai, no sooner — them. 

"HSr/ (re) ^v iiearjfil3pLa Kai av'^pcorroi rja^dvovro 
{PI). OvTTCO TOVTO) rj Tpel^ hpopiov^ TrepieXrjXv'^oTe 
rjaT7]v Kai elaep^eTai KXecvta^ {P^-)' AaKeSac/jio- 
vLOi OVK e(f)^aaav Trjv dpyfjv KaTa<yyovTe'^ KaX tol^ 
Qrj^aioL^ eif^v^ eTre/SovXevcrav {Isoc). 'EvTav^a e/juet- 
vav rj/iipa^ TpeU, Kai rjKe Mevcov {J^en.). 

(See an example of em 255, 1, note c. 

Exercise 95. 

342. (1) Socr, Whether is it more base to commit 
an injustice or to suffer one ? Answer me. 

Pol, To commit an injustice. 

Socr, Is it not, therefore, worse, since it is more 
base ? 

Pol. By no means. 

Socr. I understand. You do not think, as it seems, 
that the beautiful and the good, and the e\ul and the 
base, are the same ? 

Pol. Certainly not. 

Socr. But what do you say to this? Beautiful 
things in general^ such as bodies, colors, forms, sounds, 
and pursuits, do you call them severally beautiful, 
without reference to any thing else ? As, for instance, 
first of all, with respect to beautiful bodies, do you not 
say that they are beautiful, on account of their useful- 
ness, in reference to the particular thing for which each 



180 



Ka I, 



[343. 



is useful, or on account of some pleasure, if in being 
seen they give delight to the beholders ? Have you 
any thing else besides this to say respecting beauty of 
body? . ' 

Pol. I have not, 

(2) Men. Do you think that you should yourself 
be able to speak, if you were obliged to do so, and the 
Senate should select you (""for the office)? 

jSoc. ° Certainly; and that I' should be able to 
speak, O Menexenus, is nothing surprising, since I 
have no such bad preceptress in rhetoric, but the very 
same who has made many good orators, and one really 
distinguished one,^ Pericles, the son of Xanthippus. 

* Use Kol — '5e Kai — et sed (et) ; i. e, ' she has made many good ones, 
hut one even distinguished one.' ' Confertur hac ratione ea res, quse aut 
magis vel imprimis valet, aut in locum alterius rei succedit.' Hand^ yl 
533 

Exercise 96. 

343. (1) They were constantly within a little of 
escaping, or of being destroyed. And thus amongst 
the troops of the Athenians, as long as they were 
fighting at sea on equal terms, every sound might be 
heard at once, wailing, shouting ^'they conquer/' 
^' they are conquered/^ and all the other various ex- 
clamations which a great armament in great peril would 
be constrained to utter. Those on board the ship Avere 
affected very much in the same way, f until at length/ 
after the battle had continued for a long time, the Sy 
racusans and their allies routed the Athenians, and 
pressing on them in a decisive manner, with much 
shouting and cheering of each other on, pursued them 
to the shore. 

(2) {The same continued,) Then the sea forces, as 
many as Avere not taken afloat, f put into the land^ at 
different parts, and rushed from on board to the camp ; 
while the army, no longer with any different feelings^ 
but all on one impulse, lamenting and groaning, de- 



344, 345.] 



181 



plored the event, and proceeded, some to succor the 
ships, others to guard what remained of their wall ; 
while others, and those the greatest part, began now 
to think of themselves, and how they should best 
provide for their own preser^^ation. Indeed, their dis- 
may at the moment had been exceeded by none' ^ of 
all they had ever felt. And they noAV experienced 
pretty nearly what they had themselves inflicted at 
Pylus ; for, by the Lacedaemonians losing their ships, 
their men who had crossed over into the island Avere 
lost to them besides ; and at this time for the Atheni- 
ans to escape by land was hopeless, unless something 
beyond all expectation should occur. 

* irpiu ye Br], Trith i'/idic. Cf. Gram. ^ Karcuex^rji/ai, usually 

applied to being driven in by a storm (Ej*.). ° Strengthen ouSeis bj hi]. 



Chap. 28. § 2. {fcai contimied,) 

344. a) When a general remark is followed by a 
particular instance which illustrates its truth, Kal vvv~ 
and so now^ and so in the present instance; KaL rore^ 
and so then. And generally a simple connection by kul 
is often found, where lue should use and so, and thus, 
and by so doing ^ &c. 

^EvLore av Kal /cara^lrevSofJiapTVprj^elrj rt? utto ttoX- 
X(bv Kal SoKovvTcov elvau rt* Kal vvv ire pi &p av 
Xeyei^ 6\ijov croi iravre^ crviMc^rjaovaL ravra ' A^rjvaloi 
Kal oi ^evoL {PI-). To y€Po<; to tcov OpaKcov (j)ovcKco' 
rarov iarL, Kal to re eTnireaovTe^ SiSacrKaXeLq) iral- 
Bcov KareKoylrav irdvra^ {P^-)- "A^tov eirihel^ai co? rou? 
ahiKovvra^ rc/JLcopeta^e^ Kal tou? viJberepov^ ap')(pvTas 
^eXnriQV^ iroirjcreTe {Lys.). 

345. h) Kai and also ^ too (nearly = /cat — Se), when 
it introduces a clause in Avhich the verb of the prece- 
ding clause is repeated, or a synonymous one used. 

Tlpo dWcov 7Tpo/3e^X7]/jLivo^ aire^copec • Kal ol dWoi 
7rj0O9 Tou? crvvreray/jiivov^ diri^X^ov {J^en.). 



182 Kai. [846—348 

346. c) The Attics, as a general rule, never employ 
Koi — re except when the re has another KaL (or re) 
answering to it, so that the first KaL connects with the 
preceding sentence a twofold clause connected by re — 

KaL or T€ T6. 

To TToXv avT(p dvarerapayfjievop iiropevero, Kal r/S-j; 
re '^v d/Ji(f)l dyopdv ifKrfbovaav Kal ifkrjaLov r)v b ara- 
^fji6<; (Xen,), 

Exercise 97. 

347. (1) Now by sea, if they should wish to cross 
oyer the Crissaean gulf, the Athenians were ready to 
stop them, having sailed round with a fleet ; while the 
march over Geranea did not appear safe for them, as 
the Athenians were in possession of Megara and Pegae. 
For Geranea was both ^naturally difl&cult to cross, and 
was always guarded by the Athenians ; and so at that 
time they knew they were going to stop them that 
way, as well as by sea). So they determined to wait 
in Boeotia, and see in what way they might march 
across most safely. 

(2) From this breach, where the ships came to land, 
the village is twelve stades off, the city of Corinth 
sixty, and the Isthmus twenty. The Corinthians, hav- 
ing heard long before from Argos, that the armament 
of the Athenians would come, went with succors to 
the Isthmus, all but those who lived above it : there 
were absent too in Ambracia and Leucadia five hun- 
dred of them, serving as a garrison ; but the rest, with 
all their forces, were watching where the Athenians 
would make the land. 



Chap. 28. § 3. {KaL continued,) 

348, KaL=aIso^ too^ even, not only adds a new no- 
tion to one previously stated^ but also frequently refers 
to a notion not expressed^ but more or less easily sup- 
plied; and in cases of this kind the Greeks reckoned 



0 



349, 350.] KaL 183 

upon more quickness of comprehension in seizing upon 
the intended notion than we do. Kal avro^, even him- 
self himself (i. e. as well as others, or certain others). Kal 
ovTo<? = atque is, isqiie ; /cat ravra, idque, and that too, 

<ye(i)pyLa ttoXKcl Kal avrrj ScSda/cei {Xen,). 01 
Kepfcvpaloi ou8' avrol huevoovvTo jScd^ea^at {Th.), 'Atto- 
pcov earl Kal tovtcov irovrjpcov omre? i^eXovcrc St' eTrt- 
opKia^ irpdrreLv tl (Xen,), Elalv ot '^(^prjaiiJLcoTepov 
vofJbL^ovat ')(^prj[JbaTa rj aSeX<^ou9, Kal ravra rcov jxev 
d(f>p6v(ov ovrcop, rod Se ^povifiov [Xen.), Ta /jlgv yap 
dvajKata avve/SovXeve Kal rrpdrreiv co? ivopLL^ev 
apcar^ av Trpa^^^yvac {Xen, Mem, 1, 1, 6 : the Kai marks 
the opposition between irpdrreiv and vo/jii^etv), To)v 
(TcofJbdrwv rojv ^rjKvvofJLevcov rcov Kal al ^Irv^^al ttoXv 
dppcoarorepac jijvovrai {Xen^. To pLrjSev dScKeiv Kal 
(jiLkav^payirov^ Trocel {jlfe7i.). Tov evrv^ovvra Kal (f) pa- 
vetv vofii^ofjbev (Eur,), 

349. a) In sentences of comparison, and in other 
sentences where notions are compared together, one 
being a demonstrative, the other a relative clause (cocnrepy 
oairep), the Greeks very seldom expressed Kal in the 
demonstrative clause only, but either in the relative 
clause, or (most commonly) in both clauses. 

[So Kruger : but if the clause with &(nrep precedes, ovtoj Kai is 
very far from uncommon. A personal pronoun may stand in the non- 
relative clause : iav apa Kal crol |w5o/c^ aTrep Kal ifxoi (P.O.)] 

h) The case is the same with r} {fj — rj), or, and after 
rj, than, when a notion implying difference precedes ; 
ovhe, pLTjie being used instead of KaL if the notion is 
negative, 

AoKei fiOL {jcaX) ra rcjv dvSpcov acopiara ravra rrda- 
Xeiv direp Kal ra rcov iv rfj yfj cjyvo/jiivcov {Xen.). 
^fLcrirep Kal vTrea^ofiriv vpLcv, ovrco Kal TTOirjaco 
(And.), AiKaiov t) {jcal) rcov dya^cov KOLvcovecv, rj purj^e 
rcov drv^^icov diroXaveiv {Is.)» 'El^ijrelro ovSev ri pbaXr 
\ov vrro rcov aXkwv rj Kal utt' ep^ov (Ant), 

350. In the same way Kai appears in ei (or cS?) 



184 Kai. [351, 352, 

aXXo<;, where the Kai often refers to a /cat iyco, gv^ 
ovTo^, to be mentally supplied, 

^vfji^epeL vfuv ecTrep ro) /cal aWco to vlkolv {Xen.y 

In many connections the /cat does not belong to the single notion be- ' 
fore which it stands, but to the whole proposition. So in 6 5e Kai — . 

Ol fxhv duriKpvs iroXe/jLovcTiy, ol Kal dia rh AaKedaLfiouiovs eri 
rja'vxoi'C^Li' 5ex?7;uepots (TTTovdals Kal avrol Kar^xovraL {Th^. 

Exercise 98. ' % 

351. (1) Men, Perhaps the speaker will be obliged 
to speak extempore. 

Soc. How so, my friend ? They have each of them 
speeches ready prepared ; and, moreover, even to speak 
- extempore on such' subjects is no difficult task. :j:K 
indeed one had to speak in praise of the Athenians 
before the Peloponnesians, or of the Peloponnesians 
before the Athenians, it would require an eloquent 
orator to persuade his hearers and win their applause ; 
but when a man contends (^for oratorical fame) before 
an audience whom he is extolling, it is no great matter 
to win the reputation of speaking well. 

(2) Gorg, But indeed, Socrates, I profess myself to 
be such a man as you describe. Perhaps, however, it 
is right to attend to the wishes of the company who 
are present. For, some time since, before you came, I 
explained many things to the present company ; and 
now, perhaps, we shall protract it too far if we contin- 
ue the discussion. We must, therefore, respect their 
wishes, lest we detain any of them who are anxious to 
be doing something else. 



Chap. 28. § 4. {jcal continued,) 

352. After an interrogative pronoun or adverb, Kai 
denotes that the notion it precedes is the particular no- 
tion about which one requires full information. In 
English we should pronounce the following words with 



353—355.] 



Kai, 



185 



emphasis. [Hermann explains it differently: gid^ tL 

'X^pr] KoX Xeyecv, interrogate is non solum quid., sed etiam 

an aliquid dicendum sit, dubitat. Klotz says : Si dico 

tL yjpj] Kal Xiyeiv, propria hoc qucero^ quid sit dicendum^ 

etiam si solum de dicendo cogitemus ; i. e. the questioner 

passes oyer all the particulars about which he miglit 

inquire, and confines himself to this particular one.'] 

TL Kal /BovXea^e^ co veaorepot] (Th.) ^EKeXevaev 

eiiTeiv ttov Kal iifXriyr] {Xen.), Elfxi TTjpyjcrova^ 6 tl 

Kal hpdaei Trore {Eur,), 

353. Hand says : ' Grseci addito koll [Latini per etiarn] inteiTOgatio- 
ni adjiciunt aliquam asseverationem rei negandce, ideoque vim interroga- 
tionis augent.* — Qui interrogat rt xp^ ^^-^ xiyeiv ; is prsesumit nihil 
esse dicendum, additque suse inteiTogationi affirmationem ; quid re vera 
dicendimi est ? id est, nihil profecto. — Sed non semper exspectatur ne- 
gatio' {Hand, ii. 516). 

354. So, too, KaL after eVe/, eireihrj^ ha (unless it 
belongs merely to some one following notion) adds 
emphasis to the precise cause alleged^ omitting all the 
other possible accessory caiises. 

^'OiTco^ acocr€L<; fjb\ irrel Kd7rcoX€cra<; (Aristoph.), IIpco- 
Tay6pa<; paSico^ eTreKSiSd^ec, eTretSr] Kal rd TToWd 
ravra e^ehiha^ev {PI.). Mr] irapd So^av aTTOKpLvov^ Xva 
KaL Tl TrepaLvo^iJiev {PI.). 

Exercise 99. 

355. Socr, Come then, let us see now what in the 
world it is' that we are saying of rhetoric ; for I, in- 
deed, am not yet able to understand what I should say. 
When an assembly is held in a city, for the choice of 
physicians, shipwrights, or any other kind of artificer, 
is it not the case^ that the rhetorician will refrain from 
giving his advice ? for it is evident, that in each elec- 
tion the most skilful artist ought to be chosen. Xor 
will he be consulted, when the question is respecting 
the building of walls, or the construction of ports or 
docks, but architects only. ISTor, again, when a delib- 

^ Hermannus ad Yig. N". 820 indicari putat quamdam duhitationeji\ 
quae prorsus abhorret aJ3 his particulis {Hand). 



186 



Kai 



[85a 



eration occurs respecting tlie choice of generals, or the 
marshalling an army against enemies, or the occupation 
of posts, — but on such occasions those who are skilled 
in military affairs will give advice, and not rhetoricians. 
What do you say, Gorgias, on such points? 

(2) The Mantineans and their allies were the first 
to join them, through fear of the Lacedaemonians. For 
a certain part of Arcadia had been reduced to subjec- 
tion by the Mantineans, while the war with the Athe- 
nians was still going on ; and they thought, that the 
Lacedaemonians would not allow their sovereignty 
over it, since they had now leisure ^ to interfere) ; so 
that they gladly turned to the Argives, considering 
them to be a powerful state, and one which was always 
at variance with the Lacedaemonians, and tinder a 
democratical government like ^ themselves. 

* i. e. * not only inclination but also leisure/ ^ iroWol k a I kolXoL 
Kai to be expressed after the particle or comparison. 



Chap. 28. § 5. {icaL continued.) 

356. When the notion that follows KaL is one of 
great importance, KaL = even ; and often veri/j indeed. 
To this head may be referred the use of Kai with ad- 
jectives and adverbs of numher and degree: e. g. Kal 
7rdpT€<^, even all, i. e. all without exception ; Kal fidXa, 
very — indeed; Kal irdvv, properly quite entirely ; with a 
negative, at all [jcal irdvv ovSe elvai, &c.]. The KaL 
is here virtually = idque, Kal Trdvv iXk6yt/jio<^ = iW6- 
jl/jlo<; Kal irdvv eWoyi/jbo^, With superlatives Kal=veL 

KaXov ye Kal y e povr a jxav^dveiv <TO(pd {/Escli^, 
To Ka\(b<; e^ov ttov Kpelrrov iart Kal vo/jlov [lien.). 
^'Eanv d^ia rj Kal vtto irdvTcov eiraLvelo^ai, ov 

fJLOPOV v^' rj/jicov {PI.)' ^A/xeLvcov av elr] 6 evl hwdfjue- 
vo^ dpeaTov<i iroLelv rj oan^ Kal ir oWol^ \ {Xen.) 
FIoXLttj^; TrpoSoTTj^ Kal rpL^, ov^ drra'^ diroXoyKevaL 
hLKaio^ {Dem.). Ovros 6 vofios Kal fxdXa koKw e^ei 



357—360.] 



Ka L. 



187 



{^schin.). Aofcel fioL Trph ' EXk7]vo^ fcal iravv ovSe 
elvat avTT] rj eiTLKXrjaL^ {Th.y Tovjiov ye (ppd^co ovo- 
(jua Kal xlav cra^ai? {Aristojoh.). Oh TrXelaraL [lera- 
/SoXal eiT^ dfic^orepa ^vfJb^e^rjKacnj SUaLOL elau Kal 
diridT OT ar o I elvat rah evirpayiat^ {Th.), 

357. Kai is often prefixed to participles used ad- 
versatively^ to bring out their meaning more empliatic- 
ally : even when or if =: even though, [Ovhe^ /x7]8e = not 
even though.^ This Kai is often combined with ofjtcos 
{nevertheless). 

Al avpLcj^opal Kal [3pa^vv ovra [laKpov So/cetv elvat 
TTOtovat TOP jSiov {Hdt). KvTrpi^ ovSe vov^eTovptevri 
^aX(£ {Eur.). Ovs av alcr^dvcjofxai 6/jLco<; Kal ev irda- 
')(ovTa<; ert dStfcetv 7reipo^iJievov<;, tovtov^ co? dvrjKearovs 
irXeoveKTas ovra^ t/Stj Kal r?)? ^PW^^^ aTroTravco {^en.). 

858. Hermann, on (Ed. 414, where so7ne read crv kol de^opKcbs ov 
^Keireis, k. t. A., observes, that even in this (virtually) adversative con- 
struction Kai is not quamvis^hMi etiam ; there being a reference to a 
less favorable condition {oh fxovov — aWa. kul) : tic [non modo si caecus 
esses nihil cerneres, sed] etiam videns 7iihil cernis. 

359. With KoX fidXa {xiav, (fcc), there is sometimes a trajection^ when 
a preposition precedes: Kal ^aAa Kara irpavovs 'Uvro — ievTo Ka\ Ka- 
ra, ixdha irpauovs 'Uvro (Xen.). Kal irduv inl rdls ixiKpols {Xen.). Kai 
Kiav eV l^pax^'t XP^^V (^^O- 1' ^' ^• 

Exercise 100. 

360. (1) Mcostratus, with all the rest of the army, 
advancing by a different approach, and from a more 
distant point, against the hill, which was difficult of 
access, was beaten back in utter confusion, and the 
whole force of the Athenians was within a little of be- 
ing conquered. For that day then, as the Mendseans 
and their allies did not give way, the Athenians re- 
treated and pitched their camp ; and the Mendaeans, 
when night came on, returned into the town. 

(2) In the mean time the trumpet sounded, upon 
which the enemy fled much faster than before ; and 
the Greeks facing about, passed the river in all haste. 
Some of the enemy, on seeing this, ran back to the 



188 



K a L, 



[361, 862. 



river, and wounded a few of our men with their ar- 
rows ; but many of them, even when the Greeks were 
on the other side, were observed to continue their 
flight. 



Chap. 28. § 6. {fcai continued.) 

861. When kul (==even) limits the notion of a 
word, by making an assertion of that at least^ if no more; 
even tliat^ if no more; it may be construed ^/'onZy; though 
but, &c. : sometimes before an infin. by mere, merely. 
To Kol Xeyetv tovto, the merely saying this ; the mere 
fact of saying this. Kal ir6XaL = not only now, hut long 
ago : it may be construed in English by an emphatic 
long. Here also (as in 357) the corresponding forms 
that combine this meaning of Kai with a negative are 

Tvpavvov elvai ficopca to Kal ^iXetv {Eur,), '/2? 
T0Z9 Ka/cco<^ TTpdaaovaiv rjSv Kal /3ya^vv 'X^povov \a- 
^icr^aL Tcov rrapeaTcorcoi' KaKcov (Soph,). OvSe vovv e')(ei 
TO Xejeiv &v fJirjTe tlvcl avdjKriv fJurjTe top eiKOTa \6yov 
Kal fxeTpLcos av tls elirelv eirj SvvaTO^^ {P^-)' ^E^v avTols 
Kal fjLTjSeva \17reiv {X^en.), AUaL^ efioije Kal TraXac 
So/ce?9 Xejeiv {Aristoph.). 

862. This Kai {even) is often used to strengthen the 
indefinites : oaTtorovv {any soever) ; oTroioaTiaodv {of any 
hind lohatever) ; ottoo-octovv {hoioever much, however little) ; 
and the corresponding adverbs orrcoaovv, ottcoo-tlovp {in 
any manner, in any way). With ovy /x?^, we shall have, 
not Kal ov {iJbrj), but ovie, jubrjSe. 

ZTo)? ovK aL(T')(^pov Kal rjv t tvovv Slktjv airoXtTrelv ; 
{Lys,), "A vev evvoLa<^ tL 6(f)€\o<; Kal oiroLaaTivocrovv 
iTTLTpoirov emaTrj[jLri<; yLjveTai', {Xen.), El Kal otto- 
(Tovovv ixaXKov ivScoaovcn, hLa(f)^aprjaovTaL {Th,). 
^EirdKove, el vovv Kal ottoxtovv e^6i9 {PI-)' Kovcoi 
Trap^ v/jL(ov ouS' rjVTLVovv dcf^op/jbrjv \a0cbv KaTevav 
aKeSac/jLoviovi {Dem.), 01 vLKrjcravTe^ tcl irpdy 



363—365.] 



Kai, 



189 



fiara ovrco<; eac^eTepicravTO, Mcrre apXV^ f^V^ onovv 
fierahioovai to6? r]TT7f^elcnv {PI-). Toii^ larpoij^ crv av- 
op6Lov<^ KaXel'^ ; O vS' oir co err lovv {PI-)- 

363. Kai^alsOj even^ may follow KaL=and^ if even 
a single word be interposed : Kai tl^ KaL • koI en Kal 
vvv • ical Sr] KaL On Kal el (idv)^ el {edv) KaL, see under 
el, 

364. KaC is also used, where it may be explained 
by and so {KaL ovrco) ; that is, to connect sentences of 
which, the second contains a more definite exposition of 
the first ; often to add a circumstance that follows from 
the preceding one, or is an instance of it. [Thus et for 
ei ita, et sic^ et turn. Hand, vol. ii. 484.] 

Exercise 101. 

365. I omitted in my former speech one point, as 
strong as any that were urged, to prove the non-pay- 
ment of the marriage portion by these men to Apho- 
bus. This I will now lay before you, and then pro- 
ceed to expose the falsehoods you have heard from the 
defendant. You must know, gentlemen of the jury, 
when he first thought of putting in a claim to the pro- 
perty of Aphobus, he said he had paid, not a talent 
(which he now says was the amount of the portion), 
but eighty minas ; and he set up tablets, on the house 
for twentv minas, on the land for a talent ; wishing; to 
preserve to Aphobus both the one and the other. See- 
ing, however, by the issue of the late trial, with what 
feelings an unscrupulous rogue is regarded by a jury, 
he comes to his senses, and thought how hard my case 
would appear if, after being so grossly plundered, 
Aphobus having all my estate, I had nothing of his to 
levy upon, and could show that I was hindered from 
levying by the defendant. And so what does he do ? 
He removes the tablets from the house, and says the 
portion is only a talent, and for that the land is mort- 
gaged. 



190 Kat yap. [366,367. 

Chap. 28. § 7. {/cal ydp.) 

366. Kal ydp has several meanings : (1) etenim, so 
that the kul relates to the whole sentence : (2) 7iam 
etiam, so that the KaL= etiam^ relates to the notion that 
stands next after the ydp : (3) nam etj the Kai being 
followed by another KaL Thus Kal ydp avfifiaxdv 
i^iXovaL may mean : (1) for they are also \ resolved to 
aid them ; (2) for they are resolved [ even to aid them ; 
(3) for they are resolved both to aid them (and also to do 
something else; e. g. Trpoaix^iv rov vovv. I)em.). In the 
second (and third) meaning the opposed notion may be 
inserted between the Kai and the ydp. It is only in 
the first and second meanings that the form becomes 
negatively ovSe ydp. To the [first or] second belong 
also Kat ydp el {idv)^ and ovSe ydp el {edv). We also 
meet with Kal ydp Kat, etenim etiam^ and Kal (ovSe) 
ydp ovSi, 

^E^e\co/jL€V dXkrjXoDv rrjv dmcrTLav' Kal ydp olSa 
dv^pco7rov<; ot eTToLrjcrav dvrjKeaTa KaKd {XenX 018^ 
eyco Avop ovra rov aov iraLoa* Kat yap e^po<^ cov 
^AKOvcrerac rd ia^Xd y^prjaro^ &>v dvrjp (Eur.), 'Be- 
vov^ ^evL^e, Kai crv ydp ^evo^ y' eay {Gn.), Ovk earc 
rrrevia'^ ovSev d^Xccorepov ^Ev (Blm cvp^irTwiia* Kal 
ydp dv (f)vaec ^irovhalo^ y<;, Trevr]^ Si, KardyeXco^ earj 
{if en!), Aeivov to TLKretv eariv* ovSe ydp KaKco^ TIdcT' 
'^ovTt jMCTOs &v TQKrj iTpodyiyveTai {Soph.), Ovk ecmv 
OLKelp OLKLav dvev KaKov* Kal ydp to yrjixaL Kal to 
jmr) yrjjjbac KaKov {Gn,), 

For Kal — Se, Kal St], dWd Kat, see Si, Srj, dWd, 
Kal TL] at cur tandem? (PI, Phil. 21, B.) 

(In the following examples Kal ydp = nam etiam,) 

Exercise 102. 

367. (1) None can justly praise the Lacedaemoni- 
ans for their concord any more than joii'ates, robbers, 
and men who are engaged in other unjust and violent 



368, 869.] 



K 



191 



courses; for even they destroy others by agreeing 
among themselyes. But if I seem to any of you to 
have made a- comparison unworthy of their glory, I 
waive it, and instance the Triballi, who, as all allow, 
agTee together better than all other men, and yet slay 
not only their neighbors and those who dwell near to 
them, but all others whom they can reach. 

(2) Euctemon lived ninety-six years, the greater 
part of which time he passed with apparent prosperity ; 
for he had both a considerable fortune and a Vvdfe and 
family, with a reasonable share of the other ingredi- 
ents of happiness; but in his advanced age he met 
with a calamity of no trifling kind, which threw his 
whole family into disorder, consumed a great part of 
his estate, and occasioned a dissension between him 
and his most intimate friends : what was the source of 
this evil, and in what manner it happened, I will ex- 
plain as concisely as I am able. 



Chap. 29. KatVep, /cairoi. 

368. Kalrrep is hardly ever found in Attic writers 
except with a participle or some virtually participial 
construction ; whereas fcatroL although) is used only 
in independent sentences. Later writers use them even 
vice versa. To the instance from Theophrastus, given 
in Gr. in 1340, of Kaiirep with a finite verb, Krtiger 
adds PL Symp. 219 ; and for Kalroi with participle 
quotes PI. Eep. 511 ; l^js. 31. 3-4? 

369. KalroL (cdthoiigh^ though, hut, hoicever, &c. : in 
arguing =720?/;) quamquam, especially the corrective 
quamquam ; sometimes vermn, sed tamen, Kairoi ye, 
the same, with more emphasis on the following asser- 
tion {quamquam quidera), KacroL tL (j^rj/jbc ; kc, 

erravae /lev tovtcov ttoWou? aperrj^ iroirjaa^ 
eTTL^viielv Kal ekTri^a'^ Trapaa'^coVy av iavrcov eV^/xeXcoz/- 



II 



192 Kalirep, /cairoc. [370. 

rac, /caXov^ fcal aya^ou? eaea^ai, Ka ltol ye ovSe- 

TTCOTTOTe V7r6(T')(^6T0 ScSdcTKaXo? elvat TOVTOV (^6=72.). ''OfJiCO^ 

TTpo^ ye Ta9 aWa<; re^j^m? KaiTrep ovtco tt paT t ov 
(7 7]^ (^ikoao(^ia<^ to d^Lccpba pLeyaXoTTpeTreaTepov KaTa- 
XeLireTai iPl-)* Xvpij3ov\ev(o aoc, KaiTrep vecitTepo^ cov 
[Xen,), Aia7reTrpaypLevo<; rj/ce, Kaiirep irdw ttoWmv 
avTiXeyovToyv {Xen,). Ov/c av iTpohoir]v /caiirep dyjrv' 
'Xpv (j)L\ov (JEur,). Aeyet<^ dXrj^T], Kaiirep i/c jaa/cpov 
Xpopov {Sopji,). Kat ^vrja/covcr^ opico^, TroXkrjp irpovoiav 
el^ev eva^rjjjLw^ ireaelv (JEur,). Uet^ov yvvat^iv, k a 
Trep ov cTTepy (ov o pi cos {^sch.). 

Of KaLTOL=noWj see an example in 292, note 5. 

Exercise 103. 

370. (1) When they appeared before the Archon, 
they styled one of them the adopted son of Philocte- 
mon, and the other of Ergamenes, whereas they now 
protest them both to be the sons of Euctemon ; yet 
had they been lawfully begotten, and had they been 
adopted, as they first alleged, not even then could they 
have been called the sons of Euctemon ; for the law 
forbids a son by adoption to return into the family 
from which he was emancipated, unless he leave a le- 
gitimate son of his own in the family which adopted 
him ; so that, even from their own behavior, it is man- 
ifest that their evidence is false. 

(2) Thus that he was in his perfect- senses when f he 
made the will in which he adopted him,^ as the law 
permitted him, you have heard clearly proved ; so that 
on this head at least it is proved that Androcles has 
given evidence that is false ; but, as he has protested 
also that Antidorus was the legitimate son of Eucte- 
mon, this too I will show to be untrue. 

» Say : ' that he disposed (° of his property), and adopted ohim.' 



871, 372,] Md. 193 

Chap. 30. Md. 

371. Mdy hy^ a particle of swearing^ taking the acc. 
of the deity. 

a) It is principally used in negative asseverations, 
with ov preceding or following^ or hoth. 

Ov (id Tou? ^eov<Si el iTraLSoTrocrjad/jLrjv, ov/c ol8a el 
€fCTrj(Tdfi7]p iralhd iror^ av, k.t.X* 

h) The negative is sometimes omitted. 

Ovic i/3dXkeT0 ; Md Ai^ dXX 6 Syj/jlo^ dve^oa KpL- 
aiv irotelv. 

c) In Attic prose, the name of the deity is some- 
times omitted. 

^Tjiil eycoye. Md rov — ov orv <ye. 

d) Nai fjbd — ^is affirmative : and sometimes even /xd 
itself occurs af&rmatively, if the context sufficiently 
implies the affirmation. 

Md rrjv rekeiov rrj^; ijirj^ 7TaLBo<; jdl/c7]v, ^sch. Ag, 
1407: so fid A Lay By Zeus (Jupiter). 

Exercise 104. 

372. (1) Notwithstanding these imprecationSj not- 
withstanding the oaths and the oracle, "which stand re- 
corded even now, the Amphiss^an Locrians, or rather 
their magistrates, despisers of all law, cultivated the 
plain again, walled in and restored the devoted and 

. accursed harbor, and demanded toll from those who 
entered the port. 

(2) Socr. I say, then, that these are two questions, 
and I will give you an answer to both. For I affirm, 
I Polus, that rhetoricians and tyrants have very little 
power in cities, as I just now said ; for they do scarcely 
I any thing that they wish, though they do what to them 
j appears to be best. 

Pol. is not this, then, to possess great power? 
Socr. It is not, at least as Polus says. 
Pol. I say that it is not ? On the contrary, I say 
it is. 

9 



194 



Mkv 



[373—876 



SocT. By Jupiter, not yon. For you said that to 
have great power is a good to him who possesses it. 
Pol. And I still do say so.^ 

* ^t]liX yap olv. In yap ody, the odv denotes certain assurance, a con 
Jldence that cannot he shaken. 



Chap. 31. Mev. 

373. a) Mev, shortened from iirjv, has properly the 
same asseverative power as that particle (= certainly^ 
indeed). This it retains in some combinations, espe- 
cially in fiev ovp, as used in answers : properly quidem 
igitur^ sane igitur^ profecto igitur : hence {sane quidem=) 
immo^ immo vero, 'cum vi augendi et corrigendV (S.). 

'/29 aroTTOv to evvirvLov, & Xo^Kpare^ ! Evapye^ fiev 
ovv (PL). OvSev iTTiaravrac TTocelv, Hdvra fiev ovv, 
immo vero omnia : nay, rather they can do every thing 
(Xen.). 

The adverbs nrdw, TravTairaai, KOficSfj strengthen 
the affirmation of fjuev ovv. 

^LX6<T0(f)0<; TTjv <pv(7LV ecTTai 6 fiiWcov /^aXo9 Kaja- 
^09 eaea^aL ^vXa^ TroXeo)?; U avrdiraa l fjuev ovv 
{PI. Decidedly. — By all means. — Certainly). 

374. h) In answers: ov fjuev ovv, non ita profecto ; 
non sane. 

^Ap^ ovv ovS^ eXeyev, &cnrep ovS' eypa^ev rjvcfca 
ipydcracr^aL tl Seot ku/cov ifxa^ ; Ov fM€V ovv rjv elirelv 
€T€p(p {Dem.). 

375. c) Mev ovv are also often used (like ^lev hrj^^ 
then ; thus then ; so) as conclusive or recapitulatory par- 
ticles to terminate a subject, after which a new one is 
introduced by Se. 

Tavra fiev ovv l^exP^ tovtov irepl he rcov yevo- 
fiivcov Tretpda-ofJbaL ktX. 

376. d) Also fiev ovv (= ac, atque) ^ in continuando 
sermone cum quadam conclusionis significatione usur- 



877—380.] 



Miv. 



195 



patur, ut apud Latinos et quvlem.^ UpcoTov fzev ovu, 
ac primuTii quidemJ (H.). 

377. e) The ovv appears sometimes to refer to the 
preceding statement like onr now (or indeed) followed 
by hut (p/jLO)^ Se, or o/xo)? Se jxevTOi), 

S' a)iio\6y7]a€ ravra iroirjaeiv. rjTTcardfjLrjv fxev 
ovv J ore ovT€ ^eoi;? ovre dv^pcoTrov^ vofML^et, o/jLO)<; Se 
— iS6/c€t fjLoc ktX, (Lys.), 

378. It must be remembered that the iJbev has often 
(as indeed in the last example) its proper force, and is 
followed by Se. \_He said so and so] : etcelvov fiev ovv 
i/ceXevov /BaSi^ecv, e^e Se /le^^ avr&v aKoXov'^ecv, ktX, 
{Lys) 

379. Mev also retains the asseverative force of iirjv 
in the combinations dXKd fiev hrj (at sane jam)^ /cat /lev 
S77 {et jam sane^ et profeeto jarii)^ ov fjuev hr) {^rainime vero). 
In these combinations /jlt^v never appears.— After these 
particles a particular notion is often rendered emphatic 
by yL 

Ov fjbd AC, eliTov eKeivoiy ov fiev Srj e^^atpov 
{jKen,), ^AWa fiev Sr] e/c ye rchv aja^ijaecov Sel ivvorj- 
aac ktX, (PL Phced. 75, A.) 

380. In fjuev ye the fiiv points out a relation to the 
following clause, or a following word or notion ; the ye 
adds emphasis to the whole clause in which it occurs, 
or to that particular word in it, to which it is attached; 
so that the force must be given in English by some 
strengthening or restrictive pronoun ; guite^ only^ at any 
rate? 

The particles generally introduce an argument in 
confirmation of what precedes (C£ Cyr, 2, 2, 2 ; 4, 3, 
18. K. ad Mem. 3, 14, 6.) 



^ Sometimes igitur : e. g. yv^ fxep ovu rj/uLepa re yeyoucy ovtol (PI. 
Tim.\ which Cic. translates ; J^ox igitm* et dies ad hunc modum et ob has 
generata causas, &c. 

^ " Particularum ^eV 76 is usus est, ut ye ad prsecedentia confrma' 
tionis caus^ referatur, yueV autem ad illud ipsum, de quo sermo est, spec- 
tet." {Her7v.) 



196 



Miv. 



[381, 382. 



01 fjbev ye vecorepOTrotol koX iTrtvorjaaL o^et? /crX. — 
vjjL€t9 Se otX. {Th, 1, 70.) 

Often, however, there is no expressed opposition, 
as — 

^A7r6aTaaL<; jiev ye rcov ^laiov n Traa'x^ovrwv eariv 
{Th. 8, 39): tovto fiev 7' ijSrj aacj^e^, that is already 
quite clear {Ar, Acharn, 155). 

On the difference between fiev yap and fiep ye Buttmann {ad Mid. 
p, 46, cf. Kr, Th. 1, 40) says : ' Cum quis uno argumento vel exemplo 
aliquid probat, potest hoc ut sufficiens adferre ; quod fit particula ydp : 
potest etiam significare, plura quidem posse desiderari, sed hoc unum 
satis grave esse; quod fit addito ye (certe, saltern)' The ^i4v y€==sa7ie 
quidem. 

381. The notion opposed to or contrasted with that 
to which fjiiv belongs, is usually accompanied by Se or 
fievToc : less commonly by tolvvv, ardp, aWd, /jlt^v, ov 
firjv aXXd, (See ofico^ fievrot in 386.) 

If the adversative notion is quite suppressed, we 
have fjiev solitarium * (Cf. Se, Gr. 1458, Ic). 

Exercise 105. 

382. (1) These' then being four, and always taking 
the best possible care, the former of the body, and the 
latter of the soul, flattery perceiving this, I do not say 
knowing, but sagaciously guessing it, and having di- 
vided itself fourfold, and having stealthily put on the 
garb of each of these divisions, feigns itself to be that 
which it has put on ; and it is not in the least concern- 
ed for what is best; but by means of that which is 
most pleasant, captivates and seduces ignorance, so as 
to appear to be of great value. And thus cookery puts 



^ Sometimes the adversative particle is omitted (1) in consequence 
of a change of construction : (2) because it is implied by eTra or eireira 
[ripaJTa ix\v roLvvv, ecprj, So/ce? fxoL ktX. — iirena koX ras (TKif]vas cvy- 
KaraKavcrai {JCen.), Kal irpSsrov fxev idaKpve — elra eAe^e rozctSe. JT^^i.] : 
(3) because the writer passes from a disjunctive to a conjunctive struc- 
tm-e of his sentence (Kr.). Ubi fiev — Kai vel /ieV — re dicitur, proprie 
anacoluthon est, quo a disjunctione, quje per /ieV exprimitur, transitur 
ad conjunctionem, quam significant icai vel re {H.). 



882.] M^v. 197 

on tlie garb of medicine, and pretends that it knows 
- the aliment best for the body. So that if a cook and 
a physician had to contend before boys, or before men 
as foohsh as boys, which of the two was acquainted 
with good and bad ahments, the physician or the 
cook, the physician would die of hunger. This then 
I call flattery; and I say that a thing of this kind 
is base, Polus (for I say this to you), because it looks 
to what is agreeable without regard to what is best ; 
and I affirm that it is not an art, but skill, f a skill ac- 
quired empirically,^ because it has no knowledge of 
the things which it employs, what they severally are 
in their nature, so that it is unable to tell the use of 
each. But I do not call that an art which is a thing 
without reason. If you are doubtful about these 
things, I am willing to give you a reason for them. 

(2) The flattery, then, pertaining to cookery, as I 
have said, is concealed under medicine ; and, in the 
same manner, under gymnastics, personal decoration, 
which is mischievous, deceitful, ignoble, and illiberal ; 
deceiving by means of gestures and colors, by smooth- 
ness and outward appearance, so as to make men put 
on an adventitious beauty,, and neglect that which is 
their own^ and is acquired by gymnastics. That I 
may not then be prolix, I wish to tell you, after the 
manner of geometricians (for perhaps you can now fol- 
low me), that what personal decoration is to gymnas- 
tics, that is sophistry to legislation; and that what 
cookery is to medicine, that is rhetoric to justice. 

(3) Let us consider this too. Are we not agreed 
that it is sometimes better to do the things which we 
just now spoke of; to slay, to banish men, and de- 
prive them of their property, and sometimes not ? 

Pol Certainly. 

Soc7\ This then, as it seems, is agreed on both by 
you and me? 

Pol Yes. ' 

i/jLireipia. 



198 MeVrot. [383—387. 

Chap. 32. Miproc. 

383. 1) MevTOL = sane^ enimvero^ certainly; espe- 

cially in affirmative answers. There is 
often an emphatic repetition of the verb : 
fcal efjL6- — Se^cr66 ravra Trocetv] Ae- 
rjaei fjuevroi cre^ ecjjtjv iycoj evSov fjuevetv 
{Xen,). 

384. 2) =tamen; but, however, in objections and 

other oppositions. 

Aeyovat tou? fcrj(j)r]va(; Krjpia fjiev ifkar- 
T€Lv Ka^^ avTOv^^ iiekLTOvpyelv pLevroL 
ovSev {Arist.y 
3) * In interrogationibns pbevroi sic dicitur, ut 
videatnr aliqnis rem negare, quo certius 
ea ab respondente affirmetnr' (ffi) : e. g. 
ovic avTiXiyovcrc fxivTOL] surely trey op- 
pose each other, donH they ? 

385. 4) Ironically ; =5a7zce^.* 

01 fJbevTOL dya^ot olkovo/jLol, orav to 
TToXKov a^iov fjLC/cpov i^fi irpiao^ai Tore 
^aal Secv covetcr^aL (Xen,), 

386. a) MivTOLje, or pbevroi ye, tamen ; tamen certe 
(H.) : ye pbevroi^ certe tamen (H.). ^ Sed hie ordo tan- 
tum ibi videtur locnm habere posse, nbi verbum prae- 
cessit, cujus vis voce ye angeri possit ; quod secus est 
in articulo, — Hinc nnmquam ov ye puevroL, ssepissime 
ov pievToiye reperias.' {Kr, ad Anah. 1, 9, 14.) 

h) "Opbods piivToc, nevertheless: sometimes opposed 
to a concessive pLev ovv. 

Exercise 106. 

387. (1) Since, then, he endeavored with his bro- 
ther-in-law to deprive me of my property, and has 
come into court relying on the influence of his friends, 



* ' Porsonus rarissime conjungi a tragicis yikp 76 observat. Harum 
pairticularum is usus est, ut ad praecedentia confirmatiGnis causa re- 
faratiu' ; jueV autem illud ipsum, de quo sermo est, spectet' {H.) 



388.] 



199 



the only course left for me is to seek redress at your 
hands. I am aware, gentlemen, that I have to contend 
against ingenious pleading and witnesses prepared to 
give false evidence. I think, however, the justice of 
my cause will give me such advantage in argument 
over the defendant, that if any of you had a good 
opinion of him before, you will learn from his conduct 
towards me that he has all along been (unknown to 
you) the vilest and basest of mankind. 

(2) Socr, If, therefore, he who acts unjustly does 
not meet with the punishment he deserves, according 
to your account he will be happy. 

Pol. So I say. 

Socr, But, according to my opinion, Polus, he who 
acts unjustly, and is unjust, is in every way miserable ; 
though more miserable if he does not suffer punish- 
ment, and does not meet with chastisement for his un- 
just actions; but less miserable if he suffers punish- 
ment, and meets with his just deserts both from gods 
and men. 

(3) Cal, Tell me, Ch^rephon, does Socrates say 
this seriously, or is he jesting? 

Choer, He appears to me, Callicles, to speak most 
seriously ; but there is nothing like asking him him- 
self. 

Cal, You are right, by the gods, and I desire to do 
it. Tell me, Socrates, whether we must say that you 
are now speaking seriously or jesting? For, if you 
are speaking seriously, and if what you say is true, is 
not our human life altogether subverted, and are not 
all our actions, as it seems, contrary to what they ought 
to be? 



Chap. 33. Mri. 

888. On the apparently redundant ^t], ^t) ov, see under ov, and in 
the Grammar ; and especially in the Appendix (from Mad^dg) at the 
end of Arnold's edition of the Olynthiac Orations. 



200 



[389—391. 



389. Mt] tl ye, fjurj tL ye St; * = n^um (where the 
dum = demum and quidem. Hartung) ; and, like it, may 
sometimes be construed by much lese^ sometimes by 
much more (or not — hut; not only — hut). It is properly 
=we dicam^ ne quzs dicat^firj tl Xeye): the Tt = at all^ 
in the last. 

Exercise 107. 

390. (1) Hence the only thing that his accusers do 
is to warn every body to give him nothing whatever, 
since he is to be punished for going to commit crimes, 
not merely for having committed or completed any. 
For this is their meaning when they say: 'He is going 
to form sieges ' he is leaving the Greeks exposed.' 

(2) I take it, that if he had been informed that 
those who then used this language before him, had 
been crucified the moment they returnedj he would 
have acted exactly as the king of Persia did. And 
how (° you will ask) was this ? — When he was taken 
in by Timagoras, after giving him, it is said, no less 
than forty talents, as soon as he heard that he had been 
condemned and executed, and was consequently unable 
even to preserve his own life, much more to effect what 
he had promised him, he perceived that he had paid 
the .money to one who had no ^ control whatever over 
the measures of the state. 

* jW7]5* OTiOVV, 



Chap. 34. Mriv. 

391. d) Mrjv^ {=vero, both in its concessive and ad- 
versative power. H.) is partly affirmative (which is itB 

^ Also fi'fiToi ye which Hermann was wrong in wishing to re«» 
every where for fi-q ri ye drj. €t 5' ovv ^€ovs, fx-nroi rSu ye ixeyicr^i^^ 
Tuu ^€coy roXfxriaaL ovrcas avo/jLoicos ixifX7](T atrial {I^lin.). 

^ Mr. Stephens says of /jl7}p, that ' it indicates the progress of th* 
mind from the subject under consideration to some other subject, som« 
jfresh topic or new idea; or, if not t? another subject, to some ulterioj 



592—395.] 



201 



primary force) and partly adversative ; commonly the 
latter, but generally with, other particles. 

392. b) Mt]v is used in appeals^ questions^ and 
solemn asseverations. El B\ dye firjv^ ireiprjaat {IL 
302). Cf. ^move vero ocius te^ nutrix' {Hartung), TL 
ybrjv ; quid vero ? or quid quoeso ? rj fjbrjv {profecto^ verily^ 
assuredly): and without an oath, & Zev — rj iir]v koi 
TO irporepov ye v/jllv i(j)dv7] koXov to ipcorrf/jLa (-PZ.). 

393. c) Mrjv is also annective and adversative, like 
vero: crcocppcov firjv o ye tolovto<; Kal ovSa/i'^ (pcXo'x^pT]' 
fjiaro^i ^and certainly (but undoubtedly or assuredly) is 
temperate and by no me^s fond of money' {PI)* 
Tavr^ eTneifcS)^ fxev eari viro tl droira, SrjXol p^rjv, 
/ctX. {this is certainly somevjliat strange ; it proves however , 
&c. PI. Gorg. 493.) 

*A\Xa [a\v, at vero (and afqui), cf. 32, sqq. On ov aWi, see 42, 
sqq. Te /j-riu {certe vero): see ye, 180, 181. 

394. d) ^ Kal fjbrjv et vero, et sane aut atqui signifi- 
cat' (Herni,), The Kai (and so the kul implied in ovSe 
fjLT]v) sometimes only indicates the correspondence of the 
clauses as in kul yap in the sense of etenim, and koI hrj ; 
but sometimes has a connective force, so that the KaL is 
to be referred to the word that follows the fJLrjv (as in 
KoX yap = nam etiam : Kal firjv — ye, certe quidem), 

395. e) This fcal firjv (like a\Xa jjlt^v) often con- 



statement on the same subject.' — It differs from a\\a Kai (with which 
it is oft^ associated), * in that it denotes a separation and distinction be- 
tween the statement which it accompanies and the preceding statement' 
- (p. 79). — This, however good as a description of the use of the particle, 
does not explain its primary meaning, which is certainly that of a confi- 
dent assertion. 

Hoogeveen says : * Particula /x-fju in eo videtur difFerre a rof, quod 
iUud simpliciter affirmat partem, cui aponitur ; a Br], quod in aliquS- re, 
quas ad summum incrementum pervenerit, confirmata quasi triumphet ; 
a 7e, quod urget sequentia sed remittendo priora ; at /lltju ita affirmat 
posteriora, ut e prioribus niliil remittat ; qualem ipsius potestatem et 
usum fere observavi, si non constantem et perpetuum, nempe quo nova 
rei confirmatce asseveratio accedit. Quicquid id est, primam ejus potes- 
tatem ^e^aiccTLK-^v securus statuo, quia banc quoque excercet, quum 
adyersativa dicitui*' (p. 354). 

•9* 



202 



M7]V. 



[396, 397 



nects a new, further particular with, sometliiiig of qp^o 
eition : moreover ^ but further. 

896, f) Ov fXTjv modo non vero; modo non tamen; 
modo simpliciter sed vertitur.' Hoog.] are often used 
adversatively, i. e. to asseverate a proposition that is op- 
posed to a preceding one. 

1) If the opposition is real^ the particles = 
{profecto tamen non\ but yet not ; hut as- 
suredly not; not however. 
Thus : Xen., after describing the attention 
paid by Socrates to his bodily health, 
says, aXKa pv /mtjv ^pvtttlkos ye, &c. 
{profecto tamen non erat homo mollis et 
delicatus. Kuhn.) 

2) If there is no opposition between the 
sentence introduced by ov ixrjv and the 
preceding one, then the ^riv in ov firji/, 
ovSe fxrjVi has not a confirmative^ but an 
adauctive force, like vero in neque vero. 

397. f) Ov fjLrjv ovSi sometimes carry on a preced- 
ing negation, adding to it the denial of a further (usu- 
ally a more striking or important) particular. Thus after 
the passage just quoted (896, 1), ov fxrjv ^pvtttlk6<^ ye, 
&c., there follows ov firjv ouS' ipacn')^p7]fjLdTov'^ ye 
Toifs (Tvv6vTa<; eVo/e^, nor yet did he ; no, nor did he, &c. 
{nor again did he ; moreover he did not). 

3) But sometimes the particles have an 
adversative sense = however — not; but yet 
— not. ' At quum admista est vis evap- 
TicofxarcKT] [/i?;z/], redditur tamen, et utra- 
que negatio pertinet ad sequentia, di- 
versa tamen, ita ut ov neget aTrXw?, ovSi 
distincte, ut apud Theocr. Idyll, viii. 76. 

ov fiav, ovSe Xoyov eKpt^ijv diro tov 
TTLfcpov avra, ^AWd, ktK. Non tamen 
illi quicquam respondebam, ne verbum 
quidem amarum : ubi ov negat to aire- 
KpL^rjv generalius, ovSe distinctius top 



398, 399.] 



203 



Xoyov TTLKpov. Scholiastes explicat ov 
fiovov \6yov TjSvp a\X' ov8e \6yop tov 
iTLKpovJ {Hoog,) 

398. h) Mr}v, KoX fjLrjv are ' also used in dialogues 
(and especially in plays), when the approach of a per- 
son is pointed out= ^ a7id lo P ^ and seeP [''08e pt^rjv 
A^Lficov! {Soph. Ant 626.) — Kal ftrjv to fieipdiciov rohl 

Te cannot follow p^riv without the interposition of 
a word. Ov fMrjv — yi, non tamen — certe; non profecto — 
quidem. 

Exercise 108. 

399. (1) Socr, Even at the beginning of our con- 
ference, Polus, I praised you, because you appeared to 
me to be well instructed in rhetoric, though you had 
neglected the art of dialectics. And now, is not this 
the reasoning by which (° as you asserted) even a child 
could confute me ? and I, as you suppose, am now con- 
futed by this reasoning of yours, when I said that a 
man who acts unjustly is not happy? How so, my 
friend ? For assuredly I do not grant you any one of 
the things you assert. 

Pol. Because you are not willing to do so ; for you 
° really think as I say. 

(2) Socr. Do you not, then, denominate all other 
things in the same manner beautiful, such as forms 
and colors, either on account of some pleasure, or 
utilitv, or both ? 

Pol I do. 

Socr, And is not the case the same as to sounds, 
and every thing that relates to music ? 
Pol Yes. 

Socr, And moreover, with respect to laws and pur- 
suits, they surely are beautiful, for no other reason ex- 
cept that they are either useful, or pleasant, or both ? 

(3) 'It seems then that a cowardly and illiberal 
disposition will not have any portion of true philoso- 



204 



Nt^. Nvp. 



[400—403 



phy?' ^ I do not think it wilU ^ What then?' *Will 
the well-disposed man, who has moderate desires, and 
is not a lover of money, nor illiberal, nor arrogant, 
nor cowardly, ever be in any case unjust, or a breaker 
of engagements?' 'It is impossible.' ' When then you 
are examining, whilst a soul is still young, whether it 
is a philosophical one or not, you will consider this 
also, whether it be just and gentle, or unsocial and 
savage.' 'By all means.' ^ Neither ^ as I think, will 
you omit this.' ' What ?' * Whether it learn easily or 
Yfith difficulty : or, do you expect that a person will 
ever love a thing sufficiently, if he is uneasy in its 
performance, and makes bu.t small progress?' * It can- 
not be.' 



Chap. 35. Nri. Nvv. 

400. JV?7 = in affirmative oaths (with ace), 

401. a) Nvv, now,— Nvv hrj, (1) now ; (2) with a 
past tense =j)auUo ante^ modo^ 'j"^st now.' 

At] vvv == scilicet nunc — o Srj vvv KefcXij- 

Kafjbev Tov rfkLov, PI, 

Kal vvv, etiam nunc- — El Se fjurj^ ip')(piJbe^a Kal vvv 
^orf^ricrovre^ rovrofs, kt\» = etiam post ea, qucE tu dixis- 
ti, Kr. 

402. Nvv Si == nunc autem^ nunc vero (in oppositions 
between a rejected supposition and the real state of 
things). 1 

El fiev ovv iSo/ceo /jloc Xatpe^cov rjyefxovLicdoTepos 
elvac aov irpo^ rrjv (pvaiv Tavrr)v, ifcelvov av iTretpco/jurjv 
Trei^eiv — vvv 8e {but as the case really is) fjuoi crv So/ceZ? 
rjyov/xevo'^ fxaXkov av i^epyd^ea^ac tovto {^en.). 

403. Nvv, now^ then. It is the same word as vvv, 
vhe now of time^ but used quite unemphatically, so as 
not to refer the whole sentence to present time, but only 
the word which it follows as an enclitic. In this respect 
it corresponds exactly with our unemphatic now^ and, 



404, 405.] 



O flCO^, 



205 



like it, is often used witli imperatives, *It occurs 
cliiefly in tlie draraatic poets : the v is long in Aristo- 
phanes, long or short in the tragic poets' {Kr.), 

Scjaov vvv avTov jJL7]h^ epa rev 7r\7]alov {Eur.). 
"I^c vvv, ^(prjy d({)ijy7]aaL rovrcp tl ctol dTrefcpLvdfirjv 
iXen.). 

Exercise 109. 

404. (1) As Homer says, then, Jupiter, Neptune, 
and Pluto, divided the government among them- 
selves, after they had received it from their father. 
This law then respecting men was in existence in the 
time of Saturn, and always was, and still is, establish- 
ed among the gods, that a man who has passed through 
life justly and piously, should go, when he dies, to the 
isles of the blessed, to dwell there in happiness of 
everv kind and in freedom from all that is evil ; but 
that he who has lived unjustly and impiously, should 
go f to the place of punishment and justice as to a 
prison,^ which ' place they call Tartarus. 

(2) After he had said this, he put an end to the 
conference. And Pharnabazus mounted his horse, 
and rode away ; but his son by Parapite, who was still 
a handsome youth, remaining behind, ran up to him 
and exclaimed, ' 0 Agesilaus, I take you for my guest- 
friend!' * And I accept you as such,' he replied. ^ Now 
remember,' said (°the youth), and immediately gave 
the javelin in his hand, :fa beautiful one it was, to 
AgeSilaus ; and he, accepting it, took off the trappings 
from the horse of Id^us the painter, which were of 
great beauty^ and presented them to him in return. 

* Say: *to the prison of punishment and (re /cai) justice/ since they 
are both predicated together. 



Chap, 86. "Ofim. 

405. ' 0/jlco<;, properly eodeyn raodo: then tameii; ni- 
kilo minus (aXX' o/jlco^ KTK,=hut for all that, hut yet; 
nevertheless). 



206 ^'O/i 0)9. [406,407. 

In a principal sentence, ofim may refer to an ap- 
position (an Assumptive Apposition) in the same sen- 
tence. 

eirifML^ev 7] (f)vac^ 7]hovr)v nva ovk afjuovaop (i^^.). 

The following combinations also occur : 5' c^jucys • oVcus ye fieyroi • 
(ifjLous ye firju (Ar. JS'ub. 626)* d/aws 5e {verum tamen)' 'Sfxccs 5* ovv {PL 
Ep. 317> Klotz. 

406. '^Ofim is also used to strengthen the adversa- 
tive relation between a participle and another participle 
or verb. It may then either precede the participle c r 
follow it ; and the participle may itself be strengthened 
by KaLirep. 

0&9 av ala^dvcofjuai ofjbco^ Kal ev irdaxovra^ 
€7L dBcKeLv ireipcofxevov^, tovtov<; kt\, {^en,) '^Ov fiev 
j(p6vov €^7] 6 irarrjp^ 6fjL(o<;, /cacTrep olKeiws €)(^cov rov- 
Toc^, 6 Avo-L^€LSr}<; OVK iroX/jLa kt\. {Dem, 1246, 10.) 

Compare Curt. 4, 1, 30: ^qui territi tamen spem 
obtinendi JEgyptum non amiserunt.' Cf. also Cic. Cat. 
3, 5 {Kr.), 

Exercise 110. 

407. (1) Socr, Come now, if I can, I will explain 
to you more clearly what I mean. As there are two 
subject matters, I say there are two arts; and that 
which relates to the soul I call political, but that which 
relates to the body I am not able to describe to you 
off-hand by one name ; but of the culture of the body, 
which is one, I say there are two divisions, one gym- 
nastics, the other medicine. But in the political art I 
lay down legislation, as corresponding to gymnastics, 
and the judicial to medicine. Now these respectively 
communicate' with each other, as being concerned 
about the same subject, medicine with gymnastics, and 
the judicial art with legislation ; yet they in some re- 
spect differ from each other. 

(2) *But we must proceed,' he said, 'first of all, 
remind me of what you said, if I should appear to 
have forgotten it. For Simmias, as I think, is in doubt, 



408,409.] 'O IT ore. 207 

and fears lest the soul, though more divine and beauti- 
ful than the body, should yet perish before it, as being 
a species of harmony. But Cebes appeared to me to 
grant me this, that the Soul is more durable than the 
body, but he argued that it is uncertain to every one, 
whether, when the soul has worn out many bodies, 
and that repeatedly, it does not, on leaving the last 
body, itself also perish, so that this very thing is death, 
the destruction of the soul, since the body never ceases 
decaying. Are not these the points, Simmias and Ce- 
bes, which we have to inquire into?' 
They both agreed that they were. 



Chap. 37. 'OTrore, 

408. 'OiTorey (1) when^ vjhenever : in re scepius facta. 
(2) since: as quanch, quandoquidem are used for quoniam 
in Latin : and now {that) in Enghsh. See the second 
passage in the Exercise. oTrore ye, quandoquidem. 

[On oTTorav with opt., cf. Gr. 1268. On oTrore imtj^ 
Gr.l280.] 

Exercise 111. 

409. (1) If the assertion of the defendants were true, 
and there stood on the statute-books two laws on the 
subject of the proclamations [of crowns], the Thesmo- 
thetae would, I presume, have discovered this, and the 
Prytanes referred them back to the Nomethetae [legis- 
lative committee], so that one of the two would cer- 
tainly have been abrogated, either that which allowed 
the proclamation, or that which forbade it. Since then 
nothing of this kind has been done, they stand convict- 
ed, I imagine, of affirming, not only what is false, but 
what is utterly impossible to be true. 

(2) 'I have ordered,' said he, 'all to obey you in 
the disposition and order of this procession. And that 
they may attend to your orders with the more satisfac- 
tion, take these coats, ^ said he, 'and carry them to the 



208 "Ottov. [410—412, 

commanders of the guards ; give these housings to the 
commanders of the horse, and these other coats to the 
commanders of the chariots.' On this he took them 
and carried them off. When the commanding officers 
saw him, they said to him : ' You are a great man, 
Pheraulas, now that you are to order us what we are to 
do.' ^ No, not only so, by Zeus !' said Pheraulas, * but 
it seems I am to be a baggage bearer too : at least I am 
now bringing you these two housings ; one for you, 
and one for another person ; but do you take which of 
them you like best.' 



Chap. 38. ''Ottov. 

410. a) ''Ottov, (1) where; (2) seldom causal =since^ 
seeing that (siquidem, quandoquidem). 

JTo)? r]iuv ov^ rjSeco^ Trpo? rovaSe rou? 6/jLOTi/jLov<? 
dycopLareov, ottov ye ra fjuev a^\a tt}^ dperij^; caa 
TTpoKeLTau kt\,] (JTen. Cyr, 2, 3, 11). Of. 195. 

411. b) The apodosis is then often rj ttov= surely 1 
suppose: so that ottov — r] ttov, or rj ttov — ottov {vjhere 
— surely = if ^ or since^ — then surely) may sometimes be 
construed if- — much more, 

"Ottov yap ^ A^rjvohcopos koX KaXkia-rparo^^ — ol/claat 
TToXe^? oloL T€ yeyovaGiv rj ttov ^ovXrf^evTe^ '^fi€L<^ 
7roXXou9 av tottou? tolovtovs hvvrj^eirjfjbev TTapao")(^elv 
(si enivi ApoUodorus et Oallistratus urbes condere po- 
tuerunt, multo magis nos — possemus. Isocr.). Its strict 
correlative is ep^a or ivrav^a. 

Exercise 112. 

412. (1) When they had received what was then 
given them, some of them spoke of Oyrus in this man- 
ner : ' Surely he must himself have great wealth, since 
he has given each of us so large a sum!' But some 
said : ^ What do you mean by talking of much wealth ? 
It is not Oyrus's nature to heap up treasures, but he 



413—417.] 



209 



has more pleasure in giving away riclies, than in get- 
ting them.' 

(2) When they thought it right to exact punish 
ment even for words, would they not much more cer- 
tainly have visited with the severest punishment a man 
who in very deed betrayed the city into the hands of 
its enemies ? 



Chap. 39. § 1. 'Vttco^. 

413. "Oirw^, quoraodo ; properly a dependent inter- 
rogative adv. of manner: cf. Gr. 1804. 1365. 

'^Ottw? is but seldom as (in prose)^ as correlative to 
ovrm or the like (expressed or understood) ; still less 
frequently is it (like o)?) used for otl [c£ Gr. 1214, /] 
(except in ov-^ ottq)?. See 418.) 

Like the other adverbial and pronominal forms 
commencing with 6- (oirocro^;^ oirolo^^ (fee), it is used in 
replies, when the speaker repeats with surprise a ques- 
tion asked by the corresponding interrogative adverb 
or pronoun. 

414. a) = a-s], *''0 TTO)? etcaaro^ v/jlcjv %a//3et Kal ySou- 
XeraL, tovtov tov rpoirov (j^eperoo rrjv '\\rrj(^ov {Is.). 
TIoieL OTTO)^ dpiarov aoc SoKel elvai {J^en^, Xprj tov/jLov 
aw/jia ^aTrreiv outco<; otto)? &p rjyfi vo/jLL/jLov elvai 

415. b) =thaf]j Tovtov eyoc tl<; av eliretv ottcd^ 
ov SUacov iariv dTro^vrjcrKeiv'^ (J^en.) 

416. c) =071 condition that 'E/jLia^coaaro fiev tov- 
tov €u^ect)9, oTTco^; — crvvaycovLetTai tm ficapa) ^tXoKpd' 
T€L {JDem. 185, 409, 2). ^ ^ 

417. d) {ut=) quum, Tov S' oirw^ opa Eepf?;?, 
kt\, jEsch,) 'Epptyijaav o7rco<; lSov aloXov 6<piv {Horn.) 

On its use as a final particle {=ut) cf. Gr 
1305j sqq. 

For the remaining constructions of ottcqs, see Part I. § 48, and Grain« 
mar, 1489, sqq. 

1 



210 



^'O TT ft) 9 . 



[418—420. 



Exercise 113. 

418. He will say : * Tell me, Socrates, do you think 
that you don't deserve stripes for having, after chaunt- 
ing so magnificent a dithyrambus, so inharmoniously 
and discordantly wandered away from the question T 
^ Pray how?' shall I reply. 'How!' will be his an- 
swer ; ' cannot you remember that I asked you about 
the absolutely beautiful ; which, whenever it is pres- 
ent in any thing, makes that thing to be beautiful ; 
every stone, wood, man, and god ; every action, and 
every study.' 



Chap. 39. § 2. (o^% otto)? — aWd or aXka KaL) 

419. a) Oifx OTTO)? is used elliptically, like ov^ ^'^^> 
for non dico^ non dicam: ovk ipco ottco^; (/ will not say 
that) ; but appears to be found only in the sense of 
{non modo) not only not^ or nedum. So fir] oirco^ {Xen, 
Cyr, 1, 3, 10), where jjirj would be used, not ov : e. g. 
before an infinitive, 

Ou% oiT(D<i Tov<; 7ro\e/xtou9 erpk'^^avTO ol ^EWrjve^, 
aWa Kal T7]V ^((opav avrcbv ifcd/ccocrav {JCen.), 0^% 

OTTCO'^ CLVTol^ (tO?9 ^A^7]VaL0C<;) G^^LSy dWd Kal 

fjLLa^dtycras aeavTov fcard tovtcovl TroXirevrj (non modo 
non — sed etiam. Dem.). Tou9 Orj^aiov^ rijelTo ou^ 
07rft)9 dvTLirpd^eiv Kal ScaKcoXvo'eLV, dWa Kal crv- 
arparevaeiv {Dem,), Ov')(^ ottco^ rrj^ KOivrj^ iXev^epia^; 
/xeri'xpijbevj aW' ovSe SovXeia^ fierpla^ rj^tco^ijfjbcp 
Tv^eiv {non modo non — sed ne — quidem, Isocr.). 
0 7ra)<; op^eia^aL iv pv^fiS, d\X ouS' op^ovcr^ai, eSu- 
vaa^e {non modo non saltare, sed ne rectis quidem pedi- 
bus stare poteratis. Xen.), 

420. h) Observe that all these forms are followed 
by dXKa Kat (in a negative sense, d\X ovSe) or dXkd 
only. The distinction is the same as between ov /lovop 
aXXd and dWd Kal, 

Ov^ oTTcov d/jL^OTepac^ icpprjTO {rat^ /uLolpats) dWd 



421, 422.] 



Ore. 'On, 



211 



SLaTre/iircov ovherepav avrS) /cariXeiTre, Isocr, [cf. the first 
example in a.] 

Exercise 114. 

421. (1) He will not only not refer the habit and 
nurture of his body to brutish and senseless pleasure, 
and direct his life with reference to this, but will not 
even look to health, or make it his great object how 
he may be strong, or healthy, or handsome, unless he 
be also likely to become temperate and sober-minded 
bv these means. 

2. Nor was he alone silent on this head ; but even 
the present claimant of the estate advanced nothing in 
opposition to my right, till he was instigated by this 
fellow to dispute it ; for when I carried the money on 
the following day, IDiocles refused to accept it, alleging 
that he had received it from my adversary ; yet I was 
not prevented from joining in the funeral rites, but 
assisted at the whole ceremony ; the expenses of which 
were not only borne by my opponent, but were defray- 
ed out of the money which Ciron left : now it would 
have become him, if the deceased had not been really 
my grandfather, to have thrust me out, to have expel- 
led me, and to have hindered me from conducting the 
burial in conjunction with them. 



Chap. 40. § 1. 'Ore. "On. 

422. "Ot€, when (quum, quando), cf. Gr. 1260. 
*Aliud est oirore^ quod infinitum; aliud ore, quod 
finitum' {H^\ in re scepiv^ factd^ 1263; soraetimes = 
quandoquidem, 1279: ore firjy quando non ; si non^ 
1280. [When ore ov, when ore 1161.] On fie- 
/iv7]/jLaL ore, cf. 1276, h] orav with opt^ 1268; ore /xev 
— ore Se, ' sometimes — sometimes. Its correlative is rore. 



I ^ Whenever the forms rore, ore are used twice (sometimes only once) 

f(T TToTe— TTOTe, sometimes — sometimes^ they are accented totc — brL B. 

i 



212 



O T € . ''On. 



[423, 424. 



423. ^'Otl (1), that^ quod. (2) because, for Bca tovto 
ore, i. e. Stori. [For the general construction of oro 
see Part I. 320, sqq. and Gram.] 

'^Otl fiTj, after negatives (nisi), except; hut 
''On <yap /jltj ^A^rjvac, rjv ovSev dXko iroXicrfxa X6- 
ji^ov {Hdt 1, 143). Hermann {Vig. 846) explains the 
idiom thus: " ''On /jltj inde ortum, quod recte diceba- 
tur ovSev 6 tl [xt}. OvSev 6 ri /irj ^A^rjvat nihil quod 
non sit AthencB ; i. e. omnia Athence sunt; prceter Athenas 
nihil est; nihil est nisi Athence.''^ — Afterwards, the words 
passed into a standing formula, ore fxrj = nisi, 

IBcoKpdrrjs out' iirl ^eccpiav TrtaTrore iK t^s ttSXccos efTjA^-ey, <irL fi^ 
aira^ els *l(T^ix6v, ovre actA. (PL) * As we should write BrjXop on {not 
d-nKoyoTi) — [but cf. Buttm. Ind. ad Plat. Men. and And. 1, 30] — so oI§* 

(e?3 oW on) is used almost adverbially: originally the preceding 
verb was repeated. TioL-fiffeis oiV on (Aristoph.y Kr. (Of. 1214.) 

Exercise 114, 

424. At Pylus, in the mean time, the Athenians 
were still blockading the Lacedaemonians in the island, 
and the Peloponnesian forces on the continent remain- 
ed where they were. But the watch was kept by the 
Athenians with great trouble, through want of both 
victuals and water ; for there was no spring but one 
in the citadel of Pylus itself, and that not a copious 
one ; but most of them were drinking such water as 
they would be likely to find by digging through the 
shingle near the sea. They suffered too from want of 
room, being encamped in a narrow space ; and as the 
ships had no roadstead, some of them took their meals 
on shore in their turn, while others lay off at anchor. 
But their greatest discouragement was caused by the 
time being prolonged beyond their expectation ; for 
they imagined that they should reduce them to sur- 
render in a few days, shut up in a desert island as they 
were, and having only brackish water to drink. 



425—430.] "Ore. 21 



Chap. 40. § 2. (fir) on — aWa [/cat], ovx ^'^^ — 

dWa [/cai]), 

425. a) Mrj ore is "used elliptically for fj.rj ecTrco 
{eiirrj^) otl^ fxrj Xeyco/jiep on, or the like = / will not 
say; not to say, &c. Ol/xat dv jjut) 6tl ISlcottjv nvd, 
d\\d TOP fjiiyav /Saaikea — dv evpelv kt\., am of 
opinion^ that not only an individual^ hut the Great King 
himself icould find^^ kc. ; or, am of opinion^ that^ I 
will not say a private individual^ but the Great King 
himself &c. ; or, '/ am of opinion^ that even the Great 
King^ mucli more a private individual^ would,' &c. 

Oup^ on {=ovfc ipoj on) is used in the same Avay, 
but less commonly 

Ou^ OTL fJLOVO^ 6 KpLTCOV iv r/cTV^^^ia rjv, dWd Kal 
OL cf)L\oc aVTOV {Xen.). 

426. b) When a negative follows with the predi- 
cate which is common to both clauses, /jlt] on — aXV 
ouSe, =not only not — but not even. 

^Airarovpio^ /jlt] on hiicdcraa^ai dW ouS' iyKaXe- 
aaL fJLOL iroXfirjcrev {Isce.), 

427. c) The common negative may also precede 
both clauses. 

Trjp oifciav rj dWo n S)v fcefcrrjaaiy vopbi^cDV dpyv- 
piov d^LOV elvaif ovhevl dv /ir] on irpOLKa So/?;?, dX\ 
ov8' eXarrov rrj^ d^la^ Xa/3cov {non modo non gTatis 
des, sed ne si minus quidem accipias, quam est illarum 
rerum pretium. Xen.), 

428. d) After a negative clause, pur] 6n = non 
modo; nedum: ouS' dvarrvelvy pbrj on Xeyecv n Swrj- 
(jopie^a = much less to say any thing (Xen.), 

429. e) *AX\d without Kal is used after ^7; otl (as after ov ixovov), 
when the second clause, from its greater importance or more general 
meaning, makes it quite unnecessary to dwell upon the first, 

430. /) Ol»x o(tov is also used Hke ovx on : ol /jL€p ovx octov ovk 
7]fj.vuavro, aA.V ouS' icru^rjcrav {Th.). For oux ot'? '^'e also find ov juo- 
vov on. Kal fJ.7]v vTrepa7ro\ri^r}(TK€Li/ y€ fxouoi i^eXovcriu 01 ipcoureSf 00 
^lovov oTi hudpes, aWa Kal yvua7K€s {71071 modo — sed eticnn. PL). — A 
particle like yap, ovy, may be inserted between the ovx Stto^s, &c. 



214 ^ "Ore. 



[431. 



Exercise 116. 

431. (1) I put questions, gentlemen of the jury, to 
eacb. of these men, before many witnesses. I asked 
Onetor and Timocrates if any persons were present 
when they paid the marriage portion; Aphobus I 
asked, whether any were present when he received it. 
They severally answered, that no witness was present, 
but that Aphobus was paid by instalments in such 
sums as he desired^ from time to time. Now can any 
one of you believe (the portion being a talent), that 
Onetor and Timocrates put so large a sum into tne 
hands of Aphobus without witnesses? Aphobus! 
against whom, though paying him in presence of a 
multitude, one would take every precaution, so as (in 
case of dispute) to be able to recover one's rights be- 
fore a jury. In a transaction of such importance, no- 
body in the world would take steps without a witness, 
whomsoever he had to deal with, much less with such 
a person as Aphobus. 

(2) I am sure you will all agree, that men who 
give false testimony are induced by one of three mo- 
tives; either by a bribe to relieve distress, or by 
friendship, or by enmity to the adverse party. Not 
one of these motives can apply to my witnesses. Not 
friendship, certainly; as they are not men of the 
same pursuits or the same age with me, or even with 
each other. Not enmity to the plaintiff ; for one of 
them was his brother, and pleaded for him ; Phanus 
was his friend, and belonged to the same tribe ; Philip 
was neither friend nor foe ; so it is clear this motive 
cannot be alleged against them. Nor was it poverty ; 
for they are all men of large fortunes, out of which 
they defray the charges of public offices, and cheer- 
fully perform the duties imposed on them. 

• * In such sums as I desii-e/ /ca^' biroaovovv deoixai (hv d^ia/xaiy tkc,y 



432—434.] 



215 



Chap. 41. § 1. Ov. 

432. a) Ovy 72ot, is an objective negation, firj being 
subjective; or, as Hermann expresses it, "ou negat rera 
ipsam^ yur] cogitationem rei :'' of. Gr. 1157, sqq. ; in de- 
pendent sentences, 1161, 1166 (and Part I. § 19, 50) ; 
with infin, (where fjurj is the nsnal neg.), 1165, 1167, 
1168 ; wcrre ov with infin.^ 1173 (Part 1. 297) ; partcp,^ 
1164; relative clauses^ 1163); ov (pTjf^c {a^tcj, &c.), 1172; 
(rj) ov SloXvctl^ = the non-destruction, ov /jltj, see 797, 
798. TL OV] 794. ov fut. = im2:^er.^ 796. On po- 
sition of ov, 1195. In questions, 1357. 

oh is used before consonants, ovk before \ aiaspirated vowels, ovx 
before aspirated ones. But the original form ov (cicm acuto) is used at 
the end of a clause even before a vowel. ITpocrerTre ce /jl€V ov, 'Ep/j.oy4- 
vf] Se. Ovk. is however used in the form ou/c, aAAa . . (because here 
scarcely any pause was made). So in ovk, ei 7' ivvo^Ls. — The compar- 
atively rare ovx^ is used with emphasis {Kr.), In answers ov (ovk) = no. 

433. M dWov rj ov is sometimes fonnd in the sense 
of ^ rather than^^ the ov being apparently superfluous. 

V o care on ov irepi rcov e/jicov lolcov fiaWov 
TLficDprjcraa^e UoXvKXea rj ou^ virep v/icov avrcov {Dera. 
Polycl 1226, 22). 

Ov ^dp ; are sometimes inserted as a parenthetical 
question ; ^is it {was it) not (so) ? 

KaXd ye, ov ydp] & avhpe^ ^A^r]valoL^ rd ye- 
jpa/jL/jbeva Kal y^dpiro'^ iroWrj^ d^ta, el rjv dXrf^rj 
(Bern, contr, Aris. 673, 19). 

Exercise 117. 

434. (1) The Athenians sent a trireme to Paches 
with intelligence of their resolution, and commanded 
him to despatch the Mytilenaeans as quickly as possi- 
ble. The next day, however, they felt immediately a 
degree of repentance, and reflected that the resolution 
they had passed was a cruel and sweeping one, to put 
a whole city to the sword, instead of ^ those who were 
guilty. When the Mytilenaean ambassadors who were 
present, and those of the Athenians who co-operated 



216 



Ov fJbrj, 



[435—437. 



with them, perceived this, they got the authorities to 
put the question again to the vote. 

(2) Here then is one public transaction of this 
young gentleman's which bears a striking resemblance 
— does it not? — to what he urges against me. Now, 
recall to mind a second. X When Philip sent Python, 
the Byzantine, at the head of an embassy from all his 
ijonfederate states, with a view to expose us ^ and con- 
vict us of injustice, I did not submit to the insolence 
of Python, or yield to the torrent of his abuse, but 
rose up in my place, and answered him. I did not ^ be- 
tray the cause of the city, but retorted the charge of 
injustice against Philip himself with such evidence, 
that even his own allies were forced to rise up and con- 
fess it. Whereas this fellow co-operated with Philip, 
and gave testimony, and that, false testimony, against 
his country. 

^ Say : * rather than (noty ^ Say : * the cit^! 

® Use the emphatic form. 



Chap. 41. § 2. fjioj {ov fjirj) redundant ; firj c. participio. 

435. After verbs that express or imply the notion 
of denial^ prevention^ or the like, and are followed by 
the infinitive (or acc, c, mfin,\ the infinitive usually 
takes an apparently redundant fjufj^ or, if the principal 
verb is negatived^ /jlt) ov. 

apvelraL fjirj Xa^elv, negat se accepisse, 

ov/c apvelrai fir] ov \aj36iv, non negat se accepisse, 

436. But non negat se accepisse \^ sometimes transla- 
ted without any repeated negative ; sometimes with (jlt} 
only before the inf. So that the three forms are : 

^1. ov/c apvov/jbai fjur] ov')(^ovt(ds elvaL 
(usually). 

2. ovic apvovfjiai ovtw elvaL 

3. ovfc apvovfJiaL /jut] ovtw elvai, 

437, Hermann explains the distinction between these three ways thus: 
t l) sine negatione simphciter ^i^i^coim non ego ita esse : (2) cum du- 



Non ego ita esse 



i38— MO.] Ov iiri. 217 

plici negatione ^7; ov duhitantius res proponitur : (3) cum solo fxr] gravis 
us res affirinatur ; — contendo non ita esse. — Hence i7i re futurd (with 
reference to which it is natui'al to speak doubtf ully) the use of /at; ov is 
the usual one. 

The verbs that admit of this construction are verbs of denial and 
contradiction {apuov/nai, air-, i^-apvov/JLai, €^apv6s el/Jii, avriXiyu)) ; of for- 
Udding {aTrayop€v<a, aireTirop, <fec.) ; of forbidding by a vote or decree (oltto- 
p7j<pLCo(xai, airox^tpoToyot}), <fec. ; o£ changing or retracting an opinion 
or resolution (aTroyLypdccrKcc, awoBoKu, /jLcrayiypdoa-Kco, auarL^e/jiai, also 
iirevxofJLai) ; of acquitting (a7r0A.ua>, a(/)i77^i) ; of avoiding, hindering, re- 
itraining (any body from — ), or setting any body free from — (evXa^ov- 
fiat, (pvXaTiojJLai, kooXvco, diaKcvXvco, i/jLiroddou ^Ifxi, ezpyoj, olttex^) and e^co 
[=- retinere^, a(paLpov/jLai, cL-noo'repot}, trco^co, cfec.) ; and verbs that express 
doubt or distrust (dTritrTcD, air p 0 ad 6 K-qr 6s el/xi, <fec.). [(2;^" For /xr} with ris 
(any body) fnjdeh is used.] 3£ 

438. The apparently redundant /x?) ov is also nsed 
after expressions tliat deny (expressly or by implica- 
tion) tlie possibility of doing any thing : ov {ovSeUy &c.) 
SvvaraL /xr] ov — ; ov^ olov re (aSvvarov or dBvpara) 
fir) ov — (and the like), tls /^vX^^^ f^V — ! ttoWoO 
Sect) /IT] ov — , or TO /jlt] — . 

OiSet? 0609 t' iorrlv a\Xo)<; \eyo)v /jltj ov /ca- 

rayeXaa-TOS elvat {PI-)- El oXtj^t] ravra, r fjbT}- 

X^^V f^V 0^%^ Trdvra /caravaXco^rjvaL eh to re- 

^vdvai] (PL). 

It is seldom that is here used alone (0 v dvvr^croprat /xt] Tr^L^ea-^at 
Tols (dri^aiois. Xen. Hell. 6, 1, 1), unless the article is prefixed, when 
t5 /x^ — and yi^ ov — are both found after a principal verb that is de- 
nied. Tou ^77 (but not Tov fM^ ov) is also found. Also wo-re /ir] ov after 
a principal verb with negative (Jf.). On these various constructions, of. 
Grammar 1180 — 1183 ; and the Appendix to the Olynthiac Orations. 

439. The particles jubfj ov are also found with the 
infin. after expressions that denote or imply the speak- 
er's disapprobation of a particular action, since such 
expressions intimate a desire that such action should 
not be performed, or, if it be a course of action, persist- 
ed in. Such expressions are heivov {alay^povy alayyvr]) 
eaTLV, dvorjTov iariv, ttoWtj avoid icrrcv, &c., also 
ala')(yvofiai, {M.) 

440. Mr) ov (==^nisi) also stand (but seldom in Attic 
prose) with participles and other attributive notions, or 
other notions of closer specification that form an excep- 

10 



218 



Ov (JLTj. 



[441, 442, 



tion to a general denial^ or statement tliat implies or 
leans to a denial. 

Ai TToXeL^ TToXkal kol ^aXeTral XajSeLv—fMr] ov %p6- 
vo) Kal TToXcopKLa, {Dem,) M, 

441. Hermann observes that fj^rf with a participle 
or nonn==5z non; firj ov = nisi, the latter implying 
doubt or hesitation^ the former simple assumption. (Vig. 
p. 800.) 

On the general rule for the choice of /jlti or ov with a participle, cf. 
Gr. 1164, and 1184 — 1192. I will add here that iLi-f] and its compounds 
are to be chosen, not only when ill-tj may be resolved into a conditional 
clause, or into the notion of a class of a particular kind (= toiovtos t>s 
ju^ — ), but whenever it is dependent on a verb {infinitive or participle) 
that would itself require /ult} (not ov) for its negative : for instance after 
an imperative^ oScrre c. infin. &c. 

Exercise 118. 

442. (1) Moreover,^ 0 judges, just so have they 
dealt with the ivory and iron that was left me ; f they 
do not produce it. Now it is impossible that one who 
possessed so many slaves engaged in cabinet-work, and 
so many in the manufacture of cutlery, should not 
have left some iron and ivory : % he must have had 
some, for, without any of these materials, what could 
the slaves have manufactured ? 

(2) Socr. Again, from the beginning, Theaetetus, 
endeavor to tell me what science is ; but never say that 
you are unable to do so ; for if God wills, and you 
strive manfully, you will be able. 

ThecE, Indeed, Socrates, when you are thus urgent, 
it would be disgraceful for one not to endeavor to the 
utmost of one's power to say what one is able. He, 
then, that knows any thing, appears to me to per- 
ceive what he knows, and, as it now seems, science is 
nothing else than perception. 

SocT. Well and nobly said, my boy ; for it is right 
thus to declare one's opinion. But come, let us con* 
sider this together, whether it is solid or empty. 

• Supra, 394. 



443—447.] OvSL Ovkovp. 



219 



Chap. 42. OvSi. 

443. OvSe {- ne — quidem) always relates to some^re- 
ceding notion (expressed or implied) ; and when ovhe — ■ 
ovhe are repeated, tliey are not correlative particles (like 
neque — neque)^ but the first ovSe has its own proper 
force (connecting the negative notion with what pre- 
ceded)^ and the second adds to it a new notion in the 
same independent Avay: =ne — quidem^ — neque, 

Ev yap iCT^L, OTL ovhe iv aWcp ovSevt dycovt^ ovSe 
iv irpd^€L ovSe/jLLa [lelov e^ec^ Sea to /SeXTCov to aoo^a 
Trapaafcevdaacr^at {J^en,), 

444. a) OvSe before a single notion = ne — quidern. 
'Before oo-tlctovv, &c., cf. Grram. 1476, 5.] h) OvS 5? 
^'ne sic quidem)^ not even so, ^ 

445. c) OvBe el? (ne unus quidem) is stronger than 
ouSe/?, and so ovSe ev than ovSev, To strengthen avr' 
ovSevo^^ KaT^ ovSev, &c., the separate forms ouS' a^' 
€1/0?, ovSe /ca^' ev are used. Cf. Buttm, Mid, p. 70 
(note 93). 

(Compare Chap, on oure.) 

Exercise 119. 

446. This then is the first point about which I will 
endeavor to give you information, if you will be kind 
enough to listen to me with attention. I will show 
you that the estate never belonged to the defendants 
at all, but was my mother's property inherited from 
her father ; and then that Aristarchus took possession 
of it by no law whatever, but on the contrary) is, in 
conjunction with his relations, injuring my mother in 
violation of all the laws (^'upon the subject.) 



Chap. 43. Ovkovv. 

' 447. OvKovv • ov/covv. ^ Particula ov/covv scribenda 

I est ovKovv ubi significat, (1) nonne ergo ? nonne igitur f 

i 



220 



OvKOVV. 



[448, 449. 



(2) ejyo (scilicetj nernpe^) ; — (3) ovkovv vel ovic ovv, non 
ergo. (4) ovkovv nbi sigiiificat no7i sane, non profecto^ 
nequaquam^ (Kiihner.) 

448. In OVKOVV ergo the ovk seems to be superflu- 
ous, '^but it intimates tliat the speaker claimSj in a 
half-questioning manner, the assent of the person ad- 
dressed: Tj Toivvv TOVTcov, ecf)?}, KpeiTTov^ yevea^e, rj 
fiiver^ avTov. Ovkovv^ rjv 8' iyco, €Tl ev XetTrerat, 
TO 7]v 7r€Lcrco/jL€v vfjLa<; ] [H.) 

Cf. Chap, on ovv (where other examples are given 
in the Exercises). 

Exercise 120. 

449. (1) It argues great simplicity in any man to 
irffagine that, when human nature is eagerly set upon 
doing any thing, he has any means of diverting it 
either by the rigor of the laws or by any other kind 
of terror. We must not, therefore,^ either take bad 
counsel through trusting to the punishment of death 
as our security, or leave to those who have revolted 
no hope of being allowed to repent and wipe out their 
offence in as short a time as possible. 

(2) The defendant and Therippides paid me thirty- 
one minas, and charge me for payments to the proper- 
ty-tax eighteen minas. But I will put it at a higher 
sum than this, and make it thirty minas, that they may 
not have a single word to say against it. If then you 
take this talent from the eight, the remainder is seven; 
and so much they must have out of what they them- 
selves allow that they have received ; and therefore, 
even though they rob me of all the rest by denying 
that they have it in their possession, yet this at least 
they ought to have paid me, since they confess' (j)) 
that they have received it out of my property. 

* Ovkovv ='71071 ergo : a general negative thus standing at the head of 
(and relating to) the whole clause is followed by oi/re — ovt€ for either — or. 



^ Ovkovv f extra interrogationem, acerbam inter duin habet ii'oniana 
(Bremi, Dem. p. 238). 



450—454.] 



O VP. 



221 



Chap. 44. Ovv. 

450. OvPj (1) thuSj tlien^ therefore^ sOj accordingly; 
(2) -ever. 

This particle denotes conformity witli the state of 
things, a consequence drawn from it, &c. ; or (accord- 
ing to Hartnng) identity or equivalence : and is used in 
the following way : — 

451. a) With relatives and indefinites it has the force 
of 'Cunque: oarc^ ovv^ quicunque ; oirrj ovv, qiLomodo- 
cunque and qiiocunqiie ; otocnrep gvp, qualiscunque, 

4:52. b) In the combinations dX)C ovv, arap ovv, 
Se ovv (8 ' ovv)^ it has nearly the force of o/im, never- 
theless, 

Kat iXi'^rjaav Xoyoc aTnaroL fJbev ivLOtcn 'EWrj- 
vcov, iX€')^r]aav S' a)v (=o5z/, Ion, Hdt,)^ hut never- 

tJieless they icere reported, 

453. c) In the combinations elV ovv^ ovr^ ovv, ixrjT^ 
ovv^ the particle denotes indifference with respect to 
choice (as if, whichever be taken, it w^ill come to the 
same thing), 

JSIV ovv ^av6vTo<^ etre /cat ^covto<; Trepc Aeyco (Eur,), 
VK a^cco ovT ovv ae i poias ovre aov 1 poiav en 
{Eur,), [Also elV ovv — clV ovv, elV ovv a\rf^rj^, 
elV ovv yJrevSo^, PI, See note on 298.] 

454. d) In the combinations yovv, yap ovv^ ovkovv, 
fji(bv and fjL€v ovv^^ [cf. Grr. 1479] the particle denotes 
the feeling of certainty raised to indifference^ and that 
nothing can change. 

"E')(ei<; StSd^ai S77 ' ottoc Ka^ecTTafiev ; — Tas yovv 
^A^rjva<^ otSa, rbv Se ')(Odpov ov {Sojoh,). IloWcbv 8?) 
evEKa Xefcreov, ^Ae/creov yap ovv^ {Eur,; assent V;ith 
indifference and confidence), Mrjrep^ aXkd fiot av %aip6. 

* Sometimes, especially in Hdt., this particle, placed by tmesis be- 
tween a preposition and its verb, denotes a cool proceeding, a rash or 
saucy action done with the utmost composure and indifference : -^V -is 
tl/avcrr) aurwu Trapioou vos, avTo7(n ifxarioLaL ctt' d)U ejSai/ze ecouroV, he cocUy 
(or without more ado) plunges into the water, clothes and all. 



222 



Odv. 



[455—458. 



'Xapra jovv Trdcr'xco, rifcvov,^ why assuredly what I 
suffer is a matter of rejoicing^ my child (Eur.). T6v Se 
Xtaaea^aty j^prjfxaTa jjuev a(f)c iTpolivra ylrv^rjv 8e Tra- 
pabreoixevov* ovk(ov Srj Tret^ecv avrov rovrocat {Hdt). 
TL^ 8 ' 6 Kar^avcov ; fjbo^v rj re/cvcov rt^ (ppovSo^ rj yepoav 
nrarrip] {Eur.) surely (be it who it may) none of his chil- 
dren^ nor his aged father? [On fiev ovv, see f^ev, 375, 
376.] 

455. Kal yap ovv proprie est etenim sane. — Sed saepe yap redit ad bre- 
vem, quae reticetur, sententiam hujusmodi : *6tl Se ravra ouroos ex^i i^^X^) 
(pavepdp, Plerumque Kal yap ovv in ejusmodi locia verti potest igitur, 
itaque (ICr. ad An, 1, 9, 8) : iircdei^ev — avrhv '6rL irepl irXeiffTov ttoloTto — 
Tcp virScrxoirS ri, firjhhv xpevdea^ai. Kal yap oijv Qiricrr^vov fihi avT(^ 
at TToAeis iTriTp6Tr6iJL€vaij iirLarcvov S' ol dvBpes. 

(See an example of yap oZv in Ex. on /ia, 372. 

456. e) Consecutive use of ovv = accordingly^ thus^ 
then.~\ Here ovv denotes tlie identity or exact correspond- 
encCj of the conclusion or inference with the premises 
from which it is drawn. Hence it is extensively used 
(as a resumptive particle) in returning to a previous 
statement after a parenthesis or any long and involved 
clause (= / say^ sOj then) ; e. g. Karavocov 8e 6 Kvpo^ 
CO? ktX, — ifc TovTcov OVV eTTe^v/jLet {Xen,y 

457. So Homer uses ovv, eirel ovv, when after 
a detailed statement he returns to his narrative. 

i o apa bopirov eTrtaraoov coTrXi^ovro — oo o eiret 
ovv iravcravTO ttovov ktK, — Avrlfca S' alerbv r}K€ kt\. 
— oi o w OVV €LOov^ or ap etc zlw rfSv^ev opvt<; 
kt\. {Horn,), 

This is the only use of the particle in Homer : — 
but in the common dialect ovv is very frequently used 
to denote a conclusion^ inference^ &c. 

On OVK ovv, OVKOVV, ov/covv, cf. ov/covv. 

458. [The above is from Hartung, who derives ovv 
from avv, acc, of aS? a Laconic and Cretan form of 
avT6<;. Hence his pressing the notion of identity. I 
think, however, that the meanings may be better de- 
duced from the original meaning (this) being ; ovv being 
(according to this view) derived from iov^ ov, neut 



459, 460.] 



Ovv, 



223 



participle from ehac. Hence tlie particle refers to a 
present state of things ; very mucli like our thus^ so^ then.'] 

Ovv ^7] et oZv . . . aliquoties a Gr£ecis conjunctae sunt eodem jure, 
quo Latini et igitur jam et jam igitur dixerunt. Quae enim harum par- 
ticularum aptius cum voce praecedenti conjuncta esse videretur, ea prio- 
rem locum obtinuit, posteriorem ilia qua3 minus apte cum ill^i voce con- 
sociata erat. {Kl.) 

459. In Ti ovv 577; TTwy ovv drj: the drj is connective ; if it precedes 
the ovv and stands immediately after the interrogative particle, it aflfects 
it, and modifies the nature of the question. Ti otv Brj ; = quid ergo / 
hovj so ? hovj now? vjJiat then? ttc. 

[" Verbis quid ergo instituitur interrogatio ex antecedentibus. Atque 
ea yel cum reliqua interrogaticne coeunt xeYper se constant, sive sequa- 
tm* nova quaestio sive non. — Ita et is loquitiu*, qui ex praecedentibus 
aliquid colligit, qucB quum ita sint (= why then ?) ; et is qui distinction 
rem rationem requirit eorum quce ante dicta sunt ; quid his verbis tibi 
vis ? {=how so ?) et is qui consequentia quaerit: luhatthen? et is qui 
miratur rem, quae dicta erat antea, in consequentia baud probabilem 
quid hoc est ? {how so? how now?), et is qui cum indignatione respondet, 
rem fieri de consequentia. In plurimis his comparari potest Graecum 
Ti ovvP VoL ii. p. 456.] 

Exercise 121. 

460. (1) Socr, Let iis then recur to what was be- 
fore agTeed on. Did you say that to be hungry is 
pleasant or painful ? I mean the very fact of being 
hunoTY. 

Col. I said it was painful: though to eat when 
hungry is pleasant. 

Socr, I understand you : lut still to be hungry of 
itself is painful ; is it not so ? 

Col. I admit it. 

Socr, And also to be thirsty ? 
Col. Assuredly. 

Socr. Whether, then, shall I ask you any more 
questions ? Or do you allow that all want and desire 
is painful ? 

Col. I allow it ; so do not ask. 

Socr. Be it so. 

(2) When Aristeus was returning from the pursuit, 
seeing the rest of the army conquered, he was at a loss 
which place he should risk going to, whether towards 



224 



Ovv, 



[461. 



Olyntliiis or to Potid^a. He determined, however, to 
draw his men into as small a space as possible, and at 
a running pace force his way into Potidsea ; and he 
passed along the breakwater through the sea, annoyed 
by missiles [from the Athenian ships], and with diffi- 
culty ; having lost a few men, but saved the rest. 

(3) Mer. And in ships is a man a good commander 
of a vessel merely because he possesses iiautical science^ 
alike whether he be subject to sea-sickness or not? Or 
how shall we say ? 

Ath, He is by no means a good commander, if, be- 
sides his science, he is subject to the malady you men- 
tion. 

Exercise 122. . 

461. (1) CaL What ! does it follow from this that 
Pericles was a bad man ? 

Socr. Be that as it may, a man of this kind would 
be thought a bad manager of asses, horses, and oxen, 
if having received them, neither kicking, nor butting, 
nor biting, he should make them do all these things 
through vice. Does not every trainer of any animal 
whatever appear to you to be a bad one, who, having 
received it gentle, has made it more vicious than he 
received it? Does he appear so, or not? 

Col. Certainly, that I may gratify you. 

(2) Immediately after these things, in the very 
same winter, Tissaphernes proceeded to Caunus, wish- 
ing to bring the Peloponnesians back to Miletus, and 
after making still another convention with them, to 
give them pay, and not have them driven to absolute 
hostilities with him ; being afraid that if they were 
without supplies for many of their ships, they might 
either be compelled to engage the Athenians and be 
defeated, or through their vessels being unmanned the 
Athenians might without his assistance attain the ob- 
ject of their wishes. And again, he was most of all 
afraid that they might ravage the continent in search 



462.] 



O^v T e . 



225 



of supplies. From calculating tlien and forecasting 
all these things, in accordance with his wish to reduce 
the Greeks to a footing of equality with one another, 
he consequently sent for the Lacedaemonians, and gave 
them supplies, and concluded a third treaty with them, 
to the following effect. 

(3) Socr, Tell me now, with respect to those men 
whom you a little before mentioned, whether they 
still appear to you to have been good citizens, Pericles, 
Cimon, Miltiades, and Themistocles. 

Cal To me they do. 

Socr. If, therefore, they were good citizens, it is 
evident that each of them made his fellow-citizens 
better instead of worse. Did they so, or not ? 

Cal Yes. 

Socr, When Pericles, therefore, began to speak in 
public, were the Athenians worse than when he ad- 
dressed them for the last time ? 

Cal Perhaps so. 

Socr. There is no ' perhaps ' in the case, my good 
friend, but this is a necessary consequence from what 
has been admitted, if he really was a good citizen. 

Cal But what then ? 

Socr. Nothing. But tell me this moreover, wheth- 
er the Athenians are supposed to have become better 
through Pericles, or quite the contrary, to have been 
corrupted by him. 



Chap. 45. § 1. Oiire. 

462. ^ Oiire ab ovSi differt notione cequatmiiSj qu^e 
in re inest, et ouSe negationem vel alicui rei opponit 
vel disjunctam conjungit^ ut modo sit, but not, modo, 
and not Illud ovre autem significat atque non^ ideo- 
que in disjunctione duarum rerum comparandarum 
ponitur ovre. — ovre, quasi dicas ut hoc non — ita illud 
noUj hoc est, neither — nor. Si ad originem particul^e 

10- 



226 Oiire. [463—466 

non ad usiim respicis comparabis ov-Si cum ??e-c, ovt€ 
cum ne-que^ (Hand, vol. iy. 96). 

In connecting a negative clause with, a preceding 
clause, tlie connection is made thus — 

463. a) Not — nor by ovSe (juv^e), when a negative 
member precedes. 

OvK av ovv TO^ora^ ye {rj koXtj irapalveai<^ aya- 
^ov? TTOirjaeLev) — ovhe {jltjv d/covTLO-rd^, ovSe /jir)v 
LTTTria^ {JCen,). 

464. b) [ — and not'] by /cat ov {/cat fii]), when an 
affirmative member precedes : this is the regular form 
in Attic prose (in Ionic writers and the poets ovSi or 
fjirjSe can also be used here. K.), 

Aiarelvov fxdXKov 7rpo9 to cravrcS irpocre')(eLV, Kal 
fir) d/niXet tcov rrj^ 7r6Xea)9 (-Zen.), ^alvofiat rolvvv 
iycb ')(dpiro^ TervxrjKob^ t6t6 Kal ov fJbefji'y^eoi)'^^ ovhe 
TLfiaypias {Dem,^, ^Eira/jLvvare — Kal fjifj irpoija^e rj/bid^i 
{Th,y ^Ecbatv dpa ae d ^ovKei iroieiv, Kal ovSev iirt- 
TrXrjTTovaLVj ovSe StaKcoXvovo'L iroieiv S)v dv eirC^vfJifi^; 
(PI) [On dXX ov, c£ 18]. 

465. c) by ovre — ovre {jJ^rjTe — f^rjTe), neque — neque 
{neve — neve)^ neither — nor^ when the two or more suc- 
cessive members are negative. — Of this construction 
no examples are necessary. 

[If a negative stands at the head of a clause, either — or, — or, <fec., 
must be translated by oi/Ve — oi/re — ovre (or /^i^Te — <fec.)]. 

466. d) Ovre — re (seldom Ka'C) do not exactly agree 
with neque — et^ for they connect notions of equal im- 
portance^ whereas in neque — et there is an ascent to a 
more important^ or a descent to a less important notion. 
[Hand, iv. 134.^] 

^'iflfjioaav — fjL7]T€ TrpoScoaeLV aXXT^Xou? G'viJLfxa')(pi re 
eaea^ac {Xen,). Ovre yap dyopd ianv iKavrj- — rj re 
X^P^ T^oXejubla {Xen^, 



* Pape thinks that there is especial emphasis on the affirmative 
clause. 



467—470.] 



Oire. 



227 



467. e) OvSe {=ne — quidem) always relates to 
some preceding notion (expressed or implied). Cf. 440. 

OvT€ — ovSe (= neither — nor yet ; nor — not yet) oppose 
tlie notion which they connect disjunctively : cf. Mar- 
tial, 6, 75, 4 : has ego nec mittam Pontia^ sed nec edam 
{will neither send — , nor on the other hand — ). Hand, 
But Hermann observes that in ovre — ovhe there is no 
proper correlation, but the writer, dropping the con- 
struction ovre — 0VT6 after the first ovre, appends the 
second notion, not correlatively to the first, but inde- 
pendently **as a new sentence : Quse est re vera grata 
quasdam familiaris sermonis negligentia." (Ad (Ed, Col. 
1141). 

468. When ovhe — ouSe are repeated, they are not 
corresponsive particles (like neque — neque), but the first 
ovSe has its own proper force (connecting the negative 
notion with what preceded), and the second adds to it a 
second notion in the same independent way : = ne — 
quidem, — neque, 

V yap lai^L, ore ovce ev aW(p ovbevi ayo)VLy ovoe 
iv irpd^et ovSe/jbia fietov e^et9 Slo, to /3e\Ttov to awfia 
irapaaKevdaaa^ai {X^en,), 

469. The foUowino; connective forms are more rare, 
and belong mostly to poetry, viz. ovTe — ov, ov — ovTe, 
Te ov — re. ovt€ — re ov, found also in prose. 'EkkXtj- 
criav Te ovk liroUi — , Tr]V re iroKiv i(pvXaaae (Th.), 
OvT6 iiceLVo^ €TC KaTevoTjae, to t€ fJiavTelov ovk ehrjXov 

{Th):\ 

Exercise 123. 

470. (1) \_Call'] "l^iW not prefer life to liberty ; 
nor will I desert my leaders either alive or dead ; but 
will bury all the corpses of our allies who shall have 
fallen in battle. And when I have conquered the bar- 
barians, I will not destroy any of the cities that have 
fought on the side of Greece, but will decimate every 
one that has sided with the barbarians : and of the 
temples that shall have been burnt or pulled down by 



228 



OvT€. 



[47a 



the barbarians, I will not rebuild a single one, but will 
allow tlieixL to remain as a monument of barbarian im- 
piety to those who come after us." - 

(2) It is not meet, gentlemen of the jury, that I 
should be refused redress, or my opponent retain the 
wealth he has plundered. With regard to myself, 
though you have no actual experience of my disposi- 
tion towards you, it is fair to presume that I shall not 
be worse than my father. Of the defendant you have 
some experience ; and you well know that, though he 
has inherited a large fortune, he has not only shown 
no liberality to the public, but even grasps at the pro- 
perty of his neighbor. Bear in mind this, with the 
other facts of the case, and give your votes according 
to justice. 

(3) Socr, And I know that I should be treated just 
in the same way, if I came before a court of justice. 
For I should not be able to mention any pleasures 
which I had procured for them, which they consider 
as benefits and advantages ; but I neither envy those 
who procure them, nor those for whom they are pro 
cured. And if any one should say that I corrupt 
younger men, by causing them to doubt, or that I re- 
vile the elder men, by speaking bitter words, either 
privately or publicly, I should not be able to say the 
truth, that ^ I say and do all these things justly, and 
for your advantage, judges, and nothing else.' So that 
I should probably suffer whatever might happen. 

(4) jSoct, Then, secondly, we should consider this, 
whether we have ever constructed any private build- 
ing, either for any one of our friends, or for ourselves, 
and whether this building is beautiful or ugly. And 
if, on examination, we found that our masters had 
been good and famous, and that we have constructed, 
in conjunction with our masters, many and beautiful 
buildings, and many privately by ourselves, after we 
had left our masters, in that case it would become men 
of sense to undertake public works ; but if we were 



471—474.] 



Ovre, 



229 



not able to show that we had a master, nor any build- 
ing at all, or many, and those of no account, it would 
surely in that case be foolish to attempt public works, 
and to exhort one another to undertake them. Shall 
we admit that this is well said; or not ? 
Cal Certainly. 



Chap. 45. § 2. Ovre — ovSe (continued), 

471. ' OvT^ apa, ouS' dpa obviate a prejudice or a 
false expectation.'' (Hartung.) The apa may sometimes 
have its force rendered perceptible by considering it 
equivalent to: ^ as the person spoken of thought^ feared^ 
expected^ &c.' 

Thus II. 6, 333: ^ 

jiyvdoorKCOv, or^ dvaXfCL^ erjv Sreo?, ovhe ^edwv 
rdcov aiT^ dvSpcov TToXe/Jbov Kdra KOipaveovaiv, 
ovT^ dp^ ^AisTjvairi^ ovre iTTo\LiTop^o<^ 'Evvco — 

neither for instance Athene, as he had feared^ nor, &c. 

472. In oiJt' ovv — ovre the ovv (accordino; to Hart 
ung : see 483) denotes indifference with respect to choice, 
i. e. both notions are denied indiff^erently^ the confidence 
with which the denial is made not depending upon 
which of the two statements is thought probable by 
the person or persons addressed. The speaker denies 
them both, no matter whether others do or not. 

473. In ovh' ovp^ the ovv has the same force, but 
the 06 (of ovBi) refers to what precedes = 7zo, nor yet ; 
nor yet (is the foUoAving supposition at all more true 
than the preceding). 

Exercise 124. 

474. (1) Moreover vfe ought not^ to be given to 
excessive laughter ; for commonlj^ where a man gives 
himself^ to excessive laughter, such a disposition re- 
quires also a violent change. — I think so, said he. If 
then any one should represent men of worth and note 
as overcome by laughter, we must not accept this ° rep- 



230 nip, irri, irX'nv. . [475, 476, 

resentation, :[:mucli less if lie (°so represents) deities. 
Much, less, he replied. 

(2) What other sophist*^ then, or what private rea- 
sonings do you think will counteract these with suc- 
cess ? I know none, said he. Certainly not, said I, 
but even the very attempt is excessive folly. For no 
other kind of feeling or disposition towards virtue 
either is or was, ay, or ever will be formed by the 
training of these men : any human one, I mean, my 
friend ; for as to a divine one, let us, according to the 
proverb, leave that out of the question : for be assured 
that if under the present constitution of governments 
any thing is saved, and becomes such as it ought to be, 
you will not be wrong if you assert that a divine prov- 
idence has saved it. 

* 'AXAa ^)]v ovde (the ou5e referring to what preceded, what fol- 
lows being no more true than that). ^ i(pi€i/ai as intrans. sc. eavrSv. 

^ He has called the general body of citizens in the pubhc assembly 
the worst and most ruinous sophists of all. Accordingly the citizens 
collectively are * these mevb alluded to below. 



Chap. 46. Hep, ttt], ttXt^v. 

475. Tlep (enclit., utique ; often adversatively : = 
quamvis). It comes from the preposition Trepl, round, 
denoting the whole compass of the notion, so that the 
word to which it is attached, is to be taken in its whole 
extent. As Kriiger expresses it, it ' presses the identity^ 
of notions (6 avros oanrep = the very same, who). In 
Attic Greek it is principally appended to relatives, and 
adverbs of time or condition {paTrep, oaoairep • ovTrep, 
oTTovirep • ecTTep, &c.) ; and to kul in Kaiirep. With 
the relatives it often has the force of our ever, soever. 

^E^Tjpa oTTovTrep hriTv^yavoi, wherever. 

47 6. a) Ut] (or properly ttj} as dat. fern.) is an in- 
terrogative particle. As a local (interrogative) particle 
it stands between irov and ttoZ, and sometimes appears 
to denote rest in a place. But the difference is thus 



477—480.] 



231 



explained by Eeisig : 11 fj a irol differt eatenus, ut hoc 
sit in quera locum versus^ illud qua in via : unde intelligi- 
tur quo modo potuerit poeta variare dicendo : tto?, ira 
(pepofiat ; i. e. quorsum, qua via feror ? et cur Trfj dupli- 
citer dicatur, vel de motu vel de statu. Eur. Hip. 877, 
Tra (f)uyco; Arist. Plut. 438, ttol rt? j>vyoLf (ad (Ed, 
Col, 23.) Urj interrog, is also in what respect? liow? why? 

^77. h) Hrj (enclit.) : indef. ; any where^ in any way^ 
any how : ovrco 7777, et irrj e^ere aWo n <^dvaiy &c. {PI.) 

478. c) Urj fiev — irrj Se, partim — partim, Hermann 
recommended irrj fxev — irrj he* but the particle is in- 
variably circu.mflexed in the MSS. 

TLXrjVi except: as conjunction^ or quasipreposition 
with gen, : ttXtjp el, except if, [Eelated to irXelv, irXeov, 
more, KL] 

479. As a conjunction^ it either has a complete sen- 
tence, or only a case appended to a preceding verb, so 
that properly the verb must be repeated with a nega- 
tive {Kr,), 

Havre^ dv^pcoiroi rjSeco<; 7rpoaS6)(^ovTac ra? ioprd^^ 
7r\r]v ol Tvpavvoi {jKen,), 

Exercise 125. 

480. (1) In the first place let them reverence the 
gods above, who regard the desolation of orphans, and 
then the souls of the departed, whose nature it is to 
take an exceeding interest in their own descendants ; 
and still further f the souls of those who are alive in- 
deed, but in extreme) old age, and in the possession 
of) the highest honors, wherever a state is flourishing 
under good laws: if they love these tenderly, their 
children's children live a happy life. 

(2) Socr, You say truly. And on this account we 
ought to tRirn over all speeches again and again, and 
CQnsider whether any easier and shorter way to it can 
any ivhere be found, in order that we may not in vain 
go by a long and '"ough one, when we might have 



232 



Il0T€j TTOV, TrpiVj IT CO^ TTCOTTOre, [481 



488. 



taken a short and smooth one. If, therefore, you have 
heard of any thing that will assist iis, from Lysias or 
any one else, endeavor to call it to mind, and tell it me. 



Chap. 47. Uori, ttov, irpCv^ irco^ Trcoirore, 

481. jflore (enclit.), at any time; at some time; once, 
JlepiKkia IT ore (f^aat nrapaivecraL v/jllv ktK, 
With interrogatives it expresses surprise : r/? vrore; 

who in the world? tandem), ^Aei iroTe, and, less 
commonly, ad hr} irore (where the hrj adds emphasis 
to the aet), are favorite expressions with Thucj^dides : 
= always; all along, 

482. TIov (enclit.), (1) somewhere; (2) perchance^ 
perhaps ; (3) / imagine {opinor)^ used in conversation 
when any thing is assumed in a half-questioning way, 
that the speaker may build something on the assent of 
the person appealed to. ArjTroVy 261. ttov, 320, 

483. Upiv [cf. Gr. 1272—1276] :=prius, potius, Gr. 
1276, c, ^ 

ITco (enclit.), ) till now^ hitherto, yet^ ever {yet\ 
UcoTTore, ) after negatives, 

No/jLov^; ou? ovS€l<; ttco fcvpto<; ejevero /ca^eXelv, 

485. a) Without a negative^ ttco occurs only in 
questions that are virtually negative, 

486. h) OvTTcOy fJirjTTO) {ovSeTTco, ixrjheiTO}), never yet^ 
not yet: 7ro)=^dum in non dum {H.), 

OvTTco TToWat y/jL€pat acf>^ 6v — ivLKare {Xen. An, 

3, 2, 14). Etc TCOV OvSeTTCO OVTCOV {PL), 

487. HayTTore is seldom annexed to the simple ou, 
fjirj, but usually to ouSe, fxrihe. {ovheircoTTOTe, fjn^heirciyirore), 
OvSeTTcoTTore usually with aor, (not with pres, and fut, 
except in late writers). Lob. Phryn. 458. 

Both TTCO and TrcoTrore may be separated from the 
negative particle by the interposition of other words. 

488. JIco, TrcoTTore occur in virtually negative ques- 
tions (rtV TTCO ; t/9 TTcoTTore ; t^St] TrcoTTori rov rjKOVcra^^ ; 
PI,) ; and iroyirore also after el. 



i89, 490.] 



Ti KUL. 



233 



E'i 

^'EXeyov OTL ov ttcotto^' outo? 6 iroraixo^ SLafSaro^; 
<yevoLTo Tre^fj ktK, {Xen, An, 1. 4, 18). 

Exercise 126. 

489. (1) For the Corintliians, having their city sit- 
aated on the isthmus, had always possessed an empo- 
riunr; as the Greeks of old, both those within the Pel- 
oponnese and those without, had intercourse with each 
other by land more than by sea, through their country : 
and they were very rich, as is shown even by the old 
poets; for they gave the title of wealthy" to the 
place. And when the Greeks began to make more 
voyages, having got the ships (° I just mentioned), they 
proceeded to put down piracy ; and rendered their city 
rich in income of mioney, as they afforded an empori- 
um both ways.^ 

(2) Socr, "What then? do you suppose that any 
one has ever proposed to consider within himself of 
five and seven, I do not mean seven and five men, or 
any thing else of the kind, but the numbers five and 
seven themselves, which we said were in his soul like 
impressions in wax, and that it is impossible to judge 
falsely respecting them, — has any man at any time con- 
sidered these very things, speaking to himself and ask- 
ing how many they are, and answered, one that he 
supposes they are eleven, and another that they are 
twelve, or do all men say and suppose that they are 
twelve? 

* afjL(p6Tepa (Gr. 1516, 14), i e. both by sea and land. 



Chap. 48. § 1. Ti—KaL 

490. Kat particula est conjunctiva^ re adjunctiva^' 
(H.). 

491. a) Ti — /cat connect two notions so as to form 
one whole (the second is ofteiij but not always, the 



234 



[491—494. 



more weighty: cf. aXXco? re fcac), whereas kul — Kal 
rather separate them as two co-ordinate notions, upon 
each of which the mind is to dwell. 

KdWiaTov T6 Kal aptarov {X^en.y Ev re Xiyere 
Kal iycb To3 vofitp irelaoixaL {Xen^, 

492. h) Kai — re {et — que) is a freer poetical mode of 
connection {M.), Bnt Hermann remarks : ^ non magis 
Kal — re, qnam apud Latinos et—que ^ in partitione po- 
nitur' (ad Bacch, 803) ; i. e. the members are not con- 
nected as equal^ but the second is appended by re as 
an additional notion. 

493. c) In Thucydides re is frequently used (like 
que^ Kt,) as a particle of continuation : the statement 
introduced is, however, very often an instance or result 
of what has previously been stated (=== and so ;^ and 
thus ; thus for instance), 

Kal fJi^^XP^' '^^^^^ TToWa t^? 'EWdSo<; tg3 TraXaiw 

TpoiTcp vefieTai irepL re AoKpoif^ rou? ^O^oXa^ Kal . 

To T€ (7tS7]po(f>op€la^aL TOVTOL<; Tols TjireLpdyrai^ diro 
T7]<; iraXaua^ XycrreLa^ i/jifie/jbevrjKev {Th, 1, 4, Poppo 
observes: ^'Particula re apud Thuc. saepe simplex est 
copula ; atque hie usus multo latius spectat, quam ob 
Eost. Gr. § 134, A, 5, b, 7, credideris"). 

494. d) If more than two members succeed each 
other, they are connected in the following manner; 
(1) with the first member the connective is omitted, 
and the other members foUoW; connected by KaL re- 
peated ; (2) KaL — Kal — Kaiy Sec, (3) re — re — re, &c. (4) 
T6 — Kal — Katj &c. 

^'ApKTOL T€ 7roXXov<; r}^7} 7rXr](ndaavTa<^ Ste(f)^€Lpav 
Kal Xeovre^ Kal Kdirpot Kal irapSdXec'i* al 8e eXacjyot 
Kal 8opKdo6<; Kal ol dypiot 0669 Kal al ovoc ol dyptoL 
daivel^ elaiv (Xen.), 



^ I. e. in Cicero ; for, as Hand shows, other writers were less careful 
in observing this difference. 

^ Hand compares atque : Rhodum ct Cyprum — petehat Atque 
[a7id so) ilium cicpido incessit, (fee. Tac. Hist. 2, 2. — i. p. 478. 



495—497.] 



T e — Kai. 



235 



(5) re — re, &c., kul (Epic) Od. 7, 413. 'E')(^6(f>pcov 
re St parlor re Tlepaev^ r' "Aprjro'; re /cal dvrl'^eo^ 
&paav/jCrjSr]^. 

(6) re — re Kat — &c. (seldom) : yvvrj vTroSe^a/jiivr) r e 

4>ep€L TO (f)OpTLOV TOVTO^ ^apVV0/jL6V7] T6 K al KLvhweV- 

ovcra — Kai — /cal /ct\, {^en.), 

(7) After Kal two members, considered, as it were, 
one wliole, may follow with re /cal {iirira^e ktcdaroL- 
(tl) /cal vea^ re Kai lttttov^; /cal alrov /cal TrXola {Hdt), 

(Kco/jLrf) fieyakri re rjv Kai jSaaiXeLov re el^e tc3 
crarpdiTrji Kai iirl rai^ rrXeiaTat^ OLKLat^ rvporei^ iirr]- 
aav {^en,), 

(8) re — Kai Sr] Kai, qiLum — turn vero etiain, K. 

495. e) It is not, indeed, uncommon to find he cor- 
responding to a preceding re ; but an instance of this 
will hardly be found, except where the word or notion 
that precedes the Se is to be emphatically brought out 
in contrast with what preceded {Th. 1). 

496. /) Sometimes re is followed, not by /cat, but 
by Se, alone or with some other particle {eireLra Se, 
dfjba Si. d/ia Se Kaly en Se Kat, chaavrco^ Se, iroXv iiaX- 
\ov Be) ; the copulative connection with which the au- 
thor began being given up for an adversative one, either 
for the purpose of giving prominence to the second 
notion, or because it is far removed from the re (i/.). 

*'jEz^ t6 rfj TMP eiTcbv iroirjaei 7roXKa')(ov 8e Kai 
aXXo^L {PI, Pol, 3, 394). '^ETTe/iyjrev rj/jLd<; — eTraiveaov- 

rd^ re vfjid'^, on ktX, eireira 8e Kai ^vvTja^rjcro- 

fievov^j on kt\. {Xen, An, 5, 4, 8.) 

497. g) When Hartung says that re — re are often 
synonymous with r/ or elre (vel)^ or with fiev — Se, of 
course he must be understood to mean that the copida- 
tive connection is used, when the other forms might be 
used; e. g. d^to^ o re Trapcov o t' ov nraptjov^ might hQ 
construed and expressed whether present or not — flence 
it is sometimes found irregularly in correspondence 
with (Jiev (or Se): 7) 7r6XL<^ ^poro^ o/ioto)?. — 

JO) fJLev epya Kai ird^o^ yevo<; re Trap, 



236 



Te'— 



[498—501. 



498. h) On ovre {iMrjre) — re, see cliapter on ovre. 
When two notions have a common predicate, re 

KaL are, as a general rule, not used, unless the predi- 
cate might be affirmed of each of the notions separately. 
If it is only true of the two when taken together^ the 
simple Kai is the regular connective particle. 

499. To this rule, however, many excej)tions occur: 
e. g. irfj SLa(p6pet 6 TvpavviKo^ re Kal ISccotckos ^lo^] 
{JCeii, Hier, 1, 2), and ravrbv apa ev ye rot? oaa 
api^lJbov iarl, to re irav irpoaayopevopiev Kal ra 
airavTa] {PI. Thecet 204, d), — Dissen lays down the 
rule thus: "Ponitur re KaL etiam ubi divisum est 
prsedicatum aliqu.od inter duo Bubjecta, si fortiorem ac- 
centum rhetoricum ambo vel patiuntur vel postulantJ"^ 

500. Ne ibi quidem ubi altero membro non diver- 
sa commemorantur re Kai ab loquendi consuetudine 
abhorrere verissime docuit Thiersch, comparans ilia 
Homerica II. a. 23 : alhela^ai Sr' lepria Kal dyXaa Se- 
')^aL aiTOLva. Ih, k, 121 : UoKkaKi yap fie^ieL re Kal 
ovK i^eXet iroveea^ai^'' {Stalb. ad Oorg. 460, d). 

Exercise 127. 

501. (1) Do you remember saying a little while 
ago, that we must not blame gymnastic teachers nor 
banish them from our cities, if a boxer does not use 
his skill in an honorable manner, but^ behaves unjust- 
ly? And so, also, in the same way, if a rhetorician 
should employ his oratorical power to unjust pu.rposes, 
we ou2:ht not to blame his teacher, nor drive him from 
the state, but should censure the person who acts un- 
ju.stly, and makes a dishonorable use of his rhetorical 
skill ? — Was this said, or not ? 

(2) Socr, You fight manfully, Theaetetus. But is 
not this very all, the all when nothing is wanting to it? 
Theoi, Necessarily so. 

Socr, And will net the whole be this very same 
thing, when nothing is wanting to it ? but when any 



602—504.] 



237 



thing is wanting, it is neitlier the whole, nor all, each 
becoming the same thing from the same cause ? 

Thece, It appears to me now, that the whole and 
the all do not ever differ from each other in any re- 
spect. 

Socr, Did we not say, that where there are parts, 
the whole and the all fwill make up^ all the parts? 

(3) You have apprehended my meaning quite cor- 
rectly, said I, and I think that I can now make plain 
to you what before I could not, that in poetry and all 
fabulous writing one species of it is wholly imitative, 
as you say, namely, tragedy and comedy; another 
species is entirely a narration from the poet's own 
mouth, — a species you will principally find, I take it, 
in dithyrambics, — and, again, a third species, ("^ found) 
both in epic poetry and, indeed, f in many other sorts 
of composition,^ is compounded of both modes. 

* Say : * will be.* ^ 7roAAaxo»" dWo^i. 



Chap. 49. Tea)?. 

502. Teo)?, so long^ until [reo)? — eo)?, but mostly 
eo)? only]. This is its proper meaning in the form 
Te&)9 fjih {^for a time!\ i. e., more precisely, ii]^ to the 
time which is then defined by the ojpjjosed statement. 

Tea)? \xev 'r]GvyuCpv^ eVel S' iyyv<; iyevovro rev 
')(copiov eK^paiJLovre^ rpeirovrai avrov^ (X^en.). 

503. Even in Attic prose Tea)?.is sometimes found 
for 60)9 (e. g. in Dem. Cf. Buttm. Ind. ad Mid. p. 187). 
Kr. 

Exercise 128. 

504. (1) Whether of the two had been the cause 
of the dissension, it is not, perhaps, my business to de- 
termine ; but so far at least I may pronounce them 
both deservedly culpable, that, having till then been 
friends, and no just pretext arising for a breach of 



238 



ToL 



[505. 



their friendsliip, they so hastily became enemies on 
account of some idle words. 

(2) We hold that the nearest of kin should marry 
the heiress, and that the property should be hers till^ 
her sons are of full age,^ but that they should then 
come into possession of it. 

* Say : * should be hers for a time, but when her sons,' &c, ^ ( vl 
5i6Tes rj^^y. Cf. Lid. and Scott. 



Chap. 50. ToL 

506. (1) Hermann derives the particle tol from t<5 
^propterea^ igitur^ and says that it denotes primarily a 
necessity^ and then a self-imposed necessity of thinking 
any thing to he (or not he) so and so. 

(2) Nagelsbach considers it to be the dative of ttj 
= av ; and hence to denote a confidential intimation to 
the person addressed, that the assertion is certainly 
true : it involves, therefore, an appeal to the judgment 
of the person addressed. 

[On this supposition the force of roi may be given (though in an ex- 
aggerated way) by look you, let me tell {beg) you, tfec] 

(3) Hartung, deriving one roi from the demonstra- 
tive pronoun, refers the enclitic roi to the Gothic 
thauh^ and makes its primary meaning that of satisfac- 
tion or acquiescence in any thing : from whence he de- 
duces its use in proverhs. &c. ; in pert or forward deci- 
sions [elprjaeraL roi* av roi jie Tret^e^?, &c,] ; in quiet- 
ing assurances \^dpaeL' /caret roc kol ctv Trpo<^ reKVcov 
ert] ; to denote the exhaustion of one!s patience^ so that 
if the thing must be so, it must [e/c tol ireTrX/rjyiiai • 
€fc roi fie rrj^ei^i * ^av/id tol //« ' v'jTep')(€TaL\ ; and 
finally to denote the resolution to put an end at once to 
delay ^ circumlocutions^ &c. [ravrd roc cr' e%^e6 ttoXc^, 
enough the state detests you for this reason : ovro^s & ce 
rot KoXco' (f)pdorov Se tol /jlol tco Trrepvye ircl vav- 
cTToXeh {tell do — or, tell me at once).'] 



506.] 



ToL 



289 



(4) Finally, Klotz considers the stronger {rot ac- 
cented) to have been demonstrative {=in this way)] the 
weaker (enclitic) indefinite (ra)=TLVi, in some way^ ali- 
qno modoj nescio quomddo). The expression that the 
thing is so some how or other ^ is naturally an assertion 
of the fact, though the speaker does not pretend to 
know the means, by which it is or will be effected. 

I am inclined to prefer, with Nagelsbach, the de- 
rivation from <jVy though that from Tcp—TLvi has 
much to recommend it. 

506. Its principal use is (a) with jpersonal^ demon- 
strative^ and relative pronouns. 

TavTT]^ TOL y€V€7]^ ^pr] (f)dvaL fcrX. — ^12 S(OKpaTe<;, 
iyco TOL ae fiev SUaiov vo/jll^o), goc^ov S' ovh^ otto)' 

GTLOVV, 

h) In maxims^ proverhs^ and other general proposi- 
tions. 

HavpoL TOL TToWcjp TTCCTTOV e^ovaL voov. 

c) Also with verbs expressing emotion. 

^ifi? TjhoiJLai TOL &c. 

d) It is sometimes {apparently) adversative. 

Ot/jLOL* TL S' oXflOL] ^VriTCL TOL TTeTTOV^a/JLeV, HcU 

mihi! quid heu mihi! verum tamen humana passi 
sumus, ut conquerendum non sit. (K derived from 
(TV, it will be : ive have suffered^ I tell you, the common 
lot of mortals,) 

e) It is also used asseveraiively in answers, 

Kal oaa dpa to irav ttX'^^o? KpaTovv tcop to, ')(^prj 
/xaTa i)(pvTcov ypd(f)€L fir) Treccrav, /Sta fxaXkov rj vojxos 
av €17]] MaXa tol^ (pdvaL top TlepL/cXea, & ^AXKtjSLd- 
St], ktX. {^en,) 

It is combined with, adversative particles (e. g. Kai- 
TOL, tamen^ quamquam ; fievTOL, tamen; aTdp tol, aWd 
TOL^ at vero ; at sane). Also ovtol {/jltjtol), certe non; 
ovSe ydp tol • /jltj yap tol, &c. ; tjtol — r/, still stronger 
rjTOLye — r;, aut sane {profecto) — aut ; yap tol, nam oiU' 
nino, {H, Yig. p. 816.) 



240 



Toi. 



[507, 508. 



507. ToL, 76, irepy all add emphasis to the word 
they are attached to : rot adds this force asseveratively ; 
yij intensively ; Trep, extensively. 

In giving the force of tol with an imperative, 
Stallbanm represents it by id quod dicere liceat (So in 
the third extract in the Exercise). 

Exercise 129. 

508. (1) Listen,' Gorgias, to what I am surprised 
at in what you are saying ; for perhaps your assertions 
are correct, but I do not correctly apprehend your- 
meaning. You profess to be able to make any one a 
rhetorician, if he is willing to learn of you ? — I do.— 
That is, to be one who is believed upon all subjects, 
when he speaks before a multitude^ not from instruct- 
ing men but from persuading them ? — Exactly so.*^ 

(2) Such is the truth ; and you will know that it is 
so, if, dismissing philosophy, you betake yourself to 
greater things. For, look you^ philosophy, Socrates, is 
an elegant thing, if one handles it moderately in 
youth ; but if one dwells upon it longer than is be- 
coming, it is the ruin of men. 

(3) Soc7\^ Why^ most excellent Polus ! it is for this 
very purpose, let me tell you^ that we get ourselves 
friends and sons, that when we, through being ad- 
vanced in years, fall into error, you that are younger, 
being with us, may correct^ our life both in deeds and 
words. If, then, Grorgias and I have fallen into any 
error in our arguments, do you who are present cor- 
rect us : you ought to do so. And if any thing that 
has been granted appears to you to have been impro- 
perly granted, I would wish you to retract whatever 
you please, only I beg you to attend carefully to one 
point. 

Pol What is that ? 

Socr, To restrain that prolixity of speech, which 
at first you attempted to employ. 



509—512.] 



TOLVVP, 



241 



Pol What? shall I not be allowed to speak as 
much as I please ? 

Socr, You would indeed be very badly treated, my 
excellent friend, if, having come to Athens, where of 
all Greece there is the greatest liberty of speech, you 
alone should here be deprived of this liberty. i3ut 
let me beg you to set this against it : if you speak in a 
prolix manner, and will not answer a question put to 
you, should not I be badly treated, if I am not allow- 
ed to go aw^ay and not listen to you ? 

^ Udj/v ijL€u qZv. ^ aWd roi is used twice in this extract ; 

fi€i/Tot, once. * iirai/opbovu, i. e. to 7'aise up and mpport us by 

deeds in distress, and set us straight {= correct us) in argument. Bek- 
ker, with Baiter and Sauppe, gives the subjunctive here ; Stallbaum the 
optative ; saying, "optativus post particulas finales in hujusmodi enun- 
tiatis usurpatur, si vel ex aliena mente et cogitatione loquimur, vel nihil 
nisifinem et consilium significamus adjunctd notione optandi^ So that 
the opt. here would = ?^^ nos, id quod optamus, sustentetis et erigatis. 



Chap. 51. ToLwv, 

509. a) ToLvvv. igitur^ — -jam vero^ loorro ; therefore^ 
then; — now^ so noiu. It is also used, when a person 
proceeds^ with an argument; now further^ hut now. 
Besides this, it is frequently employed in lively replies: 
why^ or why then ; well then.^ ^^quum quis alterius ora- 
tionem celenter et alacriter excipit, eique prompto ani- 
mo respondet." {K,) Very seldom as the first word 
of a clause. P. 

510. h) ToLyap, ergo^ proinde [=/iac de causa igitur, 
Kl. Not from tqL but the old TOi=Tw, cf. 505]. 

511. c) ToLydpTot, quapropter sane, rotyapovv^ ha.c 
de causa igitur ; quapropter ; quocirca (more sijllogistical 
from the addition of ovv) ; j^'^'oinde igitur (c. Imper.). 

Exercise 130. 

512. (1) Socr, Do you not say, then, that the wise 
and the foolish, cowards and the brave, rejoice and 
grieve in a equal degree, or cowards even more ? 

Cah I do. 

11 



242 



To tvvv. 



[512. 



Socr, Now in common with me, draw the infer- 
ences that result from these admissions. For, they 
say, it is beautiful to repeat and consider beautiful 
things twice, and even thrice. We say, that the pru- 
dent and brave man is good ; do we not ? 

Col, Yes. 

Socr. But that the foolish man and a coward is bad? 
Cal. Certainly. 

Socr, I will, therefore, go through the matter under 
discussion, as it appears to me to be : but, if I shall 
seem to any of you to grant myself what is not true, 
he must take me np and confute me. For, mind^ I do 
not say what I say as knowing it, but I am inquiring 
in common with you, so that, if he who disputes with 
me should appear' to say any thing to the purpose, I 
shall be the first to give in to him. I say this, how- 
ever, in case you think the discussion ought to be fin- 
ished; but if you do not wish it, let us give it up and 
depart. 

(2) After he had committed these wrongs, he was 
not aware that he had become most miserable, ^ and 
did not repent, but shortly afterwards, he did not Avish 
to become happy by nurturing his legitimate brother, 
the son of Perdiccas, a child about seven years of age, 
to whom the government of right belonged, and by 
restoring it to him; but having thrown him into a 
well, and suffocated him, he told his mother Cleopatra 
that he had fallen in in pursuing a goose, and so met 
with his death. Wherefore now, since he has com- 
mitted the greatest wrongs of all in Macedonia, he is 
the most miserable of all the Macedonians, not the 
•most happy (° of them). And,.perhaps, there are some 
among the Athenians, and you as likely as any "body, 
who would rather be any other of the Macedonians 
than Archelaus. 

^ This is ironical ; the speaker is mocking Socrates, who had asserted 
tl^at the unjust man is not a happy or prosperous one, even thougli he 
kas gained a tlirone by his injustice. 



613—515.] 



243 



Chap. 52. 'fl;, 

513. 'fl^ {c[uam ; quasi^ tariviuam ; ut ;~^i iiudj^ lioio^ 
as (both of manner and time), that^ in order zUcit. pro- 
perly a relative adverb (from 09 or from 6, whicli was 
orioiiiallv both demonstratiue and relative). Its oricj-i- 
nal meaning therefore is itt^ quomodo^ quam [hoiv). 

'/2? Sr] is used in ironical exclamations (=^as if!)^ 
properly, very much forsooth this would be so or so. 

514. a) '12^ corresponds to quani 

(1) In exclamations, '/2 9 acrT€L0<^ 6 av^pcDTTo^! a)9 
ovhkv rj fia^7](TL^, av firj vov; irapfj, quam nihil est doc- 
trina^ nisi mens adsit 

(2) With superlatives (especially adverbs) and some 
iwsitives. 

'fls Tu)(LO'Ta, quam celerrime ; (h<; XafiTrporaro^, 
quam splendidissimus ; &)? aXrfho)^. quam vere or verissi- 
me (properly sic ut vere, KL). 

515. b) It corresponds to quasi and tamquam; (1) 
with substantives : = as, for. 

^uXdrrecr^ac TroXe/iLOV^ rj/jid^. co? (pvXa/ca avpe- 

(2) With 'participles (especially when used absolutely 
ra Gen. or Acc.)^ to denote what seems or is givoi out 
It has often the simple meaning of as, as being ^ &c. 
(=quippe^ or quippe qui). [Grr. 1142.] 

(3) The meaning of as {f belongs also to with 
prepositions (e.- g. ek, iirC). This occurs in statements 
where less is said than is meant; e. g. to prepare him- 
self, ft) ? eirl fjLd')(}^v, as if for battle, where there is no 
doubt that the person prepared himself for battle. 

IJapecTfcevd^eTo ft)? e? iJid')^riv {Th.). ' Avdyea^ai 

(4) It -^s probably from this usage of ft)9, that it ob- 
tained the force of a p)rep)osition (but only before per- 
sonal names or pronouns): e. g. y/cetv co? iiJLe = i)fceLv 
ftj9 \7roo^\ e/jbs. 



244 'n^, [516—518. 

Ov)(^ rjfcei TTpo^ ere /crjpvaaoyp oSe. aXX ct)9 €fiG 
{Ear.), Kt. 

(5) From this notion of what seems to be the case, 
may also be derived the meaning of co? with {definite or 
indefiiiile) mxuiQTdl^ \ ~ fere^ circiter ; and such combina- 
tions as ft) 9 ra TToWd, a)9 iirl to it o\v:= nearly (or as 
it ivere) for the most part ; hence viostly, generally^ usually 

"EocoK€p ft) 9 iJivpia^ hpa')(^iJbd^ {Lys,). El/cd^ero Be 
€LvaL 6 ari/So^ (09 hta^tXicjov ittttcov. X.en, ['recte dici 
poterit etiam Latine, quasi his mille eqiiorum^ Kb] Kr, 

516. c) As corresponding with id^ uti^ (09 is used : 

(1) =a5.' ft) 9 olfiaiy opinor. 

(2) In wishes: ft)9 ept'? aTToXocTo! idinam [ati-nam] 
rixa pereat ! 

Here we find also oi;Tft)9 (w9) — ft)9: the clause of 
comparison, introduced by ft)9, expressing the object 
of the protestation. [Cf. ita me dii ament, id ego nunc 
la3tor.] 

(3) To denote an effect or consequence : koX yap — rd 
fjiev avveKTiKreL toop ^cocov Tocravrrjv Tpo(j)r]v ft) 9 ifcavr]V 
elvai, &C. 

In this use of 009, it occurs, though less commonly 
than (5(7T6, with ri after a comparative. 

It has sometimes a similar force after the positive^ 
or a substantive denoting a character or quality. Here 
we can use the infinitive: e. g. / know they are hut ordi- 
nary (or ignorant) persons to contend with iis^ iirLara- 
/xac ISicora^ oura^ ft) 9 irpb^ ?5//-a9 dycopL^ea^ac. 

(4) Like ut, and as^ 009 is also used of time; ft)9 
ISev {id vidit) : it is also used sometimes (as other tempo- 
ral particles are) of cause ; 'Croesus, as it luas summer^ 
did so and so,' ft)9 ^epo9 rjp {Xen.). 

517. d) As a yZnaZ conjunction, to denote a j9u?yo5e; 
= utj iva. 'He killed him,' ^(pvaop ft)9 ejj^ot Kravdov 
id haheret). 

On ft)9 dv {m as final conjunction) with suhjunct., 
Bee Pt. I. 

518. e) '/2? is also synonymous with otl after verha 



520, 521.] 



245 



sentiendi et declarandi. Here the infinitive also occiu i 
As being properly relative^ it also stands with reference 
to a preceding demonstrative or r/, or where one may 
easily supply the circumstance {that). 

520. /) {lit) in connection with a substantive 
(for which a predicate must be supplied from the prin- 
cipal clause) is used, like the Latin ut^ in order to ex- 
j)lain the predicate in the principal clause. It express- 
es either comparison or limitation^ and in the first case 
is to be translated by a<s, in the latter by for : the for- 
mer occurs, when the object is assumed to possess in a 
high degree the thing affirmed in the predicate of the 
sentence ; the latter, when it is assumed to possess it 
only in a small degree, 

Aatov yap r]Vy Elirep ns aXko<^, TrcaTo^, o)? vo/jl€v^ 
avrjp {as being a shepherd- Soph. QEd. E. 1118); but: 
ovK ahivaro^ &)9 AaKeSai/jiovio^ elTretv {for a La- 
cedcemonian ; it being known that they were no great 
orators), 

521. g) Special mention must be made here of pa- 
renthetical clauses, which often occur, and are appa- 
rently independent, and which are introduced by co? 
(seldom wcrre) with the infin. A limitation is very 
often denoted by these clauses. That, of w^hich such 
a subordinate clause gives the consequence or effect, 
must be supplied, e. g. tocovtco rpoirco, 

fit/cpop fi€ya\(p eiKaaai 

So 0)9 eVo? elirelvy id ita dicam^ propemodum dixe- 
rim^ ft)? GvveXovTi eliTeivy^ ut paucis absolvam^ ft)9 <ye 
juoL Sofcelv, ut mihi quidem videtur^ properly tali modo 
ut mihi videatur^ o) 9 i/xe ev fjie/xvyja^ac. 

Such clauses are very often expressed in an abridged 
form without 0)9, e. g. ov ttoXXcS Xojm elireLv, espe- 
cially oXiyov, fjLLKpov^ TToWov Selv, ita ut p)aulum^ mul- 
turn absit and in the still shorter form, oXiyov, p^rope^ 
pxne. 



* Yi r which (tw^Xovti elirely, aud avv^Kovri alone, are foiincL 



246 



[522—524. 



According to the same analogy, oaov, oaa, 6 rt, 
with infin., are used instead of o)?, e. g. oaov ye yu,' 
eiSivai, quanium sciam (properly, pro tanto, quantum 
scire posswi)^ o n fM^ eihevai. 

522. A) evt (=a)9 evean, as it is possible) is 
used with superlatives : 

€vi /jidXiara, as far as if is in any ivaij p)ossihle, 

523. ^) Sometimes a)9 follows a comparative, rj 
being omitted : 

Upo^viJiOTepov ireiToiriKa — ct)9 rjpay/ca^o/uLrjv i^Lys, 
Brem, p. 52). 

"Sis (with accent) == o{Jtco9, thus. It is common in 
the poets, especially the lonians ; but in prose is found 
only in ouS ca9, icai w9. 

Exercise 131. 

524. Socr, It turns out then that I was right; when 
I said that it is possible for a man to do what he 
pleases in a city, and yet not have great power, nor do 
what he wishes 

Pol, As if Socrates, you yourself would not like 
to be allowed to do what you please in a city, rather 
than not, and would not be envious when you saw any 
one either slaying whom he pleased, or taking away 
his possessions, or pmtting him in bonds. 

Socr, Do you mean justly or unjustly ? 

Pol, AVhichever he should do, is he not in either 
case to be envied ? 

Socr, Good words, I pray you, Polus. 

Pol But why? 

Socr, Because it is not right, either to envy those 
that are not to be envied, or the wretched ; but to pity 
them. 

Pol, f What say you?^ Does such appear to you 
to be the case with the men of whom I am speaking ? 
Socr. How can it be otherwise? 



525, 526.] 



ifl are. 



247 



Chap. 53. "fLare. 

525. " flare related to go?, as oare to 09, connects 
the following notions more closely with the preceding 
ones. 

In the sense of as in comparisons, it belongs to 
Homer and the Tragedians, though found now and then 
in the older Attic prose writers [Loh, PhrynA^I). 

''flare (c. infin.) is also sometimes = ea conditione ut, 
e. g. etSa)9 a TtfiaaLcovc — irrayjeXkoLvro ware efcirXelv 

"flare^so^ therefore^ loherefore: ware (quocirca, 
igitur) ovhev avroU irpovpyov ^vetv re /cat hwpa reXelv 
fxarriv (^PL). 

''flare, so that; so as. On ware with Inf., cf. Pt. I. 
§50. 

The infin. after ware may be strengthened by /caL 
-J 69 yap rov avrov ware Kal Kreivetv (fj voao^) 
ov/c erreXd/jL^avev {Th.), 

On ware {jltj^ ware ov, see Pt. I. 297, 298. 

Exercise 132. 

526. (1) ''I was but a boy when he came here be- 
fore. However,^ Socrates, all men praise him, and say 
that he is the wisest man to speak. But why do we 
not go to him that we may find him within? He is 
staying, as I have heard, with Callias son of Hipponicus. 
Let us go then." 

I said to him : ^' We will not go there yet, ni}^ 
friend, it is too early ; but let us rise up and go into 
our court, and spend the time there walking about, 
until it is light; then we will go. For Protagoras 
stays mostly within; therefore be sure, we shall prob- 
ably find him at home." 

(2) Clon and Demosthenes, aware that if they 
gave way even the least degree more, they would be 



248 



^'il are. 



[526 



destroyed by the Athenian forces, stopped the engage- 
ment, and kept their men otf them, wishing to take 
them ahve to Athens, if by any means, in accordance 
with their proposals, they might be induced to surren- 
der their arms, and yield to their present danger. 
And so they sent a herald, to ask if they would sur 
render their arms and themselves to the Athenians 
f to be treated at their discretion.^ 

* Cf. 47. ^ Say : * so that they should decide as they pleased 



rHE END. 



A 



PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION 

TO 




PAET 11. 

(THE PARTICLES.) 

BV 

THOMAS KEROHEVER ARNOLD, M.A. 

RECTOR OF LYXDON, 
AND LATE FELLOW OF TRINITY COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE. 

FIRST AMERICAN EDITION, REVISED AND 1 31 PROVED. 



NEW YORK: 
D. AFPLETON & CO., 443 Sc 445 BROADWAY. 

1866. 



Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1851, by 
D APPLETON & COMPANY, 
in the Clerk's Office of the District Court for iLe Southern District 

of New-York. 



PREFACE. 



In preparing tlie present volume for use in Ame- 
rican schools and colleges, the Editor has judged 
it most advisable to abridge somewhat the length 
of the Exercises, whilst retaining all the critical and 
grammatical apparatus for a thorough understanding 
of the use of the Greek Particles in Prose Composi- 
tion. He ventures to hope that the volume has in 
this way lost none of its utility for students in gen- 
eral, but rather the reverse. The Editor has also 
given some (but by no means full) directions w^ith 
reference to the arrangement of words in sentences, 
as well as some hints as to the position of particles in 
a sentence. 

It has not been deemed expedient to attempt to 
supply an English-Greek Vocabulary, especially as 
the very excellent English-Greek Lexicon of Yonge, 
edited by Prof. Drisler, will shortly be accessible to 
students. 



iv PREFACE. 

The Editor takes pleasure in acknowledging his 
indebtedness to his late coadjutor, Prof. Hyde, of 
Burlington College, for several suggestions tending to 
increase the value of the present volume. 

New- York, Sept l#t U5I 



PREFACE TO THE ENGLISH EDITION. 



The following work is the completion of my " Practical Litrcn 
duction to Greek Prose Composition," — a completion that hag 
been long announced, but long suspended in consequence 
partly of ill-health and j^artly of more pressing engagements. 

I am happy in having this opportunity of bearing testimony 
to the general excellence of Mr. Dale's recent Translation of 
Thucydides, contained in Mr. Bohn's Classical Library. I have 
found it nearly always an extremely accurate, and very often an 
extremely happy version of that difficult author. The volumes 
of Plato that have hitherto appeared in that collection, are also, 
as far as my acquaintance with them enables me to pronounce 
an opinion, very creditable to their respective Translators, Mr. 
Cary (whose translation of the Gorgias has supphed me with 
many examples) and Mr. Davis. I need not say, that Mr. 
Kennedy's Translation of the Speeches of Demosthenes against 
Aphobus and Onetor is both accurate and elegant. 



VI 



PKEFACE. 



To tlie translatoi's of a past geneiation my principal obii- 
gallons are due to Spelman, the translator of the Anabasis, and 
Sir W. Jones, ^vhose vei*sion of the Orations of Isseiis is usually 
correct, and is accompanied with very instructive Introductions 
and I^otes. 

T. K. A. 

Lyndon, Aug. 19, 1850. 



D. AFP LET OX dc CO:S PUBLIC ATW2sS, 



Xenophon\s Anabasis : 

With Explanatory Xotes for the use of Schools and Colleges in the 
United States. By JAMES R. BOISE, Professor of Greek in tlie 
University of Michigan. 12mo, 393 pages. 

A handsome and convenient edition of this great classic, really adapted to the want* 
of schools, has long been needed ; the want is here met by Professor Boise in a manner 
that leaves nothing to be desired. Decidedly the best German editions, whether text 
or commentary be considered, have appeared within the last few years ; and of these 
Mr. Boise has made free nse ; while, at the same time, he has not lost sight of the fact 
that the classical schools of this country are behind those of Germany, and that simpler 
and more elementary explanations are therefore often necessary in a work prepared for 
American schools. Nothing has been put in the notes for the sake of a mere display 
of learning — pedantry is out of place in a school-book ; and nothing has been introduced 
by way of comment except what can be turned to practical use by the reader. 

An historical Introduction, which will enable the pupil to enter on his task intel- 
ligently, is prefixed. An abundance of geogn?.phical information, embodying the latest 
discoveries of travellers, is supplied; and the whole is illustrated with Kiepert's excel- 
lent map, showing the entire route of the ten thousand on their retreat. 

The First Three Books of Anabasis : 

With Explanatory Xotes and References to Hadley and Kiihner's Greek 
Grammars, and to Goodwin's Greek Moods and Tenses. A copious 
Greek-English Vocabulary, and Kiepert's Map of the Route of the 
Ten Thousand. 12mo, 268 pages. 

Xenophon^s Memorabilia of Socrates : 

With Notes and an Introduction. By R. D. C. ROBBIXS, Professor 
of Languages in Middlesex College, Vermont. 12mo, 421 pages. 

This will be found an exceedingly useful book for College classes. The text is largo 
Mid distinct, the typography accurate, anl the notes judicious and scholarly. Instead 
of referring the student to a variety of books, fiw of which are within his roach, the 
editor has "vsisely supplied whatever is necessary. An admirably treatise on the Life 
of Socrates introduces the work, and Eng'ish and Greek Indexes render it oasy to refer 
to the text and notes. 

I 



n, APPLETON & CO:S PUBLICATIONS. 



Greek Ollendorff ; 

Being a Progressive Exhibition of the Principles of the Greek Grammar. 
By ASAHEL C. KEXDRICK, Professor of the Greek Lang-uage and 
Literature in the University of Rochester. 12mo, 371 pages. 

The present work is -what its title indicates, strictly an Ollendorff^ and aims to 
apply the methods whicli have proved so successful in the acquisition of the modern 
languages to the study of Ancient Greek, with such differences as the different genius 
of the Greek, and the different purposes for which it is studied, suggest. It differs 
from the modern Ollendorffs in containing Exercises for reciprocal translation, in 
confining them within a smaller compass, and in a more methodical exposition of the 
principles of language. 

The leading object of the author was to furnish a book which should serve as an 
introduction to the study of Greek, and precede the use of any gTammar. It will 
therefore be found, although not claiming to embrace all the principles of the Gram- 
mar, yet complete in itself, and will lead the pupil, by insensible gradations, from the 
simpler constructions to those which are more complicated and difficult. The excep- 
tions, and the more idiomatic forms, it studiously avoids, aiming only to exhibit the 
regular and ordiliary usages of the language as the proper starting-point for the student's 
further researches. 

In presenting these, the author has aimed to combine the strictest accuracy with 
the utmost simplicity of statement. His work is therefore adapted to a younger class 
of pupils than have usually engaged in the study of Greek, an4 will, it is hoped, win 
to the acquisition of that noble tongue many in our academies and primary schools who 
have been repelled by the less simple character of our ordinary text-books. 

Exercises in Greek Composition. 

Adapted to the First Book of Xenophon's Anabasis. By JAMES R. 
BOISE, Professor of Greek in the University of Michigan. 1 2mo, 
185 pages. 

These Exercises consist of easy sentences, similar to those In the Anabasis, having 
the same words and constructions, and are designed by frequent repitition to make the 
learner familiar with the language of Xenophon. Accordingly, the chapters and sec- 
tions in both are made to correspond. No exercises can be more improving than those 
In this volume ; obliging the student as they do, by analysis and synthesis, to mastei 
die constructions employed by one of the purest of Greek \vritcrs, and imbuing hiiD 
wTlh the spirit of one of the greatest historians of all antiquity 



D. AFPLETON 6l' C0:S PUBLICATIONS. 



Selections from Herodotus ; 

Comprising mainly such poitions as give a Connected History of the 
East to the Fall of Bab} Ion and the Death of Cyrus the Great. 
By HERMAN M. JOHNSON, D.D., Professor of Philosophy and 
English Literature in Dickinson College. 12mo, 185 pages. 

Tho present selection embraces such parts ol Herodotus as give a connected his- 
tory of Asiatic nations. These portions are not only particularly interesting in them- 
selves, but open to the student a new field, inasmuch as the other Greek and Eoman 
authors commonly put into his hands leave this period of history untouched. 

Herodotus is peculiarly adapted to academical reading. It has charms for the 
student which no other text-book possesses, on account of the simple elegance of the 
style and the liveliness of the narrative. In preparing his notes, the editor has borne 
in mind that they are intended for learners in the earlier part of their classical course ; 
he has therefore made the explanations in the former part of the work quite full, with 
frequent references to such gi*ammars as are in the hands of most students. 

The notes proper are purely explanatory and grammatical. Other remarks, in the 
way of criticism or investigation, are appended to the several chapters, for the sake of 
awakening reflection and inciting to further inquiry. 

A condensed treatise on the Ionic Dialect, and the peculiar forms of declension and 
conjugation used by Herodotus, removes -bne of the most serious difficulties that has 
heretofore embarrassed the student in reading this author. If this chapter is learned 
in advance, the dialectic forms, otherwise so troublesome, will be recognized without 
the slightest difficulty. 

The text is printed in large, bold type, and accompanied with a Map of the regions 
described. 

Sophocles^ OEdipus Tyrannus, 

With English Notes, for the use of Students in Schools and Colleges. 
By HOWARD CROSBY, A.M., Professor of the Greek Language 
and Literature in the New York University. 12mo, 138 pages. 

The object had in view in this publication is to furnish to college-students the 
masterpiece of the greatest of Greek tragic poets in a convenient form. Ko learned 
criticism on text was needed or ha*s been attempted. The Tauchnitz edition has been 
chiefly followed, and such aid is rendered, in the way of notes, as may assisst, not 
render needless, the elfurts of the student. Too much help begets indolence ; too little, 
despau , the author has striven to present the happy mean. 

The inviting appearance of the text and the merit of the commentary have made 
Uiis volume a favorite wherever it has been used. 



D. APPLETON <Sc. CO:S PUBLIC ATIO XS. 



Germania and Agricola of Cains Cornelius 
Tacitus : 

With Notes for Colleges. By W. S. TYLER, Professor of the Greek 
and Latia Languages in Amherst College. 12mo, 193 pages. 

Tacitus's account of Germany and Vie of Agricola are among the most fascinating 
And instructive Latin classics. The present edition has been prepared expressly for 
college classes, by one who knows what they need. In it will be found : 1. A Latin 
text, approved by all the more recent editors. 2. A copious illustration of the gram- 
matical constructions, as well as of the rhetorical and poetical usages peculiar to 
Tacitus. In a writer so concise it has been deemed necessary to pay particular regard 
to the connection of thought, and to the particles as the hinges of that connection. 
8. Constant comparisons of the writer with the authors of the Augustan age, for the 
purpose of indicating the changes which had already been wrought in the language ol 
the Koman people. 4. An embodiment in small compass of the most valuable labors 
of such recent German critics as Grimm, Giinther, Gruber, Kiessling, Dronke, Eoth, 
Ruperti, and Walther. 

From Peof. Lincoln, of Brown University. 

" I have found the book in daily use with my class of very great service, very 
practical, and well suited to the wants of students. I am very much pleased with the 
Life of Tacitus and the Introduction, and indeed with the literary character of the book 
throughout. "We shall mako the book a part of our Latin course." 

The History of Tacitns. 

By W. S. TYLER. With Notes for Colleges. 12mo, 458 pages. 

The text of Tacitus is here presented in a form as correct as a comparison of tae 
best editions can make it. Notes are appended for the student's use, which contain 
not only the grammatical, but likewise all the geographical, archaeological, and his- 
torical illastrations that are necessary to render the author intelligible. It has been 
the constant aim of the editor to carry students beyond the dry details of grammar 
and lexicography, and introduce them to a familiar acquaintance and lively sympathy 
with the author and his times. Indexes to the notes, and to the ngjnes of persons and 
places, render reference easy. 

From Prof. Hackett, of Keioton Theological Seminary. 

" The notes appear to me to be even more neat and elegant than those on the 
•Gciinania and Agricola."' They come as near to such notes as I would be glad to write 
•uvsclf ( n a classic, as almost any thing that I have vet seen." 

»12 f 



0 : 



V 1 fi ^, 



0 V 



-i 



X 



\ 



V 




I- 



o e 



\ ' ^ r 



0 c 



G 



, A A. O 



A 



0 a 



A^ 



5' 



X 



• V '-If 

> e ° ^ " 



vV/ 



0' 



X 



Deacidified using the Bookkeeper proces( 
Neutralizing agent: IViagnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: July 2006 ^ 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
(724)779-2111 



.0 




LIBRARY 



OF CONGRESS 



0 003 037 604 3 



